Home

Installer VISE User`s Guide

1. Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 36 Setting Installer Uninstaller Properties To set uninstaller properties 1 At the Installer Properties dialog box click on the Uninstaller tab The Installer Properties Uninstaller page appears Installer Properties General Uninstaller External Codes System Requirements Web I Include uninstaller Let user choose to have an uninstaller Uninstall log file path I Remove files that are in use Uninstall display name Regist key name Producti ames ProductN amezz Program group name DefProgramF older IY Show group window Program item name Remove Producth ame Program item icon path Icon index I Use common programs folder applies to NT 4 0 and greater only J External code dll path name Parameter LONG Parameter 2 LPSTRI o Illustration 6 35 Installer Properties Uninstaller page 2 Select from the following options by selecting the appropriate checkboxes Function Include uninstaller Includes an uninstaller with the installer Note If you do not select this field you cannot access any of the other fields on this page Let user choose to have an Lets the customer choose if he she wants an uninstaller uninstaller The following message appears to the customer during the install Would you like to include an Uninstaller The customer can then select yes or no Remove files that are in If checked th
2. Description Displays a billboard during the install Calls an external code library for custom programming Displayed only in the item list has no function during an install B Copy An action that copies file s folder s f An action that deletes file s folder s Checks for the existance of DirectX on the target machine Displays a dialog that prompts the user for a disk Displays a custom or built in dialog to the user Downloads a file from a FTP or a HTTP server A EE Edits the Autoexec bat file Edit CONFIG SYS Item Edits the Config sys file ES Edit Text File Item An action that edits text files 1 Files Adds existing files and folders to the archive 8 Billboard 8 Call External Code al Find An action that searches for file s folder s C Folder Creates a new folder in the archive 19 Goto Item Create a Goto action which can be used to jump to Label items Include VCT File Item 5 Ini File Entry Merges the contents of another VCT file at build time Read write or remove an entry in an INI file x For complete information on each action item see Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Table 3 8 Add Menu Commands Installer VISE for Windows Archive Menu 3 15 Command Function Package Adds a new package to the archive See Creating Pack ages Sub Packages and List Packages on page 6 7 for more information Sub Pack
3. Table 17 4 Call External Code Items Fields 7 Click on the OK button The File Properties dialog box appears Calling External Code This section explains how you can call external code at any time during the installation Any Time During the Installation To call external code 1 At the Archive window select Action Item from the Add menu 2 Select Call External Code A new Call External Code item is added to the archive and the Call External Code Action Properties window appears 3 Click on the General tab the Call External Code Action Properties General page appears 4 Type the name of your dll file in the External code dll file name field For exam ple if your dll file is sample dll type sample dll You can also click on the button and the Select File from Archive dialog box appears The dll files that you added to the Support Files package appear Select the appropriate file and click on the OK button The Call External Code Item Properties window appears 5 Make the following entries Action Parameter 1 LONG Type the number you want to be passed to the external code Parameter 2 LPSTR Type the string you want to be passed to the external code Variables used here are expanded to their runtime values Store return value in this Type the name of the runtime variable that saves the variable return value This variable can be examined at a later time and different actions can be performed based on
4. Illustration 10 9 Select Install Directory dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Select Install Directory Screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Make the following entries Choose Destination Loca Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the tion Select Install Directory Screen Choose Destination Loca Type the text you want to appear on this screen tion text Table 10 7 Select Install Directory Options Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Select Install Type Screen Customizing the Select Install Type Screen Installer VISE for Windows Default destination direc tory Win 3 x 10 15 Type the default directory name for the installation if the installer is run under Windows 3 x This value is stored in the runtime variable TargetDir See Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables for more information You can also click on the button to access the Choose Directory dia log box Default destination direc tory Win95 amp newer Type the default directory name for the installation if the installer is run under Windows 9 x Windows Me Win dows NT
5. File Menu Menu item Import Template Export Template Edit Menu Menu item Undo Closes the screen editor dialog and any changes you have made are saved to the Display Action item Table 11 1 Screen Editor File Menu Items Undo Ctrl Z Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Del Select All Ctrl A Set Tab Order Ctrl B Properties Alt Enter Test Screen Ctrl T Illustration 11 10 Screen Editor Edit Menu Description Undo the last action performed on your custom screen items Duplicate Duplicates the selected item s in your custom screen Delete Deletes the selected items s in your custom screen Select All Chapter 11 Custom Screens Selects all items in your custom screen Table 11 2 Screen Editor File Menu Items Installer VISE for Windows Edit Menu 11 7 Menu item Description Set Tab Order a You can rearrange the tab order for the items in your custom screen When you select this com mand a small number will appear in the top left corner of each item showing the current tab order Simply click on each number or anywhere in the item in the new tab order you desire As you click all tab order numbers will immediately update If you click anywhere outside of an item press the ENTER key or choose another command your tab order changes will immediately be saved Properties Display the properties dialog for the selected item You can also display
6. Serial Number Type the serial number of your copy of Installer VISE Table 2 2 Registration Fields 6 Click on the Activate button Installer VISE is now activated You are now ready to create an installer When you build an installer the Purchase Installer VISE Online dialog box does not appear Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 8 Activating Installer VISE Chapter 2 Getting Started Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE allows you to create customized installers through its easy to use commands and tools Review this chapter for basic information about using the Installer VISE pro gram This chapter contains the following information Common Installer VISE commands m Parts of the Archive Window m Archive Window menus m Using Installer VISE On line Help Common Installer This section describes some of the common commands you will use while working in VISE Commands Installer VISE Accessing Installer VISE To access Installer VISE Double click on the Installer VISE icon Insilze exe Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 2 Opening an Existing Archive The Archive window appears Untitled Mind ision Installer ISE 5 x File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help JEA 3 Compact Setup 3 Silent Setup 3 Pre Screens Items For Help press F1 Illustration 3 1 Installer VISE Archive Window
7. Source path Path name of the file s location outside the archive If the Store files in archive option is selected this path is used when the file is updated If Store files in archive and CD ROM Install options are not selected the path 1s used as the source file for building the installer These options are set by Choosing the File menu and selecting Installer Properties If the Store files in archive option is selected it is the size of the file currently saved in the archive If Store files in archive option is not selected it is the size of the file at the location of Source Path Modified If the Store files in archive option 1s selected it is the modified date of the file currently saved in the archive If Store files in archive option is not selected it is the modified date of the file at the location of Source Path Created If Store files in archive option is selected it is the created date of the file currently saved in the archive If Store files in archive option 1s not selected it is the created date of the file at the location of Source Path Version If Store files in archive option 1s selected it is the version of the file currently saved in the archive If Store files in archive option 1s not selected it is the version of the file at the location of Source Path Table 8 11 File Properties General Tab Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting File Item Advanced Propertie
8. Windows Directory Install the item to the current Windows directory System Directory Installs the item to the current Windows System directory System32 Directory Installs the item to the Windows System directory If the installer is running on Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP the item will be installed to the Windows System32 directory Temp Directory Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installs the item to a temporary directory maintained by Installer VISE This temporary directory and all the items in it will be deleted when the installer exits Table 8 21 Folder Properties general Tab Installer VISE for Windows Setting Folder Advanced Properties 8 37 Function Ask User Prompts the user to identify a location where the item should be installed Find Result Installs the item at the resulting path of an earlier find action item If a file was found matching the search criteria the file s parent will become the install location If a folder was found matching the search criteria it s path name will become the install location If the find result failed the item will not be installed Other Lets you select any location where the item will be installed You may use variables here If the folder doesn t exist it will be created Table 8 21 Folder Properties general Tab The following install locations are only valid when the installer is running on Windows 9 x Windows
9. 3 Check on build directives which will control the inclusion of this item in the built installer r Build Directives serve as limiting agents for action items If no build directives are checked the inclusion of the item in an installer build will not be limited Another way to say the same thing would be that if no E items are checked in the Build Directive list this action will always be included when an installer is built If only one build directive is checked the item will be included in the built installer only when that build directive is in effect Checking multiple items in the Build Directive list will result in an AND condition The Any Match item causes an OR condition to be in effect for any other checked items Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties 9 12 Comments Property Page If no items are checked in the Build Directive list this action item will always be included when an installer is built Comments Property The Comment Property page allows you to add comments about an item Page To access the Comments Property page 1 Click on the Comments tab from the Properties window of the selected item The Before Property page appears Copy Action Properties System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments Before After 4 Illustration 9 11 Comments property page 2 Type any comments you wish to be associated with the item Before Propert The Bef
10. Don t add to uninstaller Root key HKEY_CURRENT_USER y I Always uninstall Key Registry Editor Name El Value Sting y Default Illustration 8 43 Registry Entry Properties General page 2 Select one of the following actions you want to take place from the Entry pop menu Function Write entry Adds a write entry to the archive Read entry Adds a read entry to the archive Remove entry Adds a remove entry to the archive Write entries from a reg Writes an entry using a regedit file file Table 8 34 Registry Entry Properties General Options Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting Registry Entry General Properties 8 59 3 If you selected the Read entry option in the Entry popmenu type the name of the variable where the registry entry is stored 4 Select one of the following root keys from the Root key popmenu m HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT m HKEY CURRENT_USER m HKEY LOCAL_ MACHINE m HKEY_USERS 5 Make entries in the following fields Field Action Variable Name of a variable where a registry entry can be stored Only enabled if reading an entry Root key Root key in the registry Can be HKEY_CLASSES_ ROOT HKEY_CURRENT_USER HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE or HKEY_USERS Key Type the name of the registry key to read or write For example type SOFTWARE MindVision Install erVISE Preferences Registry Editor If clicked the Windows Registry Editor will be
11. Illustration 5 12 Screen details 3 Make the appropriate entries and click on the OK button The Screens window appears 4 Once you have selected all the screens you want to add to the installer click on the Next gt button The Ready to Build window appears The final decisions you must make before creating an installer are to select whether you want to create the installer as a single file or segmented files and if you want to include an uninstaller The uninstaller allows customers to remove your software from their com puter Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard 5 10 Editing an Installer Archive Editing an Installer Archive Once you have selected the appropriate options the Archive Wizard allows you to test the installer before it is built If you test the installer and decide you want to make a change you can use the Back button to access the window on which you want to make changes Ready To Build The setup program can be created as a single exe file that can be distributed via a network e mail or a BBS You can also choose to break the setup program up into segments that can be put onto floppy disks e Single file installer This option will create a single exe file that will install pour software C Floppy based installer This option will break the installation up into segments that can be put onto floppy disks n uninstaller can also be included with setup program If included the user will be able
12. Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 54 Setting Program Item Advanced Properties Setting Program item 1 At the Program Item Properties window click on the Advanced tab The Program Advanced Properties Item Properties Advanced page appears E Working directory Icon path Icon index E E fo I Don t add to uninstaller log M Use common programs folder applies to NT 4 0 and greater only Illustration 8 40 Program Item Properties Advanced tab 2 Select the working directory for the application from the Working directory pop menu 3 Select the path name of the icon file in the Icon path popmenu or click on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box If this is left empty the file name is used as the icon path 4 Type the index number of the icon in the Icon index field Files can have more than one icon in them This is the zero based index of the icon you wish to use For most cases this is 0 5 Click on the Don t add to uninstaller log checkbox 1f you do not want the pro gram item to be added to the uninstall log and to not be removed when the unin staller is run See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Pro gram Item Property pages 13 m System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 1
13. prrgarnnnannanecnnnnzos Move Files and folders y Named P Move to P Replace Always a I Version check Illustration 8 37 Move Action Properties General page 3 Select one of the following items you want to move from the Move popmenu m Files and Folders m File s m Folders s 4 Type the name to search for in the Named field You can use wildcards For exam ple type Moveme 5 Type or select the path name where to move file s and or folder s in the Move to field For example type Path name where C Backup If the folder does not exist it is created 6 Select one of the following options from the Replace popmenu Function Always Always replaces options if a file currently exists where you are trying to move it Never Never replaces options if a file currently exists where you are trying to move it If target is older Replaces options if the file on the customer s machine is older If target is older or the Replaces options if the file on the customer s machine is same older or the same Ask user Asks the customer if the options should be replaced Table 8 31 Move Action Replace options 7 Click on the Version check checkbox if you want to use version information with the replace options If you want the replace options to use the modified date of the files do not select this checkbox See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the followi
14. 1 Make sure that the source folder for the archive contains the new or modified files 2 Select Update Archive from the File menu VISE displays a dialog box listing all files in the archive Installer VISE remembers the location of the files used to create the archive and uses that path Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Updating An Archive 6 49 3 The Update Archive window will display Update Archive x Previous Difference poro eee vre Next Difference Cancel Update Name Archive Disk Status IV Assign parents package to new files Ba Updater VISE Y gt 3 Installer VISE lt new gt M 3 License txt 10 10 97 lt new gt v Readme txt 7 2 98 lt new gt m 3 Relnotes txt 7 29 98 lt new gt vi 3 uninstal log 8 3 98 lt new gt V gt Updater VISE lt new gt Y 3 vBG1 bmp 7 31 98 lt new gt M 3 vBG1a bmp 7 31 98 lt new gt M vBG5 BMP 7 22 98 lt missing gt v gt C Support lt source path change gt v e Tutorial lt source path change gt J vBGE BMP 7 22 98 lt missing gt v 3 ProductN ame txt 7 23 98 lt missing gt Y 3 updvise exe 7 16 98 lt missing gt 142 file s different 184 file s selected to update Illustration 6 41 Update Archive window 4 Use the chart below to determine which items have been modified since the last time you saved your archive Update Status Meani
15. 5 Click on the OK button The Actions Property window appears with the selected action item in the Install this item if these action results are true field similar to the following Copy Action Properties 1 fx General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives B4 gt Install this item if these action results are true Find files and folders named LastVersion in 4T argetDir succeeds New ls any DirectX version installed succeeds Install Service Item AutoDate succeeds Edit All statements must be true AND logic C Atleast one statement must be true OR logic Illustration 9 8 Actions Property page 6 Repeat these steps for each action item you want to add 7 Ifyou add more than one action select one of the logic type radio buttons m All statements must be true AND logic Every statement in the list must evaluate to true for the action to take place m At least one statement must be true OR logic Only one statement in the list must evaluate to true for the action to take place Copy Action Properties Ea es General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives B Alo Install this item if these action results are true Find files and folders named LastVersion in 4T argetDir succeeds ls any DirectX version installed succeeds Install Service Item 4utoD ate succeeds Edit Delete New C All statements must be true AND log
16. 8 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Finished Message 2 Screen 10 27 9 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 28 Customizing the Finished Message 2 Screen Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows 11 1 Chapter 11 Custom Screens Overview Installer VISE for Windows You can easily override the built in screens provided with Installer VISE to display screens in any order you desire or even create your own custom screens entirely from scratch using our powerful Screen Editor Typically Installer VISE displays several screens to the user during the course of an instal lation Installer VISE provides a selection of built in screens that you can choose from when creating your installers We ve worked hard to make sure that these built in screens handle the user interface required for most installations These screens are shown in the figure below with the default ones selected v Background Window Splash Screen v Wel
17. Opening an Existing You can open an existing archive from the Archive window Archive To open an existing archive 1 Select Open from the Standard toolbar or the File menu The Open dialog box appears Look in work in progress E File name Untitled VCT Files of type Installer VISE Files wct Cancel _ om Illustration 3 2 Opening an Existing Archive Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Changing the Name or Location of an Archive 3 3 Changing the Name or Location of an Archive Installer VISE for Windows Select the archive you want to open and click the Open button The selected archive opens MyProduct 3 3 YCT MindYision Installer VISE File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help 23 Support Files Actions Y Typical Setup ME Database Samples File Folder C Compact Setup VI 7 Endofmonth txt Text Docu a Silent Setup MEI Spreadsheet Samples File Folder 3 Pre Screens Items E Endofday txt Text Docu C o L Endofmonth txt Text Docu pida 4 L Endofyear txt Text Docu a Application 3 El Install Project Items M2 Find files and folders name Beginning Exercises Find files and folders named v1 in ZTarget File Folder 3 Advanced Exercises a Samples 3 Database Samples i Report 3 Spreadsheet Samples MIEJ Shortcut to MyProduct 3 3 3 Word Processing Samples D Stop installation IO a alla
18. Select this package by The installer selects this package by default default Package size The installer checks the package size during the install Type the size in the KB field If this option is not selected the installer calculates the size at build time Restart After Installing Gives the customer the option to restart the computer after the installation has completed Table 6 5 Package Options Creating an Installer with The following is a description of how to create an installer using multiple custom pack Multiple Custom Packages ages To create an installer with multiple custom packages 1 Create your custom packages For example Application Help files Samples 2 Assign your files and folders to the appropriate packages by selecting the package then checking the boxes next to the files you want to add 3 Select Install Type from the Screens menu The Install Type dialog box appears 4 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox This forces the installer to display a dialog that allows the customer to choose from Typical Compact or Custom Setups If they choose Custom Setup the Select Components dialog appears which displays the your custom packages to the customer The customer can then select which packages he she wants to install 5 Assign the selected files and folders to the package Creating Separators and Separators are used to create a visual barrier between sets of packages in the list A mutu
19. To create a package 1 Select Package from the Add menu A new package is added to the archive and the Package Properties window appears Files Folder Program ltem Registry Entry Ini File Entry Shortcut Comment Variable ltem Edit Text File ltem Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Edit CONFIG SYS Item Trace Include CT File Item Action Item gt Package Sub Package Illustration 6 8 Add Package menu item 2 Click on the General tab The Package Properties General page appears Package Properties fod ES General Advanced System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments Name New Package l Separator Mota Exclusive Group Desc I Restart After Installing I Select this package by default IT Package size fo KB size will be calculated at run time if unchecked Illustration 6 9 Package Properties General page 3 Make entries in the following fields Name Type the name of the package This appears to the customer in the Components area on the Select Components window Type a description about the package This appears to the customer in the Description field on the Select Components window Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Table 6 4 Package fields Installer VISE for Windows Creating an Installer with Multiple Custom Packages 6 11 4 Select from the following options by clicking in the appropriate checkboxes Function
20. fx Contents Index Find 1 Type the word s you want to find re y Clear 2 Select some matching words to narrow your search Options repeat Find Siman d EJ ha few Rebuild 3 Click a topic then click Display Add Edit Text File Item command Add Goto ltem command Copy Action Creating Loops Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Edit Source Directories command auto Edit Text File Item x 19 Topics Found All words Begin Auto Pause rift Cancel Illustration 3 18 Installer VISE Help Find page 3 Locate the information you want to display and double click or click on the Dis play button The topic is displayed Accessing Help from a Help is also available for the specific window or dialog box you are working in For exam Window or Dialog Box ple in the following window click on the question mark in the right corner of the window and the cursor becomes a question mark Then click on a field in the window Help appears with information about the window Copy ction Properties 2 fx Copy Files and folders y Named P Copt fo Replace Always I Version check Illustration 3 19 Window Dialog Help Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Accessing Help from a Window or Dialog Box 3 21 In the following dialog box click on the Help button Help appears about the dialog box Requirements El M Use default text Requirements Setu
21. lt different gt J What s New tat 10 12 2000 lt new gt 3 Documentation y eSellerate SDK 3 Examples lt different gt J Installer_Vise exe 6 29 2000 lt new gt 3 ExtCodes 3 InstvISE cnt 71711999 7 7 1999 lt same gt J Instvise exe 6 29 2000 lt missing gt 3 InstVISE GID 10 12 2000 10 12 2000 lt same gt 3 INSTVISE HLP 7 23 1999 7 23 1999 lt same gt 3 Support lt different gt 3 Translator exe 7730 1999 7 30 1999 lt same gt 3 License txt 10 10 1997 10 10 1997 lt same gt 7 Readme txt 6 29 2000 10 12 2000 lt newer gt Relnotes txt 6 29 2000 10 12 2000 lt newer gt 3 uninstal log 10 9 2000 10 9 2000 lt same gt 3 Updater VISE 6 file s selected to add Illustration 16 4 Create Updater window Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive 16 4 The AutoCreate Updater Process The following table explains the different status descriptions Description Meaning lt same gt This item has not changed If you select an item that is the same the entire file will be added to the new updater archive The default is to not select files that are the same since they do not usually need to be updated lt different gt Only appears for folder items At least one item within the folder has changed lt missing gt This item in your archive no longer exists or has been moved from your archive folders The default is to not select these missing items Select this item if you wish
22. 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 m Actions Property Page on page 9 8 Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Trace Item Trace Item Variable Item Installer VISE for Windows 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 19 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 You can add a Trace command to an archive using the Trace 1tem command An example of when this item can be used is to display text in the installer s debug win dow To display the debug window when the installer is run select Installer Properties from the File menu and click on the named Debug version checkbox This is helpful when tracing the path of execution of your installer To add a Trace item 1 At the Archive window select Trace Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu A trace item is added to the archive and the Trace Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Trace Item Properties General page appears Trace Item Properties 57 xi goorgoseccccceessseoeog Message Illustration 8 55 Trace Item Properties General page 3 Type a message in the Message field See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Prope
23. After the delivery you will receive an e mail message containing any applicable billing and serial number information Be sure to retain this message as you will need information from it to reinstall your software To reinstall software that you previously purchased hold down the Alt key and click the Reinstall button that appears eSellerate needs to establish an Internet connection and check its servers for product information Click the Start button to proceed powered by 5 6 erate Illustration 13 18 Installer VISE Purchase Wizard When the purchase concludes your copy of Installer VISE will be automatically activated in place so you can start building installers right away Installer VISE will be fully func tional so your installers will no longer display the unlicensed splash screen or expire after three days Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools 13 10 Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 14 14 1 Using the Snapshot Wizard Snapshot Overview What is a Snapshot Installer VISE for Windows A common task facing network administrators is the repackaging and installation of third party software on multiple machines This is a very difficult task because there is usually no easy way to determine what these third party installers are doing to the user s machine This includes not only the installation
24. Before you build the final installer make sure everything in the archive is correct You should check the assignment of files to packages the addition of external code and the general installer settings It is recommended that you run the Diagnostic archive report to 19 make sure that there are no problems in the setup of the installer See Generating Archive Reports on page 6 43 for more information If the installation set is larger than the maximum segment size it is auto matically split into segment files The segment files are given the name of your installer file with the appropriate segment number as the file s extension For example Sample 002 and Sample 003 created If the size of the installation set is not larger than the maximum segment size or if the maximum segment size is unlimited only one segment is Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 46 Generating a Batch File To build the installer 1 At the Archive window select Build Installer from the File menu Your copy of Installer VISE 1s not The Purchase Installer VISE Online dialog activated box appears Do one of the following Click the Purchase button to pur chase an Installer VISE subscription online and activate your copy of Installer VISE in place Click the Cancel button Installer VISE is not activated the installer will display the Installer VISE splash screen and the installer w
25. Files and folders Named Look in y T Include subfolders Illustration 8 8 Delete Action Properties General page 3 Select one of the following items you want to delete from the Delete popmenu m Files and Folders m File s m Folders s 4 Type the name to search for in the Named field You can use wildcards For exam ple type Deleteme 5 Type or select the path name where to search in the Look in popmenu 6 Click on the Include subfolders checkbox if you want the installer to search through subfolders for matches To protect against unintended file deletion the Delete action item will not delete folders that contain a read only file However you can still delete read only files individually using the Delete action Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 12 DirectX Check Action Item See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Advanced Property Page on page 9 1 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 al After Property Page on page 9 13 DirectX Check Action You can add a DirectX Check action t
26. For built in screens this checkbox determines whether the Back button will be enabled or disabled See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Advanced Property Page on page 9 1 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 19 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 19 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 El Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 E After Property Page on page 9 13 The simplest way to design the dialogs the user will see during an install is to use the Screens menu Checked items will be displayed in the order they appear in the menu list You can modify attributes of those screens by choosing the item from the menu You can change things such as the dialog s title text in the dialog the bitmap displayed in the dia log and whether or not the dialog will be displayed during the install You cannot how ever change the order of the dialogs or insert a custom dialog in the display sequence To do this you will need to use Display Screen actions Display Screen actions can display custom dialogs or the built in dialogs that Installer VISE already provides Built in dialogs are the same dialogs that appear in the Screens menu You can order the dialogs in any sequence you would like You are not restricted to a specific
27. IMPORTANT The variable you define will automati cally be assigned to the name of the item selected in the combo box when the user exits the custom screen Table 11 7 Combo Box Item Properties Installer VISE for Windows Combo Box Properties Property 11 15 Description Type Dropdown Creates a drop down combo box with an edit text field except the list is not displayed unless the user clicks a drop down arrow at the right of the edit box control portion of the combo box Drop List Default This type is similar to the drop down style but the edit box control is replaced by a static text item which does not take user input that dis plays the current selection in the list Show This field determines how tall the drop down list will be Enter the number of items you want to show in the drop down list The default is 10 items The screen below shows a combo box with the Show field set to 5 and the Vertical Scroll option selected Combo Box Item 1 Sort Sorts the items of the combo box alphabetically Vertical Scroll Creates a combo box with a vertical scroll bar The ver tical scroll bar will automatically appear if there are more items than the value you entered for the Show field Auto HScroll Automatically scrolls text to the right when the user types a character at the end of the line Dimensions Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to
28. ISE mf xj Menu bar File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help Standard Toolbar DI GA Eel E Es S aoiaaiaasa aaa aa a Action Items Toolbar 1 Build Toolbar peFaut y E aaa te fea f fe Pe fn a nv Action Items Toolbar 2 C Support Files Type Attributes 5 Gerd Sica Peed seve tive Archive Window fam ET ypical Setup fa Compact Setup 13 Silent Setup C Pre Screens Items Database Samples File Folder L Endofmonth txt Text Document readsheet Samples File Folder Endofday txt Text Document L Endofmonth txt Text Document Endofyear txt Text Document oject Folder File Folder Letter L Memo Folder L Report File 1 Shortcut to MyProduct 3 3 top installatio wee Action Item Layout Columns Pre Screens Items KK KY RKI Application 1 3 Application 2 A Application 3 Package a Separator O Beginning Exercises 3 Advanced Exercises G Samples 3 Database Samples 3 Spreadsheet Samples 3 Word Processing Samples JKK I K R RR RRK RKKK Sub package Status Bar For Help press F1 Illustration 6 1 Installer VISE Archive Window Chapter 6 Creating an installer 6 2 Viewing the Archive Window Viewing the Archive Following i
29. Mutually Exclusive Groups ally exclusive group separator means that the customer 1s only able to install a single pack age from the selection of packages that appears between the separator lines For example you have included several formats of an application in an installer To ensure that the customer selects the appropriate format create a package for each format Then place the packages in a mutually exclusive group When a customer selects Custom Install he she can only select one format of the application to install If you need to change the location of a separator in the archive see Rearranging the List of Packages and Sub packages on page 6 16 for more information Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 12 About Sub Packages The following is an example of how the Select Components screen of an installer with sep arators appears to the customer Select Components l xj Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Components M Application 1 Application 2 DK Application 3 DK Bedinnina Exercises 0 kz Description This package will install Application 1 and all its components Space Required OK Space Available 532190 K lt Back Cancel Illustration 6 10 Select Components with Separators To create a separator 1 Create a package The Package Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab
30. Tools Menu Tools Menu The Tools menu allows you to use a number of Installer VISE tools Tool Tools Archive Wizard Visual Basic Project Wizard Snapshot Wizard Dependency Watcher Dependency Walker Verify Archive Purchase Installer VISE Illustration 3 12 Tools Menu Function Archive Wizard Displays the Archive Wizard which can be used to build a basic installer See Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard for more information Visual Basic Project Wizard Displays the Visual Basic Project Wizard which can be used to scan a Visual Basic project file for file 13 dependencies See Visual Basic Project Wizard on page 13 2 for more information Snapshot Wizard Displays the Snapshot Wizard which can be used to capture setup information by watching other setup execution Snapshot information can be used to automate installer creation or as a diagnostic tool See Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard for more information Dependency Watcher Displays the Dependency Watcher window which can be used to watch an executable run and determine implicit and dynamic DLL dependencies See 13 Dependency Watcher on page 13 4 for more information Dependency Walker Displays the Dependency Walker which can be used to scan an executable s header and determine implicit DLL dependencies See Dependency Walker on page 13 6 Verify Archive The Verify
31. 11 If you want to allow the customer to select the language to be used as the install language click on the Show select language dialog checkbox If you do not want to allow the customer to select the install language do not click on this checkbox The installer uses dynamic localization which determines the operating system s language and displays the proper language strings If the detected language is not included in the installer the default strings are used Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages Installer VISE for Windows Turning off the Use default text checkbox 18 11 12 If you want to allow the customer to select the language to be used make entries in the following fields Title Type the title that you want to appear on the dialog box when the installer is launched This field defaults to Select Language Text Type the text that you want to appear in the dialog box when the installer is launched This field defaults to Please select the language that you would like to use dur ing the installation Table 18 3 Select Language Options 13 Click on the Close button The Archive window appears Turning off the Use Before you build a localized installer be sure to turn off the Use default text checkbox for default text checkbox all screens the installer will display Otherwise if this checkbox is turned on the screen will use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE To turn o
32. 19 3 If the registry entry is not found this variable is WinDrive Program Files Common Files When run on Win3 1 this variable is WinDrive ProgramF CommonFi This variable is useful because not all your customers have the Program Files Common Files folder on the root of their C drive it might be on their D drive This folder has a different name for different language versions of Windows 9 x Using this variable makes sure the correct name is used The CommonPrograms variable contains the path name of the programs folder on the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP start menu for all users This is only valid when the installer is running on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable will be blank if the installer is run on a system other than Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP An example is CA Winnt40 Profiles All Users Start Menu Programs With this path you can add new items to the programs menu or remove items from it Items that are in the programs folder will be displayed on the start menu The CommonStartMenu variable contains the path name of the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP start menu for all users This 1s only valid when the installer is running on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable will be blank if the installer is run on a system other than Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP An example is CA Winnt40 Profiles All Users Start Me
33. 3 In the Edit Group Name window type in a group name and a file name for the group file Group Name installer WISE Cancel File Name cesa fvise Illustration 7 7 Edit File Group window When the installer is built file group files will also be created for placing on a web server Group names should be descriptive to both the developer and the end user as the group name is used when assigning files to a group and 1s visible when file groups are being downloaded at install time It is important to segment installers into file groups so that end users will be able to download only the files necessary to complete the install options they have cho PHA When naming file groups be aware that Installer VISE will strip spaces and convert to lower case any name entered into the File Name field Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Installer VISE for Windows Assigning files to File Groups 7 5 4 After creating all file groups you will be using click OK to dismiss the File Group List File Group List x i N i Duplicate Cancel Delete Edit OK Illustration 7 8 File Group List Assigning files to File Files and folders are assigned to file groups from the File Properties Advanced tab Groups To assign files and folders to file groups 1 Before assigning file groups you should add all the files and folders your installer will need 2 Select the item file or folder in the a
34. At the Archive window select the file you want to update 2 Select Update from the Edit menu The archive is saved and the Archive window appears You can easily update your archive if the location of the source folders on your computer changes The Edit Source Directories dialog allows you to replace the old path name with the new one For example your source files were originally located in a directory named C MYAPP and you moved them to D MYAPP2 You can search for all instances of C MYAPP and replace it with D MYAPP2 To edit source directories 1 At the Archive window select Source Directories from the Edit menu The Edit Source Directories dialog box appears Edit Source Directories x Use this dialog to edit the source path names for all folders files and OK update files in your vct file A Source path names should be the location of the sources for all folders Cancel files and update files on your computer If these locations change you can use this dialog to search for all instances of the old path name and replace them with the new path name For example If your source files were originally located in a directory named C MYAPP and you moved them to D MYAPP2 you can use this dialog to search for instances of C MYAPP and replace them with DAMYAPP2 Find what MYAPP Replace with fu yApp2 Illustration 6 42 Edit Source Directories 2 Make the following entries Field Popmenu Find w
35. Build Directives may be best understood if con trasted to Packages m Packages serve as limiting agents at installer runtime while Build Directives serve as limiting agents at installer build time m Packages determine whether the item in the installer will be executed or installed while Build Directives determine whether the item will even be included at all in the built installer m Packages allow flexibility at installer runtime so that one installer can cover sev eral install options Build Directives allow flexibility at installer build time so that one archive can be used to build multiple installers which share some con tent but each have some different content Build Directives serve as limiting agents for an item at installer build time If no build directives are checked for the item the inclusion of the file folder action item or external resource file in an installer build will not be limited Another way to say the same thing would be if no items are checked in the Build Directive popmenu this item will always be included when an installer is built Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management 15 2 Build Directive Setup Build Directives can be defined per archive through the Build Directives window Build Directives x MDebug Build C Basic Install Deluxe Install Deluxe Fonts New Duplicate Cancel Dees Em Illustration 15 1 Build Directives window Once defined Build Direc
36. Dimensions are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Table 11 6 Radio Button Item Properties Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 14 Combo Box Properties Chapter 11 Custom Screens Combo Box Properties When creating a standard combo box control you first enter the title you wish to display for the combo box item A static text item will automatically be created and displayed to the left of the combo box Enter Title x Title Cancel Illustration 11 16 Combo Box Title Double click the combo box item in the Screen Editor to edit properties Combo Box Item El Items A Wariable Click to assign Type Drop List Show 10 Items T Sort IV Vertical Scroll Y Auto HScroll m Dimensions Left 163 Width 59 Top 28 Height fra Cancel Illustration 11 17 Combo Box Properties Window Property Description Items Type in the items to display in the drop down list for the combo box Press the Enter key to start each new item The first item will automatically be selected when the custom screen appears NOTE You can also enter a variable name here if you wish to dynamically create a list of items See the section below on Variable Substitution Variable You can assign a user defined variable to this combo box Click and select the variable you wish to associate with this combo box
37. Registration Information Screen 10 11 Registration Options 6 45 Registry Editor 8 59 Registry Entry 6 20 8 3 Registry Items Report 6 43 Registry Key Name 6 37 Registry Keys 14 3 Remove 6 6 Remove All 6 6 Remove entry 8 42 8 58 Remove files that are in use 6 36 Remove program group 8 53 Remove program item 8 53 Remove Service 8 72 Rename 6 20 8 3 Replace Options 8 29 to 8 30 8 38 to 8 39 Replace options always 8 10 8 50 8 63 ask user 8 10 8 50 8 63 if target is older 8 10 8 50 8 63 if target is older or the same 8 10 8 50 8 63 never 8 10 8 50 8 63 Replace search line with text 8 24 Replace with 6 50 Reports 3 9 Requirements Screen 3 12 6 23 10 7 Requirements window 10 7 Reserve _ k on first disk 6 35 Restart 19 5 Restart After Installing 6 9 6 11 Restore button 3 7 Rollback changes after cancelled installs 6 35 Root key 8 59 Run maximized 8 64 minimized 8 64 normal window 8 64 Run Application 6 20 8 3 Runtime Variable 19 8 Runtime variable Browser 19 2 CDROMDrive 19 2 Common Programs 19 3 CommonDesktop 19 2 CommonFilesDir 19 2 CommonStartMenu 19 3 CommonStartUp 19 3 DefProgramFolder 19 3 Installer VISE for Windows Desktop 19 3 Fonts 19 4 INetDataFilePath 19 4 Organization 19 4 Product Name 19 4 ProgramFilesDir 19 4 Programs 19 5 Restart 19 5 SerialNumber 19 5 SetupType 19 5 SrcDir 19 5 SrcDrive 19 5 StartMenu 19 5 StartUp 19 6 SysDir 19 6 SysD
38. Screens Menu Function Set the available options of color position include a bitmap and position of the installer s progression bar from the installer s background window Splash Screen Add a splash screen to display during the installation You can drag a bitmap file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the frame or click the Set but ton to choose a splash bitmap for display The maxi mum bitmap dimensions are 516x276 Welcome Screen Add a welcome screen to display during the installation You can drag a bitmap file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the frame or click the Set but ton to choose a splash bitmap for display The dimen sions of the side bitmap are 138x258 pixels Read Me Message Display a read me screen with additional information to users during the installation You can drag a text file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the message edit field The text in the file will be appended to the text in the message edit field You can drag a bit map file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the frame or click the Set button to choose a side bitmap to display The dimensions of the side bitmap are 138x258 pixels Table 3 7 Screens Menu Commands Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 12 Requirements Screen Screens Menu Function Display a system requirements screen automatically to the user if the target computer does not m
39. Sites List Using a Separate A catalog for a web installer contains a list of items to process during the install including Catalog files action items packages etc Every web installer has an internal catalog Installer VISE also creates an external catalog to put on the web site with the file groups When the installer is run by the end user the date time stamp within the installer 1s compared to that stored in the VISEICat idx file on the server If the date time stamp of the catalog on Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Installer VISE for Windows The User s Initial Experience The User s Initial Experience Installer VISE for Windows the server is newer than the installer s internal catalog the installer will use the newer cat alog s information For an initial release a separate web catalog is not necessary If files have been updated or modified a separate catalog will be necessary for installers to access the new data The files VISEICat cat and VISEICat idx are created at the location when the installer is built These files along with the new group files must be copied to the web server in the directory indicated in the download site for each download site When your users use the web installer you ve just delivered they should have an install experience very similar to that of a single file installer The installer file application can be delivered on floppy CD or downloaded from the web Whe
40. The Package Properties General page appears 3 Select from the following options by clicking in the appropriate checkboxes Function Separator Creates a separator in the archive Mutual Exclusive Group Creates a mutually exclusive group Table 6 6 Separator Options 4 Close the window The Archive window appears with a separator on the left side of the window About Sub Packages In addition to creating packages you can also create sub packages Sub packages are pack ages that are part of another package If the customer selects to install a package that con tains sub packages he she can also select which of the associated sub packages should also be installed For example if your product includes different sets of sample files you can set up your installer to include a single package called Samples from which the customer can select the desired samples such as Word Processing Samples Spreadsheet Samples or Data base Samples Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Creating a Sub Package Creating a Sub Package Installer VISE for Windows 6 13 The following is an example of how the Select Components screen of an installer with sub packages appears to a customer Select Components x Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Components Description The Exercises package includes optional t
41. Use FTP Proxy Cancel i Illustration 7 12 Preparation to Download Files Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer 7 8 The User s Initial Experience By checking the Use FTP Proxy checkbox the user can enter proxy server and port infor mation ss Installer VISE Setup x Downloading Files The necessary files are about to be downloaded to your computer IF you have a dialup connection to the internet make sure it is active and click the Continue button below Approximate amount of data to download 18 57MB Server Port Proxy Server Username and Password if required User Name Password Cancel Illustration 7 13 Use Proxy The installer first tries to locate the server and check for the existence of a catalog newer than that within the installer Following the catalog check the installer immediately begins downloading the file groups necessary to install the items indicated by the user s package selection AAA A AA A A SS a eS an ee aaa ee ae The Active Web Installer will create a folder on the root of the drive with the largest amount of free disk space The folder will be the name of the product plus Download Data For example Installer VISE 3 6 Download Data Inside that folder a file will be created with the name of the product plus the extension dat For example Installer VISE 3 6 dat This file will contain the download data If a newer installe
42. from 9 a m to 5 p m Central Time You may also FAX your questions to us at 402 323 6611 We will send you a return FAX within our regular office hours with answers to your questions Our mailing address 1s MindVision Software 5901 North 58th Street Lincoln NE 68507 3249 Installer VISE for Windows Using this Guide Using this Guide Installer VISE for Windows This guide provides information on how to use Installer VISE to create an installer to meet your needs The chapters include Chapter 2 Getting Started Chapter Contents Explains how to install and activate Installer VISE on your system Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Covers the basic parts of the Archive window explains how to start and exit the program and explains how to use on line help Chapter 4 Designing an Installer Information about planning and designing an installer Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Provides information on creating a basic installer with the Archive Wizard Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Step by step instructions on how to build an installer from the Archive window This chapter also discusses the different features that you can add to an installer Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Instructions on how to set up and build an active web installer which will allow your clients to install from the web Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Instructions on how to add each type
43. ini files like normal files because few installers modify ini files anymore However adding a file to this list causes the snapshot to capture the actual entries in an ini file This allows it to track actual changes to the ini file by third party installers O O a Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard 14 4 Suggestions for handling ini files Editing the Skip List Suggestions for handling ini files m Specify as many ini files as you feel are appropriate without specifying all ini files Snapshot will notice that 1ni files not specified have been modified but will treat them as regular files and will not record or display changes made within the existing ini file m You may want to list all ini files which Snapshot has detected as being mod ified m You can uninstall the installer being snapshot specify the ini files that Snap shot detected as being modified and re run Snapshot Click on the Add button to bring up a dialog that allows you to select the in1 file you wish to include in the snapshot To delete an ini file from the list after it has been added select it and then click the Remove button The Save As Defaults button will save all your entries in the above lists as the defaults for any new snapshot files that you create later Most of the changes that occur on a user s machine between the time the snapshot is taken and after the third party installer s are ran you will wa
44. registry entries 1ni file entries and delete actions All of the basic installer properties will also be set at this time Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Building the Installer 14 9 All registry entries for HKEY_USER which uses a globally unique identifier GUID are automatically converted to HKEY_CURRENT_USER by the Create VCT operation Building the Installer After the new installer archive has been created you may wish to review or customize parts of it For instance you may wish to display a welcome screen or read me file Or per haps you want to create your own custom packages for the included files Once you have customized your archive if necessary simply build the snapshot installer and you are ready to go Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard 14 10 Building the Installer Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 15 15 1 Advanced Project Management Build Directives Installer VISE for Windows Installer VISE contains a number of features which enable new levels of installer project management Advanced Project Management features include Build Directives m Build Targets Batch Build Build Directives allow you to conditionally include or exclude items folders files and action items from your installer at build time They are very similar in functionality to compiler directives in program code
45. s start menu folder The item is displayed on the customer s start menu Program Folder Installs the file in the programs folder which 1s displayed as a sub menu on the customer s start menu Startup Folder Installs the file in the startup folder that is displayed on the customer s start menu under the programs sub menu Items that are in this folder are processed as Windows starts up Fonts Folder Installs the file in the fonts folder Common Desktop Folder This option will install the item on the desktop that 1s common to all users Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Common Start Menu This option will install the item in the start menu folder that is common to all users The item will be displayed on all users start menus Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Table 8 14 Install Locations Valid for Windows 9 x Me NT4 2000 and XP Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting File Item Advanced Properties Common Programs Folder Function This option will install the item in the programs folder which is displayed as a sub menu on all users start menus Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Common Startup Folder This option will install the item in the startup folder which is displayed on all users start menus under the program
46. 2 p 20 2 r 20 2 s 20 2 t 20 2 v 20 2 Comment 6 18 8 1 Comment line segments 8 67 Comment Property Page 9 12 Comment search line 8 20 8 22 Common Desktop 19 2 Common Desktop Folder 8 28 Common Programs 19 3 Common Programs Folder 8 29 Common Start Menu 8 28 19 3 Common Startup 19 3 Common Startup Folder 8 29 CommonFilesDir 19 2 Compact 10 15 Installer VISE for Windows Index 3 JKLMNOPQRSTOUMV OOWkhxiyYy az Compact Setup 6 7 to 6 8 10 15 Compressed File Data verifying 13 8 Contains 8 36 Convert long path to short 8 77 Copy 6 18 8 1 Copy Here 6 16 Create Batch File 3 9 Create program group 8 53 Create program item 8 53 Create Program Item s 3 10 Create Shortcut s 3 10 Create Translation File 18 4 Current Settings 10 21 Custom 10 15 Custom installer icon 6 33 Custom Packages 6 8 multiple 6 11 Custom Screens 11 1 Custom Setup 6 8 10 15 Custom Verification 10 13 Customize Layout 12 2 D Debug version 6 32 Decrement Variable 8 76 Default 8 43 to 8 44 8 59 Default Destination Directory 6 8 Default destination directory Win 3 x 10 15 Default destination directory Win 95 8 newer 10 15 Default directory in Archive Wizard 5 2 in Visual Basic Project Wizard 13 2 Default display text 18 4 Default installer resources 18 4 Default language is 18 4 Default Layout 12 2 12 5 Default Location 8 27 Default path 8 15 Default program folder 6 37 Default Value 8 78 Delete 3 10 6 18 8 1 Del
47. 4 Registration Files REGEDIT4 Click Save which will export a Registry Editor version 4 file This REG file can then be added to an Installer VISE archive and implemented using a Registry Entry action item set to Write Entries from reg file Doing this with a REG file exported for Registry Editor version 5 will fail AAA SSS SSS SaaS To use the run application item Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 1 Add the reg file to the VCT file and set its install location to TargetDir in the Install to location field on the File Properties Advanced page 2 Select Registry entry from the Action Item toolbar or Add menu 3 Select Write entries from reg file 4 Type TargetDir Filename reg in the Path name field Installer VISE for Windows Merging a Reg File with the Registry 8 61 Installer VISE for Windows l y You can use runtime variables inside of the regedit file to specify values Adding an Registry Entry to Display an Icon You can add a registry entry to display an icon for a file type and launch an application if a file of that type is double clicked The following is an example of how to do this using files with the extension vct To add a registry entry to display an icon 1 Substitute your file extension where appropriate 2 Add four registry entry items to your archive 3 At the Registry Entry Properties General page make the following entries for each registry entry Root key 1 For the first entry sele
48. 6 calling at initialization 17 3 calling before install 17 6 clearing 17 6 deleting 17 9 editing 17 8 External code dll path name 6 38 External Code Properties 6 38 Extract 3 10 Extracting files and folders 6 6 F File 8 43 deleting 5 4 File Details 5 4 File extension 8 57 File Group Options 8 30 8 39 File Groups 3 17 7 4 to 7 5 files assigned to non existent 13 8 File Menu 3 7 File name Run Application General Properties 8 64 saving an archive 3 4 File Options 6 28 File type 8 57 Files 6 19 8 2 Find 3 9 6 2 6 19 8 2 8 33 Find Differences 14 7 Find hidden files and folders 8 34 Find multiple occurances 8 34 Find Result 8 28 8 68 Find what 6 50 Finished 10 24 10 26 Finished Message 3 14 5 8 6 24 Finished Message 2 3 14 6 24 Finished Message 2 Screen 10 25 Finished Message Screen 10 23 Finished text 10 24 Finished text 2 10 25 Floppy based Installer 5 10 Floppy Diskettes 6 48 Folder 6 19 8 2 deleting 5 4 Folder Options 6 29 Folder Properties 6 29 Folder s name 8 35 Folders 15 5 Fonts 19 4 Fonts Folder 8 28 8 68 FTP 7 6 G General 6 12 Generate log file 6 32 Installer VISE for Windows Index 5 A B C D EFGHIJKLMNO PQO RST UVWXYZ Get environment variable 8 77 GIF graphics 3 4 Goto 6 19 8 2 8 40 11 11 Group Box 11 8 H Help 3 18 Help Menu 3 17 Help Topics 3 18 Hide Starting Setup Please wait dialog 6 35 Hide progress 10 3 HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT 8 59 HKEY_CURRENT_USER 8 5
49. 9 Setting Common Properties Installer VISE for Windows Actions Property Page 9 9 To access the Actions Property page 1 Click on the Action tab from the Properties window of the selected item The Actions Property page appears Copy Action Properties RIE General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives B4 gt Install this item if these action results are true Find files and folders named Last ersion in 4T argetDir succeeds New Edit Delete All statements must be true AND logic C Atleast one statement must be true OR logic Illustration 9 6 Actions Property Page 2 Click on the New button The Select Action Item dialog box appears similar to the following Select Action Item x Action items gt Install Service Item E Is any DirectX version installed _ Cancel Result Succeeds x Illustration 9 7 Select Action Item A list of action items that have been added to the archive and support this feature appears in the Action items field 3 Select the action item you want to link from the Action items list 4 Select one of the following options from the Result popmenu Function Succeeds Result of the action item causes this item to succeed Fails Result of the action item causes this item to fail Table 9 5 Result Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties 9 10 Actions Property Page
50. Archive Item OVINA a pil 8 1 Creatine Archive Mem tro IE 8 4 Dillard Gtiom TEM gestae canoe caren oma ee eins a acess alana a ses 8 5 Call External Code Action tem di Cees bean oe en ee EN we 8 7 Commenti arras ra 8 8 Copy TNC Om Wet pestillo tote 2 8 9 Dete ACONI E ane ar te eee ee nn gaa te are eer ce gO oe meme CAT een an 8 10 DirectX Cheek Acom Ien id 8 12 Dirk Prompt Action tem dt eds 8 14 Display Screen AcHOn Items oo daa a e Sued ie AO ae 8 15 Download Eile Acton lten iia are dan a teas 8 17 Edit AU TOEXECG BAT Met wine dis ae ee hak eee adi dew Maa ewes ed 8 19 Bditt CONFIG SYS ee iiss ii is 8 21 Edit extienda irradia eae 8 23 Piles Archive em a E A AAA ew tea 8 25 Pin Petrone tal tl Ns 8 31 Folder Ar Rne EM ada ur nl dde 8 34 OU Acuon tem partos an aio ao ads he at Net do E 8 40 Mende MET Pie tt nad De as 8 40 A A O O Sane eS 8 42 Tne DOM crn ette atada ls a ais 8 43 abel Acuon tear arias radio tino Sree bees Pate na eee anes eee a eee eon 8 45 Location Prompt Acon COON rias ae ae ot ie rie OG ao ts Andel aaa oe eee 8 46 Message Box Action tent 4342 5 adore ena Sa ee ee Bo Adi Be eee 8 47 MOVE ACTION OM 45 0 4 breed holt date ote be ae at btt dicta ito Bek ds 8 49 Open Internet Address Action Item barra add id Ae 8 51 Installer VISE for Windows Contents iv Prostate ins iy di AA EA AG ale Ao ae 8 52 Quicktime Check Acton Mem 2 one ted pune AAA DO seer Meee eens ees 8 55 Register File Type Action EM gael oka taiw
51. Archive Updater Archive feature can automatically do the work of creating a multi file updater archive for you Chapter 17 Explains how to attach external code DLL files Using External Code to an archive Chapter 18 Provides the instructions for creating installers in Creating Installers in Different different languages Languages Chapter 19 Describes the different runtime variables Using Runtime Variables available in Installer VISE Chapter 20 Describes ways to automate the processes of Automating Installer VISE building and controlling Installer VISE installers Table 1 1 User s Guide Overview Conventions Following are the conventions that have been included to assist you in using this guide m Field names are italicized and spelled exactly as they appear on the window m The information you are to type appears in bold m Items you are to select appear in bold m Buttons you are to click appear in bold m References to other locations within this guide appear as hyperlinks When view ing the electronic version of the Installer VISE User s Guide hyperlinks can be clicked to jump to the specified location Chapter 1 Introduction Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 2 Getting Started Getting Started System Requirements Installing Installer VISE Installer VISE for Windows This chapter provides you with information about installing and activating Installer VISE on your system The following information is av
52. Archive command can be used to verify the compressed file data stored in the current VCT file See Verify Archive on page 13 7 for more information Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics This menu item and the functionality it provides will vary depending on the state of your Installer VISE sub scription See Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate on page 13 8 Table 3 10 Tools Menu Items Installer VISE for Windows Internet Menu 3 17 Internet Menu The Internet menu allows you to select the commands to add different action items to the installer See Chapter 8 Using Archive Items for more information Internet Download Sites File Groups Illustration 3 13 Internet Menu Action Function Download Sites Displays the Download Sites window to display the list of Download Sites for Web based installs File Groups Displays the File Groups window to display the list of file groups for web based installs Table 3 11 Internet Menu Items Layout Menu Layout v Standard Layout Customize Illustration 3 14 Layout menu The Layout menu offers the following commands Command Function Standard Layout Activates the standard Archive Window layout The Standard Layout cannot be removed or edited User defined Layouts Any user defined layouts will be listed below the Standard Layout Selecting the user defined layout name in the menu will a
53. Border height 0 255 fo End color Window title ProductName Setup Text color Red 255 Green 255 Blue 255 Select Shadow color Red jo Greer jo Blue jo Select Progress dialog placement Center v T Hide progress dialog Cancel Help Illustration 10 1 Background Window dialog Click on the Show background window checkbox if you want the Background Window to appear during the install Click on the Title bar checkbox if you want the Background Window to have a title bar and a frame In the Start Color and End Color area The fields in this area allow you to customize the color of the Background window If the values are the same in the Start and End fields the Background Window appears as a solid color If these values are different the Background Window appears as a gradient You can enter the numeric color values or click on the Select button to access the Color Selector window To add a bitmap file to the screen click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The Background Window dialog box appears Note If you want to clear the bitmap file click Clear Select one of the following options from the Image placement popmenu that repre sents where you want the bitmap to appear on the Background window m Tiled m Top Left m Top Center m Top Right m Middle Left m Center Installer VISE for Windows Customizing
54. Codes page appears See Chapter 17 Using External Code for more information about creating external code The Installer Properties System Requirements page allows you to define the minimum sys tem requirements for installing your product These system requirements can be set for the entire installation If any of these requirements are not met the customer can either be warned and allowed to continue or notified and forced to exit the installer Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Setting Installer System Requirements 6 39 To set installer system requirements 1 At the Installer Properties dialog box click on the System Requirements tab The Installer Properties System Requirements page appears Installer Properties xj General Uninstaller External Codes System Requirements web Acton if requirement is not met i Min memory jo Mb wam and allow to continue I Platform wam and allow to continue Version Major g Minor g Admin privileges required M Audio wal file playback wam and allow to continue 4 Min resolution 640 x 480 wam and allow to continue Vin golos 16 colors z M Is QuickTime jo jo or better installed wam and allow to continue Illustration 6 36 Installer Properties System Requirements 2 Click on the Min memory checkbox if the target machine must have a minimum amount of memory to run this installer Make entries in the following fi
55. Customer does not agree to the terms of this Agreement do not install copy or use the Software including sl Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No Setup will close To install this product you must accept this agreement Print Illustration 2 3 Software License Agreement Window This screen contains the MindVision Installer VISE for Windows End User License Agreement Read this agreement carefully This document is included in the pro gram folder once the installation is complete Click on the Yes button if you accept the terms The Choose Destination screen appears If you do not accept the terms you can click on the No button You then have the option of exiting the Setup program or continuing The Choose Destination screen allows you to select the directory where you want to install Installer VISE If you do not select a directory the Setup program defaults to C Program Files Installer VISE In addition the amount of disk space that is required to run Installer VISE and the amount of disk space available on your sys tem is displayed ss Choose Destination Location Setup will install Installer VISE 3 6 1 in the following directory To install to this directory click Next To install to a different directory click Browse and select another directory You can choose not to install Installer VISE 3 6 1 by clicking Cancel to exit Setup aa Director
56. E Displays a billboard during the install Calls an external code library for custom programming Displayed only in the item list has no function during an install An action that copies file s folder s An action that deletes file s folder s Checks for the existance of DirectX on the target machine Displays a dialog that prompts the user for a disk Displays a custom or built in dialog to the user Downloads a file from a FTP or a HTTP server Edits the Autoexec bat file Edits the Config sys file An action that edits text files Adds existing files and folders to the archive An action that searches for file s folder s Creates a new folder in the archive Create a Goto action which can be used to jump to Label items Merges the contents of another CT file at build time Read write or remove an entry in an INI file x Illustration 8 2 Add Items dialog You can also select the archive item button from the one of the Action Item tool bars 3 118 19 5 8112 0 9 4811 a aja ala a a 0 118 4198 0163 Illustration 8 3 Action Items Toolbars 111 12 You can add a Billboard manually to your installer using the Billboard action item For automated billboard display see Adding Automated Billboards on page 6 24 Billboards assigned to the installer using the billboard action item can be assigned to packages just like files so that they are only displayed if that package is installed Billboards can
57. Edit Layout x Available Fields Admin Privileges Required After Installing Attributes Audio Before Installing Build Directives Comments Compressed Size Created Date Delete Folder and Contents Durin Don t Add To Uninstaller Log File Group File Version Folder Size Install 4s Normal File Install Font Install From Install To Modified Date N ame List Columns gt gt Copy gt gt Delete Clear Cancel Illustration 12 4 Layout Name field 4 In the Edit Layout dialog select fields to be displayed in the List Columns Edit Layout Ea Name New Layout Available Fields Folder Size Install 4s Normal File Min Memory Min Resolution Modified Date Replace If In Use Replace If Locked Restart After Installing Self Register OCX DLL Shared File Stop Install If Update Fails Type List Columns Install From Install To File Version gt gt Copy gt gt PE Delete pea Clear Illustration 12 5 Edit Layout window 5 When you have the fields for the List Columns set up as you wish click the OK button Your layout will be saved and you will be returned to the Layout List win dow Chapter 12 Customizing the Archive Window 12 4 Layout Setup Customizing the Layout Menu Layout Separators Layout Setup 6 Click OK in the Layout List window The archive window will now display the col umn arrangement defined in the
58. Files and folders Named PO Copy to o Replace Always T Version check Illustration 8 7 Copy Action Properties General page Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 10 Delete Action Item 3 Select one of the following items you want to copy from the Copy popmenu m Files and Folders m File s Folders s 4 Select or type the name to search for in the Named popmenu You can use wild cards For example type Copyme 5 Select or type the path name where to copy file s and or folder s in the Copy to popmenu For example type C Backup If the folder does not exist it is created 6 Select one of the following options from the Replace popmenu Function Always Always replaces options if a file currently exists with the new name Never Never replaces options if a file currently exists with the new name If target is older If the item on the customer s machine 1s older replaces options with the new name If target is older or the If the item on the customer s machine is older or the same same replaces options with the new name Ask user Asks the customer if the options should be replaced Table 8 3 Copy Action Replace Options 7 Click on the Version check checkbox if you want to use version information with replace options If you want to use the modified date of the files do not select this checkbox See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for informa
59. INI file gt Add Close illustration 11 5 Add Items dialog The Add Items dialog is resizable and it will remember its last position You can also select the Display Screen button from the Action Item toolbar 3 In the Select Screen type dialog choose whether you wish to display one of the built in screens or create your own custom screen Select Screen Type E4 Screen types Custom Screen y Custom Screen Splash Screen Welcome Screen Read Me Message Requirements Screen License Agreement Verify Password Registration Information Select Install Directory Select Install Type Select Components Select Program Folder Ready To Install Message Read Me Message Finished Message Finished Message 2 Illustration 11 6 Select Screen Type Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 4 Editing Built in Screens Chapter 11 Custom Screens Editing Built in Screens 4 Set Screen Properties Screen Properties E pregarnnnannananananzo Name welcome Screen Edit Screen V Enable Back button Illustration 11 7 Screen Properties In the General panel you can edit information specific to this particular Display Screen action m Name Type in the name you wish to display in the archive window for this action item m Edit Screen Click on this button to edit the data for this particular type of screen m Enable Back button
60. Item dialog and select Download File A Download File Item action item is added to the archive and the Download File Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Goto Item Properties General page appears Download File Item Properties 24 x geeogeresesssseseeeeseg Server address User name Password P Initial directory A File name FO Server Type HTTP y Save as y El Illustration 8 13 Download File Item Properties General page Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 18 Download File Action Item Function Server address The address of the server where the file can be found For example www mindvision com ftp mindvision com or 123 456 789 0 Variables can be used here For example O ServerAddress User name User name for the server If Server Type is set to HTTP Basic Authentication will be used for access to the web server A variable can be used here For example UserName Password Password for the server If Server Type is set to HTTP Basic Authentication will be used for access to the web server A variable can be used here For example Y Password Initial Directory Directory on the server where the file can be found For example pub windows A variable can be used here For example Y InitialDir File Name Name of the file on the server to download For exa
61. Items 8 74 Setting System Service Advanced 2 Properties Function Log On As Specifies which users rights should be assigned to the service You can assign all the rights granted by the system to the service by selecting System account Conversely you can assign only the rights associated with a particular user by selecting User name entering a User name and Password Error control Specifies the level of error control available to the service You can Ignore errors or control for Normal Severe or Critical Dependencies A string of comma separated names of services that the system must start before this service Specify an empty string if the service has no dependencies Table 8 44 System Services Advanced Properties Setting System Service Advanced 2 Properties System Service Properties El E prensanagensananenenanannonenona Access flags SERVICE_ALL_ACCESS SERVICE_CHANGE_CONFIG SERVICE_ENUMERATE_DEPENDENTS SERVICE_INTERROGATE SERVICE_PAUSE_CONTINUE SERVICE_QUERY_CONFIG SERVICE_QUERY_STATUS SERVICE_START V IO OIL Illustration 8 54 System Services Advanced2 Properties Field Function Access flags Specifies which access flags are included with the service You can specify all or none of the access flags Table 8 45 System Services Advanced2 Properties See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages
62. Launch after successful setup 8 64 Layout 12 1 default layout 12 4 reordering 12 2 separators 12 4 setup 12 4 standard layout 12 4 Layout List 12 2 Layout Menu 3 17 Let user choose to have an uninstaller 6 36 License Agreement 3 12 6 23 License Agreement Screen 10 8 List Packages 6 7 6 14 Localization 18 1 Location Prompt 6 20 8 3 Log On As 8 74 Look in 8 33 M Maintaining Archives 6 48 Make backup of the file 8 24 Maximize button 3 7 Menu bar 3 6 Iindex 6 A B C DErFGuHiIJSIK LM N OPQReSsTUVWK Y Z Message 6 20 8 3 8 14 8 44 8 47 Min colors 6 41 Min memory 6 39 options 6 39 Minimize button 3 7 Minimize installer while application 1s running 8 65 missing 16 4 Move 6 20 8 3 Move Here 6 16 Moving package items 6 17 Multi Language Installers 18 2 Mutually Exclusive Groups 6 11 to 6 12 N Name 6 10 8 59 8 66 Named 8 33 Never replace option 8 10 8 50 8 63 New 3 8 new 16 4 newer 16 4 No I will 10 26 O Open 3 8 Open after a successful setup has completed 8 51 Open Internet Address 6 20 8 3 Open with 8 57 OR logic 9 10 Ordering Information 3 18 Other 8 28 8 68 Other Group Files 8 30 8 39 Other Location 8 27 P Package 3 15 Package Items moving 6 17 Package Properties 6 9 6 12 Package Size 6 9 Package size 6 11 6 14 Packages 6 7 and build directives compared 15 1 Packages Property page 9 4 Packages Report 6 43 Parameter 1 LONG 6 38 8 8 17 5 17 7 to 17 8 Parameter 2 LPST
63. Menta tesar apm Mest eh San aE Gok he Nek Eo St ES A oO O Quek dd 3 17 He MER a dae eek eta oat and Sahara AA 3 17 sine Toster VIS Help tard is cb aed dente o eo ee eel aa ek ROE a bh eR 3 18 Accessing Help from the Archive Window 0 0 eee eee 3 18 Designing an Installer 0 cece ccc teenies 4 1 NS SA ate hae Ai ee hao entities Shy weal oe eee ee eee ee ee 4 1 About Tras aler VIS ardid aio o lea dise des 4 1 Sample PtiOms or Files ro ra ia a end 4 2 Sample Options for Packages TASA A A eae es 4 2 Sample Options for the Installer in General cosita tarta iaa 4 2 Using the Archive Wizard 000s 5 1 Building an Installer with the Archive Wizard oooooooooooooomommmrrraar eens 5 1 Selecting the Product Name and Directory ora a 5 1 Adding Piles and Folde lA tata 5 2 Adding Program loons a A a di 5 4 Pin SHOreCUtS 2 rd a eA eee een 5 6 AA Cl CII So a A Seah ese aaa eestor sh be ROSS 5 8 Po Gee Installer era tans Anette ae wis ee ea he Gee ete as Se eas 5 9 PE Gitine an atale r Archiv is a ee le EE eat aoe a ate te 5 10 Creating an Installer 00 0 ccc cee an 6 1 Understanding the Archive Window tira A BOS OWS A 6 1 Viewilie ie Archive Window ag 20 a AA Lhe Oe eee 6 2 Searching For Items in the Archive Window 34 4 04 c04 A ees 6 2 Steps fo butlame 4n Installer aos a Sow ng a Gea A ad a je ede 6 2 ALCWIVES auc cun Sex cu sabe teed eae ete SUD eae id As 6 3 Addins Existing Pi
64. Message Screen To customize the Finished Message Screen 1 Select Finished Message from the Screens menu The Finished dialog box appears Finished El IV Show this dialog M Use default text Finished ee eee File name P Params P File name P Params P File name O OS Params P Set Clear Click Close to end the Setup Variable Click to assign i E Cancel Help Illustration 10 15 Finished Message dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox 1f you want the Finished Message screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Make the following entries Finished Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Finished Message Screen This field defaults to Fin ished Finished text 1 Type the message you want to appear on the top of this screen This field defaults to Setup is complete and ProductName is now installed Check box 1 through 3 Select this field if you want this checkbox displayed to your customer This allows the customer to select this field during the install File name 1 through 3 Type a name for the checkbox Note The checkbox does not appear unless you
65. Not only is disk space conserved but in many cases installations occur faster because the amount of data which must be read from a floppy disk is reduced Although custom code can easily be added to handle complicated situations Installer VISE does not require programming expertise for writing installation scripts You can eval Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 Installer VISE Features Chapter 1 Introduction Installer VISE Features uate the operating environment check for existing files move copy and rename files without ever having to write custom external code This section lists some of the features in Installer VISE For a complete list of new and modified features for this release refer to the What s New document in the Relnotes file in the Installer VISE folder The following are some of the Installer VISE features Free fully functional demo can be downloaded from the web site at www mindvision com Meets Windows 95 98 and Windows NT logo requirements Single file installer fully compatible with Windows 95 Windows 95 OSR2 Windows 98 Windows 98SE Windows Me Windows NT 3 x Windows NT 4 Windows 2000 and Windows XP Step by step Archive Wizard for quick and easy setup Fully graphical drag and drop point and click programming environment Floating tool palettes with commands corresponding to menu commands Supports 256 custom package options including Typical Compact and S
66. On line Help 1s a guide to the parts of Installer VISE On line help comple ments this guide You can view the entire contents of on line Help from the Archive win dow or you can access Help from a specific window or dialog box and get information specific to that area At the Archive window select Help from the Help menu or click on the following icon on the Standard toolbar 2 The Help Topics Installer VISE Help window appears This wndow provides three pages that allow you to search for help in different ways The Help Contents page allows you to find information by subject Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Using the Help Index Page 3 19 To use the Contents page 1 Click on the Contents tab The Contents page appears Help Topics Installer VISE Help 0 x Contents Index Find Click a book and then click Open Or click another tab such as Index 2 Title Page Legal Stuff A Introduction 12 Welcome 2 Installer VISE Overview 2 Creating Your First Installation Installation Topics Oo Reference Ne License Agreement o Ordering Information o Technical Support Print Cancel Illustration 3 16 Installer VISE Help Contents page This page displays all the topics by subject A closed book icon gt indicates that there are more specific topics available under this topic A question mark icon indicates that this is the most specific information on the selected top
67. Please choose a directory Initial Directory Type the directory name that you want the Location prompt to default You can use runtime variables Store the result in this Type the runtime variable in which you want to store the variable results Table 8 29 Location Prompt Action General Options See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 You can add a Message Box to your installer using the Message Box action item com mand This action item displays a message box when the customer runs your installer You can use a message box to give the customer a message or prompt him her for a yes no answer then based on that answer take different paths of execution This is a good place to use the runtime variable ProductName For example you can type ProductName in the Caption field Then type Thank you for installing ProductName Please send in your registration card in the Message field This is the message that is displayed to the user The variable ProductName is replac
68. Properties pages 19 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 El Languages Property Page on page 9 7 19 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Setting Folder Installer VISE allows you to set several options for each folder included in an archive Options Following are some of the options you can select Location where the folder should be installed m Replacement instructions in case of a pre existing item on the customer s com puter m Calling external code before or after the folder is installed m Evaluating the result of an action item and installing or not installing the folder based on the result m Setting requirements that the customer s computer must meet for the folder to be installed To set folder properties 1 At the Archive window select the folder for which you want to set properties 2 Select Properties from the Edit menu right click on the folder and select Proper ties or press the ALT and ENTER keys The Folder Properties window appears Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 30 Setting Installer Properties 3 Click on the General tab The Folder Properties General page appears Folder Properties El x General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives p gt Folder s name W in95 WinNT Spreadsheet Samples Folder s n
69. See Externally Setting TargetDir on page 19 9 y Causes the installer to use any runtime variable values present in the specified INI file Fxample setup exe v varsettings ini See Externally Setting Variables on page 19 8 r Causes the installer to use the specified INI file to record the settings made by the user during the install The recorded install can then be played back with the p command line switch Example setup exe r recsettings ini See Recording and Playing Back Installs on page 20 3 p Causes the installer to silently play back a previously recorded install using the user settings stored in the specified INI file User settings are recorded using the r command line switch Example setup exe p recsettings ini See Recording and Playing Back Installs on page 20 3 lowercase L For use by an application this command line switch causes the installer to send progress notification messages to the specified window Example setup exe l listener See Monitoring Installer Progress on page 20 4 n For use by an application this command line switch can optionally be used in conjunction with the l switch to identify the installer that is sending progress notification messages Example setup exe l listener n reporter See Monitoring Installer Progress on page 20 4 Table 20 2 Command line switches for controlling installers Chapter 20 Aut
70. Select the file and click on the Delete button The file is deleted You want details about the file Select the file and click on the Details button The Shortcut Details dialog box appears Shortcut name o Cancel Command line parameters Target pathname x1 argetDir S amples W ord Processing Samplestfaxc The name of the file appears in the Shortcut name field and the target path appears in the Target path name field You can edit the information and add a command line parameter if necessary in the Command line parameter field Click on the OK button The Program Icons window appears Table 5 4 Shortcut Details 4 Click on the Next gt button The Screens window appears Adding Screens The Screens window allows you to select which screens you want to appear to the cus tomer during the install This section only describes how to select the screens you want to include See Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens for specific information on each of the screens and the available options that you can select Following are the screens that are automatically selected m Welcome Screen m Select Install Directory m Ready to Install Message m Finished Message Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Building the Installer Building the Installer Installer VISE for Windows Screens Select the screens to be displayed during the install from the list below They wi
71. Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 El Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 5 Languages Property Page on page 9 7 19 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 19 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Registry Entry Action Item Setting Registry Entry General Properties Registry Entry Action Item 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 You can add a new registry entry to the archive using the registry entry command Regis try entries can be written read into a runtime variable or removed from the registry If you choose to remove an entry the uninstaller skips the action To add a registry entry At the Archive window select Registry Entry Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu A registry entry is added to the archive and the Registry Entry Properties window appears To set registry entry general properties 1 At the Registry Entry Properties window click on the General tab The Registry Entry Properties General page appears Registry Entry Properties EI ES General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B write entry y vanae Eick ta assan
72. Splash screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Welcome Screen 10 5 Customizing the You can customize the installers Welcome Screen You have the option of adding a win Welcome Screen dow title and text For example you might add a welcome statement and a copyright warning You can also add a side bitmap with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels To customize the Welcome Screen 1 Select Welcome Screen from the Screens menu The Welcome Screen dialog box appears Welcome Screen x I Show this dialog M Use default text Welcome Welcome to the ZProductN ameX Setup program This program will install 4ProductName on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or
73. Standard toolbar Save As Saves the current archive with a different name Installer VISE displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your archive AutoCreate Updater AutoCreate Updater Archive takes an existing installer archive Archive and compares it to the folder containing your newer files It creates a new archive and generates update files using Updater VISE for any files that have changed It can also include any new files that have been added and delete old files See Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer Properties Displays the Installer Properties dialog that allows you to edit installer properties for the open archive This dialog contains five property pages General Uninstaller External Codes Sys 13 tem Requirements and Web See Setting Installer Properties on page 6 30 Language Properties Displays the Language Properties dialog You can use this command to edit the installer s languages See Chapter 18 Cre ating Installers in Different Languages Build Installer Builds an installer See Building the Final Installer on page 6 45 for more information You can also access this com mand by clicking on the following button on the Standard toolbar Test Installer Tests an installer before the final installer is built See Testing an Installer on page 6 44 You can also access this command by pressing the E5 or clicking on the following button on the Stand
74. This chapter provides information about using external code and the different ways exter nal code can be called during the installation Installer VISE allows you to develop installers that call external code This feature provides you with the flexibility to meet most installation challenges You can write 32 bit code that can be called at points you specify during the installation process The steps involved in using external code in an installer are 1 Building an external code dll file 2 Adding the external code file to the archive 3 Determining how the installer calls external code The first step in using external codes with an installer 1s to create an external code dll file An external code dll file 15 a Windows dynamic library with at least one procedure exported This is the entry procedure that is to be called by the setup program This exter nal code file can be assigned to any number of packages and system requirements and or previous action results can determine its execution The entry procedure must appear as follows extern C LONG CALLBACK ViseEntry LONG IParam1 LPCSTR IpParam2 DWORD dwReserved See Creating External Code for Installer VISE Installers on page 17 2 for more details Your external code file must be 32 bit Installer VISE provides a skeleton project in the ExtCodes folder which is located in the Installer VISE folder This example of code dis plays a simple message box to the user Th
75. Upd ate Renew example if your serial number 1s activated but the subscription has expired this menu q option will allow you to renew your subscription online Activate o The possible variations and their functions are as follows Purchase an Installer VISE subscription m Check for available updates Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools Installer VISE for Windows Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate 13 9 m Renew your subscription m Activate your copy of Installer VISE The following example illustrates the process involved with purchasing an Installer VISE subscription To purchase an Installer VISE subscription online 1 Select Purchase Installer VISE from the Tools menu This will establish an Inter net connection and activate integrated purchasing through the eSellerate e com merce system Tools Archive Wizard visual Basic Project Wizard Snapshot Wizard Dependency Watcher Dependency Walker verity Archive Purchase Installer WISE Illustration 13 17 Purchase Installer VISE menu item 2 The Installer VISE Purchase Wizard will display Click the Start button and follow the online instructions to purchase your Installer VISE subscription Installer YISE Purchase Wizard xi Welcome to the Installer VISE Purchase Wizard This wizard will walk you through the steps needed to purchase and activate your software Any information you provide during the delivery process will remain secure
76. VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Make entries in the following fields Ready to Install Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Ready to Install Message Screen This field defaults to Ready to Install Ready to Install text Type the text you want to appear on this screen This field defaults to Setup now has enough information to start installing ProductName Click Back to make any changes before continuing Click Cancel to exit Setup Current Settings Select this field if you want an edit text field to appear which displays the customer s previous choices setup type destination directory program folder name and selected packages What is displayed depends on which dialogs are displayed to the customer Table 10 11 Ready To Install Message Options 5 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Ready to Install Message Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 22 Customizing the Second Read Me Message Screen m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then
77. Windows Creating a multi file updater archive can be a tedious process if you are updating many files You must first create a separate update file for each of your files using Updater VISE and then add them to your archive Next you need to create Find Actions for any files whose name or location is not guaranteed For each update file in your archive you must open the General tab of Update File Properties and complete the File name field with the name of the file you want to update Finally you must open the Advanced tab of each update file and set the Location of file to update popmenu to Find result A known issue for Installer VISE is that the AutoCreate Updater Archive function does not automatically create Find and Delete actions as described in this chapter For information on how to create your own Find actions after using the AutoCreate Updater Archive function see the following knowledge database article http www mindvision com knowledge kdb_1258 html Installer VISE can help do some of this work by automatically creating a multi file updater archive using the AutoCreate Updater Archive command in the File menu AutoCreate Updater Archive takes an existing installer archive and compares it to the folder contain ing your newer files Instead of updating your existing archive files however it creates a new archive and generates update files for any files that have changed It can also include any new files that have bee
78. You can add a new comment to an archive using the Comment command Comments can be used as a reminder to later clarify the purpose of the archive This item displays any text you would like to appear in your archive s display It has no effect on the installs you build This item is useful as a written reminder of what your installer is trying to do Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Copy Action Item 8 9 To add a comment 1 At the Archive window select Comment Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu A comment item is added to the archive and the Comment Properties window appears Comment Properties El xi Comment Illustration 8 6 Comment properties 2 Type a comment in the Comment field Copy Action Item You can add a Copy action to the archive using the Copy action item command Copy actions can be used to copy files and folders on the customer s machine For example you could use this action to backup all the files and folders on the customer s machine to a backup folder before starting to install files Copy actions do not find hidden files or folders To add a Copy action item 1 Select Copy from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Copy A Copy action item is added to the archive and the Copy Action Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Copy Action Properties General page appears Copy Action Properties 21 x Copy
79. ae ed ek ee pa ee bad ae eae ee ed sk eee 15 1 Bula Directive Set Oc sad nears ares echt a ate eee earl ee ois 15 2 Pld Tie Se Acar cytes ft ate de case dnb Sonn aes scents O NO 15 5 PPP Ora Maree Ree ae eee Ae nee eee tee ees 15 5 TAE 2 Arc tae a E ce id roo SS 15 5 De NG A aa esta ech A A a ake O Aare aero 15 6 Desist iO mil a erpita mark ae eae athe ahs On aoe om ae arene a aaa 15 6 astral Name cerrar aora hed ee cere ee ean nen a aes 15 6 SS eMC CA con A tacos Wo ana teh als bce ater nas a etek eGo hae a eet eke tite ek oo doce 15 8 sarmine A DOUE COC ena te si naa 15 9 Barcala Ad ea A 15 9 AutoCreate Updater Archive aaaea 16 1 Multi filel pdater Arenives vta depa di 16 1 Installer VISE Automates th Process sta dd a is 16 1 The Auto Greate Updater Process unas dle dad 16 1 Installer VISE for Windows Contents vi Using External Code 6 1 ees 17 1 ADOUFE emal Ode mar a Ane a eee 17 1 Burldime an External Code DLE File cote dhd ahout ES AE 17 1 Creating External Code for Installer VISE Installers o ooooooooooooo 17 2 Adding the External Code File to the Archive 3 4 2 40c4ondedaatedeeind dade adetoudes 17 3 Caline the External SOG sra dd dea 17 3 Calkis External Code at Initialization da A A As 17 3 Calling External Code Before or After Install anar iaa 17 6 Calling External Code Any Time During the Installation oooo o 17 8 Edine Erten Gode add o
80. al al al al el al al al aj 4 Nig S558 K A R A R K A R ooog OO For Help press F1 Illustration 3 3 Installer VISE Archive Window When you save an archive you can change its name or the location where it is saved or do both When you change an archive s name or location you create a copy of the archive A A AAA A A If you want to save an archive without changing 1ts name or location use the Save command To change an archive s name or location 1 Select Save As from the Standard toolbar or the File menu The Save As dialog box appears Save As Save jn E work in progress Filename MME save as type Installer WISE Files vct Cancel ZA Illustration 3 4 Save As dialog Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 4 Using Drag and Drop 2 Make the following entries Save In To save the archive in a different location navigate through the folders or directories until the desired one is located File name To change the name of an archive type the new name in this field Table 3 1 Save As Options 3 Click on the Save button Installer VISE saves the archive as a VCT vct filename extension file and the Archive window appears Using Drag and Drop Installer VISE allows you to use drag and drop to move files and folder into and within the Archive window Drag and drop commands are executed using the mouse These co
81. all of it s contents will be removed during an uninstall Folder size If checked this size will be used for required disk space requirements If unchecked the size will be calculated at runtime Table 8 25 Advanced Folder Properties See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 El Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 m Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 E After Property Page on page 9 13 Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 40 Goto Action Item Goto Action Item You can add a Goto action to the archive using the Goto action item command This action item creates a jump to a selected Label item Goto items must be coupled with Label item and must have an action result set in the Actions tab To add a Goto action item 1 Select Goto from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Goto A Goto action item is added to the archive and the Goto Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Goto Item Properties General page appears Goto Item Properties 24 x Illustration 8 26 Goto Item Properties General page 3 Click the lookup box and select a L
82. archive window layout Untitled Mind ision Installer ISE 2 x Fie Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help Default v 8 2k a 3 Support Files Install From Install To File Version 3 Typical Setup WO MANE SrcDir Ask User J Compact Setup M E ExtCodes 3 Silent Setup VE Include 3 Pre Screens Items MD extcodes h VE Win16 Mm win32 LJ InstvISE cnt 3 InstYise exe 7 InstvISE GID 7 INSTYISE HLP Q Support Translator exe lt For Help press F1 Illustration 12 6 Archive Window with Columns from New Layout There are a number of tools at your disposal in the Edit Layout window Click the gt gt Copy gt gt button to place the field selected in the Available Fields scroll list in the List Columns Double clicking on a field in the Available Fields scroll list will also place the field in the List Columns When a field is selected in either the List Columns scroll list clicking the Clear button removes the field from the corresponding scroll list To move a block of fields to the List Columns scroll box select the first field of the block in the Available Fields scroll box then with the Shift key held down select the last field of the block With the entire block selected click the gt gt Copy gt gt button To move several discontinuous fields List Columns scroll box hold down the Control key to select discontinuou
83. be viseicat dat Do not display disconnect By default a dialog is displayed to the user after the file dialog after download is data has been downloaded notifying them that it is now complete OK to disconnect from the Internet If this box 1s checked that dialog will not be displayed Table 6 20 Installer Web Properties Generating Archive Before creating the final installer you can generate reports that identify problems that Reports might be present in the archive The reports are saved as text files so they can opened with Notepad for viewing or printing Types of Archive Reports Following are the reports you can generate m Packages This report provides a list of the files to be installed organized by pack age m Items This report lists the items to be installed organized by item which is the same layout as the archive m Diagnostic This report lists possible problems with the archive files not assigned to packages packages without any files and packages without descriptions m Registry Items This report is a list registry entry items Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 44 Creating an Archive Report Creating an Archive To create an archive report Report 1 At the Archive window select Reports from the File menu The Reports dialog box appears Reports Packages A report of items to be installed organized by package Items A report of iteme to be installed or
84. be saved m Installer Name determines the name with which the installer will be saved The following settings are specific to Build Targets 13 Installer Properties see Setting Installer Properties on page 6 30 Language Properties see Setting Language Properties on page 18 3 m Screens menu settings see Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Any changes you make to these settings will remain associated with the current Build Tar get the one selected in the upper left corner of the archive window To create Build Targets 1 Select Build Targets from the Archive menu Archive Illustration 15 8 Build Targets Menu Item 2 Select the Add button in the Build Targets window Build Targets EZ Configurations Close Illustration 15 9 Build Targets Window Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management Installer VISE for Windows Settings Specific to Build Targets 15 7 3 In the Name field type a name for the new build target Add Build Target Ed Name Debug Single file to QA E ance Copy settings from Default y Illustration 15 10 Naming a Build Target If you wish the new build target to copy settings from a previously defined build target select the build targets name from the Copy settings from popmenu 4 Select the Edit button in the Build Targets window This displays the Edit Build Target dialog Build Targets Ea Close Add Remove Edit Co
85. box appears About MindYision Installer ISE xi a MindWision Installer VISE i F Release 3 6 1 Copyright 1995 2004 MindVision Activate To renew your Installer WISE subscription visit Purchase http www mindvision com renewal Your serial number is required for renewal MindWision Software voice 402 323 6600 5901 North 58th St fax 402 323 6611 Lincoln NE 68507 email sales mindvision com http www mindwyision com Warning this computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Illustration 2 9 About MindVision Installer VISE 4 Click on the Activate button The Installer VISE Activation dialog box appears The computer you use to activate Installer VISE will be the only one that can use the fully functional software You should proceed with activation now only if you Not Yet intend to use Installer VISE on this computer Name e Serial Number pu o Illustration 2 10 Installer VISE Activation Note If you click on the Not Yet button Installer VISE is not activated and a Pur chase Installer VISE Online dialog box appears each time you build an Installer 5 Make the following entries Name Type your name or the name of your company
86. can be used to launch other applications or execute batch files The installer can be instructed to wait until the application has finished before con tinuing continue after launching or wait until the installer has completed before launch ing the application A common use of this action item 1s to launch other installers from a main installer To add a Run Application action item Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 1 Select Run Application from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dia log and select Run Application A Run Application action item is added to the archive and the Run Application Properties window appears Click on the General tab The Run Application Properties General page appears Run Application Properties 25 x grenpereeesssseseeeeee File name y EJ Params Run Normal window IV Wait for application to finish Launch after successful setup Minimize installer while application is running Illustration 8 45 Run Application General Properties Select or type the name of the application you want to run in the File name pop menu For example type WinDir notepad exe which launches the notepad You can also select the application by clicking on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box Type the command line parameters in the Params field For example type Tar getDir Readme txt Note This field is optional Select one of the following options fro
87. comment about the vari able you can type that in the Comments field Edit Variable En Name Vers Value fi a Comment Version string Cancel Illustration 19 3 Edit Variable Variable names are case sensitive Product is not the same as prod uct 4 Click OK to close the Edit Variable window 5 Click OK to close the Variable List window To enter variables in text areas 1 When entering a variable to be substituted at runtime type a percent sign followed by the variable name followed by a percent sign VariableName is the indicator for a runtime variable You can use the Settings ini file or some other specified INI file to assign values to vari ables outside of Installer VISE for Windows By default Installer VISE will look for a file called Settings ini in the same directory as the setup executable If you want to specify a file other than Settings ini then you need to add the command line switch of v filename For instance setup exe v varsettings 1n1 The settings file should follow standard INI file conventions Entries must be a zero based index The installer will process each entry beginning with zero until the sequence is broken Values are formatted as follows Variables 0 One way you might use this feature is to specify the value of the variable TargetDir TargetDir is a reserved variable that if written to will be displayed as the default instal lation dire
88. corner of the archive window See Build Tar gets on page 15 5 im Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Setting Installer General Properties Setting Installer General Properties Installer VISE for Windows 6 31 To set installer general properties 1 At the Archive window select Installer Properties from the File menu The Installer Properties dialog box appears Hew Ctrl Open Ctrl Ol Save Ctrl S Save Ag AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer Properties Language Properties Build Installer Test Installer FA Batch Build Reports Update Archive Create Batch File 1 docsvise curent ct 2 docevises Bcurrent ct 3 MpProduct 3 3 CT 4 Customs creenel WET Exit Illustration 6 29 Installer Properties Menu Item 2 Click on the General tab The Installer Properties General page appears Installer Properties En General Uninstaller External Codes System Requirements Web Product name Segment size Unlimited y V Generate log file Suggest reboot after successful setup CDROM install Tl Debug version Store files in archive V Install empty folders Custom installer icon Change Icon Assign time zone adjusted dates to installed files Hide Starting Setup Please wait dialog JESENE jo K on first disk Authenticode support IV Validate file paths when saving project V Rollback changes after cancelle
89. deletes file s folder s Checks for the existance of DirectX on the target machine Displays 4 dialog that prompts the user for a disk Displays a custom or built in dialog to the user Downloads a file from a FTP or a HTTP server Edits the Autoexec bat file Edits the Config sys file An action that edits text files Adds existing files and folders to the archive An action that searches for file s folder s Creates a new folder in the archive Create a Goto action which can be used to jump to Label items Merges the contents of another VCT file at build time Read write or remove an entry in an INI file y Illustration 8 22 Add Item dialog 3 A Find Action item is added to the archive and the Find Action Properties wndow appears Installer VISE for Windows Find Action Item 8 33 pregarnonannanennnnnzos Find Files andfolders y F Don t display search dialog Named Look in X I Include subfolders Store the search result in this variable Click to assign Store found item s full path name 1 Find hidden files and folders Find multiple occurrences Hamat Illustration 8 23 Find Action Properties General page Make selections and enter information into the following fields to define your search Field Function Find Select one of the following items that you want to find from the Find popmenu File and Folders File s Folders s Don t display search Whe
90. dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Verify Password Screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Make entries in following fields Password Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Verify Password Screen Setup requires This text explains where your customer is to enter his her password Edit the text if necessary Password to check for Type the password that you are requiring your customer to type during the install Table 10 2 Password Options 5 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Verify Password Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the fol lowing m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Registration Information Screen 10 11 Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 6 The Variable field can be used
91. distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Set Clear Variable Click to assign Illustration 10 3 Welcome Screen dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox 1f you want the Welcome Screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox 1f you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Welcome Screen in the Wel come field 5 Type the text you want to appear in the Welcome Screen in the Welcome text field 6 You can use the default bitmap displayed or select your own customized bitmap to add to the Welcome Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or the File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 7 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or T
92. dll Module L232 dll Location E WINNT system324L232 dll Module MMDRY dll Location E WINNT System32 mmdrv dll Module MPR dll Location E WINNT System32 mpr dll Module MPR dll Location E WINNT System32 mpr dll Module MSVCAT dll Location E WwINNT system32 MS CRT_ dll y b your own risk Modules marked with an asterisk are core operating system components and should be added at your own risk T Add duplicate files Properties Cancel OK Illustration 13 9 Dependency Watcher with DLL Dependencies 4 Check the box next to each file you want added to your installer Items marked with an asterisk are core operating system components and should be added at Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools 13 6 Dependency Walker 5 Click the Properties button to display the Explorer s property dialog for the cur rently selected file Advyapi32 dll Properties General Version Security Advapi32 dll Type Location Size Compressed size Application Extension EXWINNTAsystem32 240KB 246 544 bytes 246 784 bytes used File is not compressed MS DOS name Created Modified Accessed ADWAPI32 DLL Sunday October 13 1996 8 38 00 PM Thursday May 01 1997 Thursday July 30 1998 8 21 21 4M Attributes M Read onlj Urraccnnnonccncnacnnctas M Archive I Hidden 7 System I Compressed Ill
93. e No Cancel Click the Yes button if you want to save the changes or the No button if you do not Installer VISE closes You did not make any Installer VISE closes changes since the last time you saved the archive Table 3 3 Save Changes Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 6 Parts of the Archive Window Parts of the Archive Once you start a new archive you work in the Archive window Within this window you Window can add edit and store the different elements that make up an installer program This win dow accepts entries and commands used to build the installer This section explains the basic parts of the Archive window that you use to build an installer Close button Maximize Restore button A Minimize button Application Control menu Tile Pe MyProduct 3 3 CT Mind ision Installer ISE oj xj Menu bar File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help a om a a 7 P Standard Toolbar DIS Gal ese E ae q EN af WS ata ee lao Action Items Toolbar 1 Build Toolbar Default y AEL 2A Ca al Sa iaaa S S a SH Action Items Toolbar 2 Support Files MEE EA Ea gem ETypical Setup Database Samples File Folder v Ll Compact Setup L Endofmonth txt Text Document iv C Silent Setup eadsheet Samples F
94. greater than or equal to the number in the Version number fields Table 9 3 Version Comparison Options 3 Type the version in the Version number fields Four fields are provided to specify the version number Instead of entering decimals enter the numbers that appear after a decimal in the next field For example to search for the version number 3 1 5 type 3 in the first field 1 in the second field and 5 in the third field The Packages Property page allows you to set the package s for which an item will be included To access the Packages Property page 1 Click on the Packages tab on the Properties window of the selected item 2 The Packages Property page appears Copy Action Properties EI ES General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives BA gt 3 Typical Setup 3 Compact Setup 3 Silent Setup J Pre Screens Items Illustration 9 2 Packages Property page 3 Check any packages which should include the item The System Property page allows you to set the following requirements that the cus tomer s machine must meet before an item can be processed or a package is displayed Platform m Audio playback support Screen resolution Number of colors supported Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Installer VISE for Windows Setting Platform Requirements 9 5 m Minimum memory To access the System Property page 1 Click on the Syste
95. have the opportunity to change this to whatever they want Show group window Allows the user to display the program item and program folder of the uninstall icon if selected Does not display the program folder if not selected Program item name Type the name of the Uninstall Program Item For example type Remove MyProduct 2 0 If this field is left blank no uninstall item will appear in the Program Folder The uninstaller will still be available through the Add Remove Programs control panel applet Program item icon path Type the path name of a file containing an icon for the Program Item If this is left blank the default icon is used This field is ignored when the Program item name field is left blank Icon index Type the index of the icon in the icon file for the Uninstall Program Item If left blank the default icon is used This field is ignored when the Program item name field is left blank Table 6 14 Uninstaller Properties Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Setting Installer External Code Properties Setting Installer System Requirements Setting Installer External Code Properties Use common programs Places the uninstall program item and its program folder folder in the common programs folder if selected Places the uninstall program item in the user s programs folder if not selected External code dll path Type the path name of an external cod
96. into the variable Find hidden files and When checked hidden files and folders can be found folders When unchecked hidden files and folders are ignored by the search Find multiple occurrences If checked and multiple files match the search criteria a dialog will be displayed to the user asking them to choose one of the matching files Prompt The message that will be displayed to the user if multiple files are found that match the search criteria Table 8 18 Find Action General Properties You cannot access the Prompt field unless you select the Find multiple occurrences field See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Advanced Property Page on page 9 1 13 E Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Folder Archive Item You can add a folder to the archive using the Folder archive item command Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting Folder Properties To add a folder item 1 Select Folder from the Action Item toolbar or
97. left blank only the User name and Organization fields will be visible to the user If both Organization and Serial number fields are left blank only the User name field will be displayed Enter the name of the external code dll that will be called to verify the registration information If blank the registration will not be verified You can drag a bitmap file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the frame or click the Set but ton to choose a side bitmap to display The dimensions of the side bitmap are 138x258 pixels Select Install Directory Enter the default destination directory name that should display to the user You may specify the default directory for installs on Windows 3 x using the top field and for installs on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP using the bottom field The user will have the option to change the direc tory name where the files will be installed Table 3 7 Screens Menu Commands Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Screens Menu Select Install Type Function Enter the conditions for displaying a typical compact and custom type of installation for the user to select If Typical Setup 1s selected only the items that are in the Typical Setup package will be processed If Compact Setup is selected only the items in the Compact Setup package will be processed If Custom Setup is selected the next dialog di
98. may do so from the Archive window Refer to the appropriate section in Chapter 6 Creating an Installer for more information If you edit any elements of an archive you must rebuild the installer Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Understanding the Archive Window Installer VISE for Windows Installer VISE allows you to build a basic installer or an installer with many features which presents your customer with numerous options This chapter provides the information for building an installer that suits the needs of your company WU If you want to build a basic installer you can use the Archive Wizard See Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard for more information A N Y me This chapter first describes the Archive window which is where you build an installer Then it explains each step involved in building the installer Once you create or open an Installer VISE archive you work in the Archive window Before you begin creating an installer it is important to be familiar with the Archive win dow The Archive window allows you to add items such as packages folders files action items and so on to an archive This archive is what is used to build the installer The Archive window also allows you to manage these items once they have been added to the archive MyProduct 3 3 CT MindYision Installer
99. of action item to an archive Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Describes how to set common properties on items and packages that have been added to an archive Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Explains how to add installer screens to the archive that are displayed to your customers while they are installing your software Chapter 11 Custom Screens Describes how to design custom screens for use in your installers Chapter 12 Customizing the Archive Window Instructions on how to modify the layout of the archive window to make installer creation and debugging easier Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools Installer VISE includes a number of powerful tools to simplify the installer construction process This chapter introduces you to those tools Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard Step by step instructions on using the Snapshot Wizard to provide an easy way to log all of the actions of another installer in a snapshot file and to automatically create an installer that can perform the same actions Table 1 1 User s Guide Overview Chapter 1 Introduction 1 6 Conventions Chapter Chapter Contents Chapter 15 Describes how the use of Build Directives and Advanced Project Management Build Targets can aid in the construction and building of multiple installers from a single archive Chapter 16 Describes how Installer VISE s AutoCreate AutoCreate Updater
100. of new files but also registry entries ini file entries and perhaps the removal of old files The Snapshot Wizard provides an easy way to log all of these actions in a snapshot file and automatically create an installer that can perform the same actions Once this basic installer is created you can further customize it to perform additional actions if necessary A snapshot captures the state of a user s machine This state information is stored in a snapshot file and includes selected directory file registry and 1mi file information Later after one or multiple installers have been run on the user s machine a comparison can be performed against this snapshot file to see exactly what modifications have taken place on that machine Using this information an installer can be automatically created to perform these same actions Or this information can also be a useful diagnostic tool for analyzing or troubleshooting a user s machine to see exactly what has been changed since the snap shot was taken To use the Snapshot Wizard 1 Open an Installer VISE archive window and select the Snapshot Wizard command in the Tools menu Tools Archive Wizard visual Basic Project Wizard Snapshot Wizard Dependency Watcher Dependency Walker verify Archive Purchase Installer WISE Illustration 14 1 Snapshot Wizard menu item Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard 14 2 The Snapshot File The Snapshot F
101. of the Program Files folder as read from the registry entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Current Version ProgramFilesDir For example C Program Files If the registry entry 1s not found this variable is WinDrive Program Files When run on Win3 1 this variable is WinDrive ProgramF This variable is useful because not all of your customers have the Program Files folder on the root of their C drive it might be on their D drive This folder has a different Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables Installer VISE for Windows Programs Programs Restart SerialNumber SetupType SrcDir SrcDrive StartMenu Installer VISE for Windows name for different language versions of Windows 9 x Using this variable makes sure the correct name 1s used The Programs variable contains the path name of the programs folder on the Win dows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP start menu For example C Win95 Start Menu Programs This is only valid when the installer is run ning on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable is blank if the installer is run on Windows 3 1 or Windows NT 3 5 This variable allows you to use the correct location of the programs folder on the start menu that might be different for different customers running the same system different for Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 20
102. of the directory chosen can be stored in a runtime variable and this variable can be used as an install location You can specify the caption of the dialog and the message presented to the customer A common use of this action is to prompt the customer for the location of a previous installation You can then use this location to install additional items To add a Location Prompt action item 1 Select Location Prompt from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dia log and select Location Prompt A Location Prompt action item 1s added to the archive and the Location Prompt Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Location Prompt Properties General page appears Location Prompt Properties 24 x petggeeeesessecessese General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B Caption Choose Directory Message ia choose a directory Initial directory Store the result in this variable Click to assign Illustration 8 35 Location Prompt Properties General page Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Message Box Action Item Message Box Action Item Installer VISE for Windows 3 Make the following entries Function Caption Type the text that you want to use as the caption for the dialog This field defaults to Choose Directory Message Type the text you want to use as the message for the dia log This field defaults to
103. on the OK button The Archive window appears You can add a customized installer s Requirements Screen This screen is automatically dis played to a customer if the target computer does not meet the system requirements you have set up Also you can add a side bitmap with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels To customize the Requirements Screen 1 Select Requirements Screen from the Screens menu The Requirements dialog box appears Requirements ES MV Use default text Requirements Setup has detected that this system does not meet the following requirements for ZProductN amez Set Clear Variable Click to assign i E Cancel Help Illustration 10 5 Requirements dialog 2 Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Requirements window in the Requirements field 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Type the text you want to appear in the Requirements window in the Requirements text field 5 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Requirements Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the follow ing m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap
104. open the Add Item dialog and select Folder A folder item is created in the archive and the Folder Properties window appears Folder Properties od ES prrgacnnncananenenanzos Folder s name Win95 WinNT New Folder Folder s name Win3 x Note the name from the field above will be used if left blank Source path Where is the folder located on your computer Size 0 00KB 0 bytes Contains 0 Files O Folders I Don t Install Folder Placeholder Illustration 8 24 Folder Properties Setting Folder Properties To set a folder s general properties 1 Open the folder s properties window by selecting the folder in the archive window and selecting Properties from the Edit menu Un do MiA f BFA u opi EHE A a f Past S y te ource Directories Find Update Eptract Delete Del Duplicate Seat Proaram Item s Create Shortcut s Illustration 8 25 Properties Menu item 2 Set the folder s general properties Function Folder s name Win95 8 Newer Name the folder will be given when it is installed on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP Typically a long folder name Folder s name Win3 x Name the folder will be given when it is installed on Windows 3 x Typically a short folder name If this field is blank the name from the above field will be used Table 8 19 Folder Properties General Tab Installer VISE for Win
105. opened Name Type the name of the registry entry You can use variables here For example type UserName Path Name Uses the same field as Name Label changes when the user selects Write entries from reg file Type the path and file name of the regedit file to import Value If you selected Write entry type the registry entry value Select one of the following options from the String pop menu String REG_SZ Number REG_DWORD Binary Data REG_BINARY MULTI_SZ or EXPAND_SZ You can use variables here For example type UserName For REG_MULTI_SZ enter string arrays as a single string of form stringo string string2 etc For REG_EXPAND_SZ enter a string that contains unexpanded references to environment variables For example type SystemRoot myprogram exe When an application reads this value SystemRoot will be expanded and replaced by the location of the directory that contains the Windows system files Default If you selected Read entry enter a default value This value is read if the entry is not found Table 8 35 Registry Entry Properties General Fields Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Writing Binary Data to the Registry 6 Click on the Don t add to uninstaller checkbox if you do not want the registry item to be added to the uninstall log and to not be removed when the uninstaller is run See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the
106. option to install the file in the archive anyway Doesn t apply to Always or Ask User Use Creation Date Forces a comparison of creation dates of the files as opposed to modification dates Table 8 23 Replace Options Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting Folder Advanced Properties 8 39 Installer VISE for Windows 5 The File Group popmenu is enabled if the current build target 1s a Web Installer The combo box contains two or more items Function In Installer Installer will use the Install from field to determine where the folder will be installed from Individual File The folder will be compressed and a Group File will be created for that file only The Group File must then be copied to the server s that will be used for the active web install Other Group Files The folder will be compressed and a Group File will be created for that file only The Group File must then be copied to the server s that will be used for the active web install Table 8 24 File Group Options 6 Set any remaining advanced file properties that apply to the file in question Function Attributes Attributes that will be given to the folder after 1t has been installed Don t add to uninstaller If this 1s checked the folder will not be added to the log uninstall log and will not be removed when the uninstaller is run Delete folder and contents If checked the folder and
107. remaining Pro gram Item Property pages 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Writing Binary Data to the To write binary data to the registry Registry 1 Add the file that contains the data to the archive 2 Remove it from all packages except the Support Files package 3 Type the name of the file in the Value field on the Registry Entry Properties Gen eral page The data that 1s in this file is added to the registry at install time Merging a Reg File with You can use the registry entry item to merge a reg file with the registry When this action the Registry is performed it instructs regedit to run silently and merge the reg file with the registry For the purpose of reading registry entries with a Registry Entry action item Installer VISE requires REG files that were exported using Regis 4 E try Editor version 4 or using version 5 and saving as the version 4 type With Registry Editor version 5 the default editor for Windows 2000 and XP the following steps are required Open Registry Editor and select the entry or entries you wish to export From the Registry menu select Export Registry File Enter a file name Click the Save as type popmenu and select Win9x NT
108. selects this button The dialog shown below will be displayed when you select this behavior Select Label Or Screen Action Item X Label or Screen action items El Simple Screen c E Custom Screen Cancel El Welcome Screen ine E Tab Order Browse for file Brings up a file dialog allowing the user to select a file Open Look in 3 Installer VISE J ExtCodes Hn Translator ese File name Instvise hlp Files of type all Files y Cancel Li Browse for folder Brings up a dialog allowing the user to select a folder Please choose a directory Path Esprogram filestinstaller vise 3 0 installer vise Directories E gt FN 2 Program Files Cancel Drives f APPS Network Table 11 4 Button Item Properties Chapter 11 Custom Screens Installer VISE for Windows Check Box Properties 11 11 Property Description Goto If Behavior is set to Goto this will display the Label or Screen Action item that you wish to jump to when the user selects this button Default Button Sets the button to be the default button in the dialog box The default button is drawn with a heavy black border when the dialog box first appears and is exe cuted if the user presses ENTER without choosing another command in the dialog box Windows allows only one default button in a dialog box Validate Fields If this checkbox is selected and the user selects this
109. source names of files in the Target language string field on the MindVision Language Translator window in the Translator application The information in the Target language string field appears in source language of the installer This allows the person who is doing the translation to select and modify the text If you want the Target language string field to contain no text do not select this checkbox See Translating a Translation File on page 18 6 for more information on how this field affects the Translator application 5 Click on the OK button The Save As dialog box appears 6 Select where you want to save the language file from the Save In popmenu 7 Type a file name in the File Name field You should give the translation file a descriptive name For example if the translation file is going to be in Spanish type Spanish Installer VISE automatically assigns the extension dat to the file 8 Click on the Save button The Language Properties window appears Once the translation file has been created it needs to be sent to the person who 1s doing the translation Send the translation file and the Translation application Translator exe to the person who 1s going to do the translation for you This application appears in the Installer VISE folder Translator exe 15 a 32 bit application which requires Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP to run The person who is doing the translation opens th
110. test an installer 1 At the Archive window select Test Installer from the File menu or press the F5 key Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Building the Final Installer Building the Final Installer Installer VISE for Windows Your copy of Installer VISE is not activated The Purchase Installer VISE Online dialog box appears Do one of the following Click the Purchase button to pur chase an Installer VISE subscription online and activate your copy of Installer VISE in place Click the Cancel button Installer VISE is not activated the installer will display the Installer VISE splash screen and the installer will expire after three days See Activating Installer VISE on page 2 6 for more information Your copy of Installer VISE is activated The Installer VISE splash screen does not appear to the customer and the installer does not automatically expire Table 6 22 Registration Options 3 The Save Installer As dialog box appears Select the location where you want to save the Installer in the Save in popmenu 4 Type the name for your installer in the File name field and click on the Save but ton This field defaults to Setup The installer that you built appears for you to review Once you are finished reviewing the installer the Archive window appears You now have the opportunity to make any changes to the archive before the final installer is built
111. the line containing this text field If the search line is not found the line is added to the end of the file before the WIN statement Table 8 8 Action Options 4 Click on the Match entire line only checkbox if you want the entire line to match the search text to be successful 5 If you selected Comment search line Insert text before search line or Insert text after search line type the text that you want to search for in the file in the Search text field 6 If you selected any option except the Comment search line type the text that is to be added to the file in the Text to add field Otherwise this text is on a line by itself in the specified position Note Commented lines are skipped Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Edit CONFIG SYS Item 7 Click on the Don t add to uninstaller log checkbox if you do not want the edit AUTOEXEC BAT item to be added to the uninstall log and not to be removed when the uninstaller is run See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Property pages 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 m After Property Page on page 9 13 Edit CONFIG SYS Item You can to add a new edit CONFIG SYS item to an archi
112. the CTRL and N keys An untitled archive window appears Untitled MindYision Installer ISE ox File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help Cl cal al ie sae 2 08 8 3 Support Files ET ypical Setup 3 Compact Setup 3 Silent Setup 3 Pre Screens Items For Help press F1 Illustration 6 3 New Archive Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Adding Existing Files and Folders Using Drag and Drop Using the Add Files Dialog Box Adding Existing Files and Folders 3 Select Save from the File menu or press the CRTL and S keys The Save As dialog box appears Save As Save in a work in progress EX doc Samples Vb File name Save as type Installer WISE Files wct y Cancel Wi Illustration 6 4 Save As dialog 4 Select the location where you want to save the archive in the Save in popmenu 5 Type the name of the archive in the File name field 6 Click on the Save button The archive is saved as a vct file and the Archive win dow appears with the name you selected in the title bar Once you have created an archive you need to add the existing files and folders you want to include in the installer Installer VISE provides two ways to add existing files or folders You can use drag and drop or use the Add Files dialog box When files and folders are added to the archive they appear on the right side of
113. the Don t ask user to replace if already registered checkbox if you do not want to prompt the user to register the file type if the file type is already registered prior to installation If this option is not selected the user is prompted to accept or decline the registration of the file type with the newly installed or specified exe 5 Click on the Don t add to uninstaller log checkbox if you do not want to add this file to the uninstaller log 6 Type a descriptive name of the file you are registering in the File type field For example type Installer VISE archive 7 Type or select the pathname in the Icon path popmenu of the file on the cus tomer s computer that contains the icon with which you want the file to be dis played For example type TargetDir Installer VISE InstVise exe You can also select the pathname by clicking on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box 8 Type the icon index in the Icon index field The exe and dll files can contain more than one icon This field is the zero based index of the icon in the file entered in the Icon path field 9 Type or select the pathname in the Open with popmenu of the file on the cus tomer s computer that you want to open when the user double clicks on files of this type For example type TargetDir Installer VISE InstVise exe You can also select the pathname by clicking on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box See Chapter 9
114. the archive Packages To delete an item 1 Select the item you want to delete 2 Do one of the following m Press the DELETE key m Select Delete from the Edit menu m Click the right mouse button and select Delete 3 The item is deleted Duplicating Items You might need to create several similar items It might be easier to create a single item and duplicate it several times instead of setting up each item individually To duplicate an item 1 Select the item you want to duplicate 2 Do one of the following m Click the right mouse button and select Duplicate m Select Duplicate from the Edit menu 3 The item is duplicated Moving Package Items You might need to rearrange the order of items within a package To move items select the item and drag and drop it in the desired location Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 18 Adding Archive Items Adding Archive Once you have set up the packages in the archive and assigned the necessary files you can Items add action items This section describes action items and the general procedures for add ing action items See Chapter 8 Using Archive Items for complete information on each type of item and how to set its available options About Action Items Action items may be added to the archive file to conditionally perform common func tions for which you might otherwise have to write external code The following are some of the functions Action items allow yo
115. the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note Dimensions are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Installer VISE for Windows Table 11 7 Combo Box Item Properties Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 16 Static Text Properties Static Text Properties Static Text Item Ed Alignment filet ti E T No prefix l Sunken M No wrap T Border Dimensions Left 51 Width 45 Top 81 Height a Cancel Illustration 11 18 Static Text Item Properties Window Property Description Type in the text you wish to be displayed in this static text item NOTE You can also enter a variable name here if you wish to dynamically display text Alignment Determines how text is aligned in the static text item The possible values are Left Center and Right Set this option to Left when No Wrap is selected No Prefix Prevents ampersands amp in the item s text from being interpreted as the mnemonic character Normally a string containing an ampersand 1s displayed with the ampersand removed and the next character in the string underlined The No Prefix style is most often used when file
116. the properties dialog for an item by double clicking on it or pressing the ENTER key Test Screen y Displays your custom screen as a dialog so you can test its actual appearance tab order and functional ity Table 11 2 Screen Editor File Menu Items You can use the Test Screen command to verify your new tab order _lolx File Edit Layout Align cal jej Untitled Dialog u your name and email below For Help press F1 Illustration 11 11 Setting Tab Order PA The tab order of the items in your screen also affects the way any overlap ping items in your custom screen are drawn Items are drawn from lowest to highest tab number so an item with a higher tab number will draw OVER the top of an item with a lower tab number Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 8 Layout Menu Layout Menu New Push Button Alt Shift B New Check Box Alt Shift C New Radio Button Alt Shift R New Combo Box Alt Shift M New Static Text Alt Shift S New Edit Text Alt S hift E New Group Box Alt Shift G New Picture Alt S hift P Illustration 11 12 Screen Editor Layout Menu Menu item Description New Button This command creates a standard push button con trol For complete description of Push Button prop erties see Button Properties on page 11 9 New Check Box This command creates a standard check box con trol For comp
117. to add a new shortcut to the list Add Delete Details nee Illustration 5 8 Shortcuts window Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Adding Shortcuts Installer VISE for Windows To add shortcuts 1 At the Adding Shortcuts window click on the Add button The Select File from Archive window appears Select File from Archive ES Select one of the files from the list below 3 Application 3 Samples 3 Database Samples 3 Spreadsheet Samples 3 Word Processing Samples 3 letter txt Illustration 5 9 Select File from Archive window 2 Select the file for which you want to add a shortcut and click on the OK button The Shortcut window appears with the selected file in the Shortcuts will be created on the Desktop for the following files area Shortcuts Shortcuts to files in your installation can be created on the Desktop They will only be created if the installer is run on a computer with Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 installed Shortcuts will be created on the Desktop for the following files Click Add to add a new shortcut to the list iL Name Shortcut to faxcover txt Target T argetDir S amplesW ord Processing Sa ey Delete Details lt Back Next gt Close Illustration 5 10 Shortcut window Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Adding Screens You want to delete a file or folder
118. to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 7 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the You can customize the installer s Registration Information Screen You can add a side bit Registration map with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels Information Screen The runtime variables UserName Organization and SerialNumber contain the values entered by your customers on this screen See Chapter 19 Using Runtime Vari ables for more information To customize the Registration Information Screen 1 Select Registration Information from the Screens menu The Registration Infor mation dialog box appears Registration Information Fa Show this dialog M Use default text Registration Setup is ready to install ZProductN ame Please type your name organization and serial number JV J amp User name IM amp Organization IM amp Serial Number Serial Number Verification None C Automatic Custom Set Clear Variable Click to assign Illustration 10 8 Registration Information dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Registrati
119. type a name in this field Table 10 13 Finished Message Options Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Finished Message 2 Screen 10 25 Params 1 through 3 Type the path name of the file you want to access 1f the checkbox 1s selected Finished text 2 Type the message to appear at the bottom of this screen This field defaults to Click Close to end the Setup Table 10 13 Finished Message Options 5 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Finished Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 6 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 7 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the You can customize an alternate Finished Screen fo
120. updated install Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items This chapter describes the different archive items that can be added to an installer Archive Item Overview Archive item Description Billboard a You can add a Billboard to your installer using the Billboard action 1tem See Billboard Action Item on page 8 5 Call External Code BS You can call external code at any point during the install by adding a Call External Code action to an archive 13 See Call External Code Action Item on page 8 7 Comment y Adds a new comment to the archive These com ments can be used as a reminder to later clarify the purpose of your archive See Comment Item on page 8 8 Copy a Copy actions can be used to copy files and folders on the customer s machine 14 See Copy Action Item on page 8 9 Delete a Delete actions can be used to delete files by name and location See Delete Action Item on page 8 10 DirectX Check a This action item checks for the presence or version of DirectX for Windows See DirectX Check Action Item on page 8 12 Table 8 1 Action item Overview Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Archive item Archive Item Overview Description Disk Prompt Bl This action item prompts the user for a disk that is not necessarily part of the insta
121. variable see Externally Setting Variables on page 19 8 Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables 19 10 Externally Setting TargetDir Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 20 20 1 Automating Installer VISE Automating Installer Builds Build Targets and Batch Build Batch Files Installer VISE for Windows This chapter describes ways to automate the processes of building and controlling Installer VISE installers The information is divided into two main topics 13 a Automating Installer Builds on page 20 1 13 E Automating Installers on page 20 2 You can automate the process of building installers by using combinations of the features listed below Build Targets allow you to set up different kinds of installs and easily switch between them when building While the default behavior is to build one Build Target at a time build automation can be achieved by using Installer VISE s Batch Build feature Batch Build enables multiple Build Targets to be built at once For details see 13 E Build Targets on page 15 5 13 a Batch Build on page 15 9 There are two command line switches that can be used with Installer VISE to update files in the archive and build your installer AE Function Line Switch u Causes Installer VISE to update a file in the specified archive Example InstVise exe F temp MyProduct VCT u
122. want to locate any more items with the same name Once you are finished with the search click on the Cancel button The Archive window appears Steps to Building an The following are the steps involved in building an installer Installer 1 ON AW a wD Creating an archive Adding files and folders Creating packages sub package and list packages Assigning items to packages and sub packages Adding action items Adding advanced items Adding installer screens Assigning external codes Setting file options 10 Setting folder options 11 Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Setting installer properties Installer VISE for Windows Archives 6 3 12 Generating archive reports 13 Testing an installer 14 Building an installer 15 Copying the installer to media Archives The first step to building an installer is to create an archive Archives allow you to manage and store the information used to build the installer Installer VISE allows you to easily create an archive and add the appropriate information Following is what can be done in an archive m Identify all the files that are part of the installation set m Set options for each file such as where the options should be installed Assign files to different installation packages m Set general preferences for displaying files Creating a New Archive To create a new archive 1 Launch Installer VISE 2 Select New from the File menu or press
123. you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 8 Customizing the License Agreement Screen onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 6 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 7 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the License You can add a customized License Agreement Screen to the installer This screen allows Agreement Screen your customers to read your License Agreement and continue with the install or cancel If the customer clicks the Yes button the installer continues 1f the customer clicks the No button the installer exits To customize the License Agreement Screen 1 Select License Agreement from the Screens menu The License Agreement dialog box appears Show this dialog M Use default text Software License Agreement Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the ms rest of the agreement A Do you accept all the term
124. 00 and Windows XP and different for other languages With this path you can add new items to the programs menu or remove items from it Items that are in the programs folder are displayed on the start menu If the Restart variable is set to 1 or TRUE the user will be prompted for a restart after a successful install With the Restart variable you can make runtime decisions about when to prompt the user for a restart Just set this variable to 1 or TRUE if you want to prompt the user to restart the computer The SerialNumber variable holds the serial number entered by the customer in the Registration Information installer screen See Customizing the Registration Information Screen on page 10 11 for more information Saving this information in the registry is a good example of how this variable can be used 13 See Registry Entry Action Item on page 8 58 for more information The Setup Type variable holds a value corresponding to what type of install the user selects at the Select Install Type installer screen The possible values and their meanings are as follows 0 Typical Setup 1 Compact Setup 2 Custom Setup For more information see Customizing the Select Install Type Screen on page 10 15 The SrcDir variable contains the path name on the source drive where the installer was launched For example A The SrcDrive variable contains the letter of the source drive where the installer wa
125. 10 16 19 5 Setup will add 10 20 Shadow Files check ordering of 13 8 Shortcut 5 6 6 21 8 4 adding 5 7 Show group window 6 37 Show select language dialog 18 5 Show Hide Progress 6 21 8 4 Silent Setup 6 7 to 6 8 Single File 15 5 Single File Installer 5 10 Single Language Installers 18 2 Size 8 36 Size to Content 11 22 Skip List 14 4 SkipList txt 14 4 Snapshot 14 1 Snapshot Wizard 14 1 Software License Agreement 10 9 text 10 9 Source Directories 3 9 editing 6 50 Source path 8 36 Splash Screen 3 11 6 23 104 Split Path 6 21 8 4 SrcDir 19 5 SrcDrive 19 5 JI K L MNO PQORST UVWXYZ Standard Layout 3 17 12 5 Standard Toolbar 3 6 Start color 8 6 10 2 Start Menu Folder 8 28 8 68 StartMenu 19 5 Startup 19 6 Startup Folder 8 28 8 68 Startup type 8 73 Static Text 11 8 Status bar 3 6 Stop 6 21 8 4 Store DirectX version number in this variable 8 13 Store files in archive 6 32 Store found item s full path name 8 34 Store return value in this variable 8 8 17 5 17 8 Store the result in this variable 8 47 Store the search result in this variable 8 34 Sub Packages 3 15 6 7 6 12 Suggest reboot after successful setup 6 32 Support Files 6 7 to 6 8 Supported Languages 18 2 SysDir 19 6 SysDrive 19 6 System Directory 8 27 8 67 System Requirements 6 38 System Service 6 21 8 4 8 72 System Service Action Item 8 72 System32 Directory 8 27 8 67 T Tab Order 11 7 Target file name 8 66 TargetDir 19 6 Ta
126. 2 13 El Before Property Page on page 9 12 19 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Creating a Program Item You can create a program item for a exe file that is on a CD ROM Following these steps of an Exe File on CD ROM ensures the correct icon is displayed for the Program Item even if the CD is not in the drive To create a program item 1 Create an ico file for your icon and add it to your VCT file 2 At the File Properties Advanced page select Windows Directory in the Install location popmenu 3 At the Program Item Properties Advanced page select the icon path WinDir filename ico in the Icon path field Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Quicktime Check Action Item 8 55 Quicktime Check Action You can add a QuickTime action to the archive using the QuickTime action item com item mand This action item allows you to check for the presence of a specific version of QuickTime for Windows on the customer s computer A common use of this action item is to search for the current version of the QuickTime dll For example if it fails you can launch Apple s QuickTime for Windows installer Other archive items can be tied to the result of this action and condi tionally processed based on the result To add a QuickTime Check action item 1 Select QuickTime Check from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dia log and select QuickTime Che
127. 3 CommonStartMenu 19 3 CommonStartUp 19 3 Desktop 19 3 Fonts 19 4 INetDataFilePath 19 4 Organization 10 11 ProductName 10 3 19 4 ProgramFilesDir 19 4 Programs 19 5 Restart 19 5 SerialNumber 10 11 19 5 SetupType 19 5 SrcDir 19 5 SrcDrive 19 5 StartMenu 19 5 StartUp 19 6 SysDir 19 6 SysDrive 19 6 TargetDir 19 6 TargetDirShort 19 6 TargetDrive 19 6 TempDir 19 6 TempDrive 19 6 UserName 10 11 VariableName See Variables declaration of 19 8 WinDir 19 6 WinDrive 19 7 Installer VISE for Windows amp Compact 10 17 amp Organization 10 12 amp Serial Number 10 12 amp Typical 10 16 amp User Name 10 12 A About Installer VISE 3 18 Access flags 8 74 Action if requirement is not met 6 39 6 41 to 6 42 Action Item Toolbar 3 6 Action Items adding 6 18 Billboard 6 18 8 1 Comment 6 18 8 1 Copy 6 18 8 1 Delete 6 18 8 1 DirectX Check 6 18 8 1 Disk Prompt 6 19 8 2 Display Screen 6 19 8 2 Download File 6 19 8 2 Edit AUTOEXEC BAT File 6 19 8 2 Edit CONFIG SYS 6 19 8 2 Edit Text File 6 19 8 2 External Code 6 18 8 1 Files 6 19 8 2 Find 6 19 8 2 Folder 6 19 8 2 Goto 6 19 8 2 Include VCT File 6 19 8 2 Ini File Entry 6 19 8 2 Input 6 19 8 2 Label 6 20 8 3 Location Prompt 6 20 8 3 Index 2 A B C DEFGuHiIJSIK LEM NN OPQReSsTUVWK Y Z Message 6 20 8 3 Move 6 20 8 3 Open Internet Address 6 20 8 3 Program Item 6 20 8 3 QuickTime Check 6 20 8 3 Reg
128. 7 4 User Name 7 6 Individual File 7 5 Using Installer Graphics 3 4 user s initial experience 7 7 user s subsequent experiences 7 9 Vv Web Properties 6 42 Validate Fields 11 11 Welcome Screen 3 11 5 8 6 23 Validate file paths when saving project 6 35 Wildcards l Value 8 43 8 59 and rename actions 8 62 Variable 6 21 8 4 8 15 8 43 to 8 44 8 59 11 12 to 11 13 19 nDir 19 6 8 Window state 8 67 field for Screens 10 4 to 10 5 10 7 to 10 9 10 11 10 13 Windows Directory 8 27 8 67 10 15 10 17 10 19 to 10 20 10 22 to 10 23 10 WInDrive 19 7 25 to 10 26 Working directory 8 54 8 67 Variable Manipulation 8 76 Write entries from a reg file 8 58 Variable Name 8 78 Write entry 8 42 8 58 Variable Substitution 11 24 Variables Y and case sensitivity 19 8 Yes I want to 10 26 declaration of 19 8 You can choose 10 17 Installer VISE for Windows Index 10 A B C DeEFGHitI JK LM N OP QRHeSsTUVWXK YZ Installer VISE for Windows
129. 8 7 Bottom Center Bottom Right m Stretch See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 19 m After Property Page on page 9 13 Call External Code You can call external code at any point during the install by adding a Call External Code Action Item action to an archive You can link other actions to the success or failure of this item as well as store the return value into a variable See Chapter 17 Using External Code for more information To add a Call External Code Action item 1 Select Call External Code from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Call External Code A Call External Code action item is added to the archive and the Call External Code Action Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Call External Code Action Properties General page appears Call External Code Action Properties 24x Prengeeesessscecessase External code dll file name Parameter 1 LONG 0 Parameter 2 LPSTR Store return value in this variable Click to assign Illustr
130. 9 HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE 8 59 HKEY_USERS 8 59 HTTP 7 6 HTTP 1 0 and active web installers 7 2 Icon index 6 37 8 54 8 57 8 66 Icon path 8 54 8 57 8 66 If target is older replace option 8 10 8 50 8 63 If target is older or the same replace option 8 10 8 50 8 63 Image file name 8 6 Image placement 10 2 Import Template 11 6 Import Translation File 18 4 Important Notes 10 6 10 23 Important Notes text 10 23 In Installer 8 30 8 39 Include VCT File 6 19 8 2 Include subfolders 8 33 Include uninstaller 6 36 Increment Variable 8 76 Individual File 7 5 8 30 8 39 INet Datafile Path 19 4 Ini File Entry 6 19 8 2 INI Files 14 3 Initial Directory 8 47 Initialization 6 38 17 4 Input 6 19 8 2 Insert Here 6 16 Insert text after search line 8 20 8 22 8 24 Insert text before search line 8 20 8 22 8 24 Install Directory 8 27 8 67 Install empty folders 6 32 Install Service 8 72 Installer Archive editing 5 10 Installer VISE for Windows Installer General Properties 6 31 Installer Language deleting 18 12 Installer Name 15 6 Installer Properties 3 8 Installer System Requirements 6 38 Installer VISE exiting 3 5 Installer VISE Tools 13 1 Internet Address 8 51 Internet Menu 3 17 Internet Site 7 6 Items 3 14 deleting from packages 6 17 duplicating 6 17 Items Report 6 43 J JPEG graphics 3 4 K Key 8 43 8 59 Key File Name 8 14 L Label 6 20 8 3 8 45 Language Properties 3 8 18 12 Languages 18 4 Launch 13 5
131. A OS 1 2 Getting Assistance from MindVision e bs spew oon 25 6 Sabo 6 eA SPR IS OLS OEE ARSE 1 3 NOS ih INAS AGC se AO ES AS AA eee aed EE A eta 1 5 CONnVEHUONS tasa te heey aoe wheres Ue Oe eee eee one id Sere se aes 1 6 Getting Started sii oa ee eer Se ee oe eee 2 1 O essed Boke 2 1 System Requirements serer taidi oka tae ata tints eee aaah see eR a ea 2 1 Installineo Installer VISE rara retar dianas Gael 2 1 Contents ofthe Installations dida deel ark Sew is daa dais 2 5 ELV AEE Metaller VISE A end een Seen aise anak adel ia oer a a e ene eee 2 6 Installer VISE Basics tte ees 3 1 Common Installer VISE Commands e wee en A AAA 3 1 Access ste MSE perrea nd ood pala ate ota ea Pe eh A A Oe eee 3 1 Opening an Exi une Archive cnt se cee Aa niri eae a ds 3 2 Changing the Name or Location of an Archive 0 ccc eee nee 3 3 Usan Dre and DOn ara dao nadia ais 3 4 sine Installer Graphic died enh eee A NE 3 4 Exts lis taller VISE ut did ane Plats 3 5 Parts Ob the Archive N Ndw aa a o oa Hanes 3 6 Installer ISE MEUS AAA A ee atte Me ate sake tica 3 7 A A A A OA 3 7 HS Ge INU Si atan een 3 9 Vien Meni aaa rada atlanta eat ad Sone aha ance aa ae ao 3 10 CCCI N A ond NOG es Perea res ce ee eee ae ie cts ne ster ewido cent etna ea 3 10 IOC A IR Awan ae rane 3 14 Arhive Meni rr aaa Dian asa 3 15 COSA ORAR iaa 3 16 Installer VISE for Windows Contents ii Hater ner Memi edi AAA A ain AA le ae re We a tg RRA 3 17 Layout
132. Adds existing files and folders to the archive See Files Archive Item on page 8 25 Find e E The Find action is used to determine 1f specific files or folders exist on the customer s machine If they do exist certain actions can be performed See Find Action Item on page 8 31 Folder Creates a new folder in the archive See Folder Archive Item on page 8 34 Goto This action item creates a jump to a selected Label item 13 See Goto Action Item on page 8 40 Include VCT File Include items from another VCT file into the cur rent VCT file at build time See Include VCT File Item on page 8 40 Ini File Entry Creates an Ini file entry that can be written read into a runtime variable or removed from the ini file See Ini File Entry on page 8 42 Input fal Input action items display a input box when the customer runs your installer See Input Box Action Item on page 8 43 Table 6 10 Archive Items Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 20 List of Archive Items Archive item Description This action item creates an insertion point for the Goto item See Label Action Item on page 8 45 Location Prompt This action can be used to display a dialog to the customer that lets him her choose a directory See Location Prompt Action Item on page 8 46 Message Message action items display a message box when th
133. Assigning customer code resources to be called before or after the file is installed m Evaluating the result of an action item and installing or not installing the file based on the result E Setting requirements that the customer s computer must meet for the file to be installed To set file options 1 At the Archive window select the file for which you want to set options 2 Select Properties from the Edit menu double click on the file or press the ALT and ENTER keys The File Properties window appears Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Setting Folder Options 6 29 3 At the File Properties window click on the General tab The File Properties Gen eral page appears File Properties fad Ea General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives B lo File s name W in95 WinNT Name File s name Win3 x Note the name from the field above will be used if left blank e Source path Where is the file located on your computer HAWINNT Profiles B ob DesktopiName E Size 0 50KB 515 bytes File version Modified Tuesday November 24 1998 7 26 36 AM Created Tuesday November 24 1998 7 26 35 AM Illustration 6 27 File Properties General tab 4 For a complete discussion of General and Advanced Properties for Files see Files Archive Item on page 8 25 5 See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remain ing File
134. Build Target xi General eSeller eSellerate Options IV Install eSellerate Engine Demo Purchase Dialog Text I Display Demo Purchase Dialog CryptoKey I Display Download Folder Activation ID Publisher ID sacking IDs eSelerRefum iste Preview Certificate Coupon ID E 2 A Dpening Title fa Opening Text Error URL Extra Data Cancel Help Illustration 15 14 Edit Build Target eSeller tab Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management Installer VISE for Windows Learning About eSellerate 15 9 The unique codes and IDs used in the eSeller tab are generated by the web based eSellerate Sales Manager Package Properties fed ES General Advanced System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments T List package List package description Purchase Shows Package y as No Effect Shows Package Hides Package Illustration 15 15 Package Properties Purchase popup menu At install time an Installer eSeller will show specific packages based on whether the user chooses to purchase the product or try a demo Learning About Complete information about the eSeller tab and the Purchase setting of Advanced Pack eSellerate age Properties is available in the eSellerate User s Guide You can find this documentation and the SDK at http www esellerate net downloads To learn more about eSellerate visit http www esellerate net Here you can set up a free evaluation account rea
135. Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law E Cancel Illustration 2 1 Welcome Window Most of the screens in the Setup application contain a Back and Cancel command button Click on the lt Back button to view a previous installation screen Click on the Cancel button to exit the program 4 Click on the Next gt button The Important Notes screen appears 2 Important Notes E xj WHAT S NEW Installer VISE 3 6 1 is a maintenance release that delivers improved performance for both the builder application and installers Notable enhancements and bug fixes in this release are as follows Bug 3050 When selecting a different Build Target the archive window was not refreshed to reflect any applicable Build Directive settings so the correct items were not dimmed until something else was done to force a window refresh Bug 7563 In certain circumstances an installer could crash when executing a System Service action item a Bug 7568 The 16 32 bit installer checkbox is now removed from I nstal le the General tab of Installer properties to correctly reflec
136. Close Illustration 5 5 Program Icons To add program icons 1 At the Program Icons window type the name of the Program Manager group or Start Menu sub menu in the Default group name field This field defaults to ProductNamed Using the Archive Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Adding Program Icons 5 5 2 Click on the Add button The Select File from Archive window appears Select File from Archive Fa Select one of the files from the list below Samples 3 Database Samples 3 Spreadsheet Samples 3 Endofmonth txt 3 Endofday txt J Endofyear txt a Word Processing Samples 3 letter txt J faxcover txt y Tr 3 Illustration 5 6 Select File from Archive window 3 Select the file for which you want to add an icon and click on the OK button The Program Icons window appears with the selected file in the Icons will be created for the following files area Program Icons Icons for files in your installation can be added to the Program Manager or Start Menu Type the name of the Program Manager group or Start Menu sub menu in the field below Default group name Product ame Icons will be created for the following files Click Add to add a new icon to the list 17 Name Endofmonth Target T argetDir S amples S preadsheet Samples Endofmo lt lt Delete Details lt Back Next gt Close Illustration 5 7 Progra
137. Command Function Source Directories Displays the Edit Source Directories dialog which allows you to edit the source path names for all folders files and update files in your VCT file See Editing Source Directories on page 6 50 for more information Find Searches for a specific item in the Archive window See 13 Searching For Items in the Archive Window on page 6 2 for more information Update Updates selected files and folders in the Archive Window See Updating An Archive on page 6 48 for more information Table 3 6 Edit Menu Commands Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 10 View Menu Command Function Extract Extracts selected files and folders in the Archive 13 Window See Extracting Files and Folders on page 6 6 for more information Delete Deletes selected files and folders in the Archive Window or the Package List See Deleting Items from Packages on page 6 17 for more information Duplicate Duplicates selected files and folders in the Archive Win dow or the Package List See Managing Package Items on page 6 17 for more information Properties Displays the Properties Window What is displayed in the window depends on what item is selected in the Archive window If a package is the current selection package properties are displayed If a file is the current selection file properties are displayed This window is a mode
138. DVAPI32 dll Location E WINNT S ystem3214DWAPI32 dl Module COMCTL32 dll Location E WINNT System32 COMCTL32 dll Module comdlg32 dil Location E WINNT System32 comdlg32 dll Module GD132 dll Location E WINNT System324GDI32 dll Module KERNEL32 dll Location E WINNT System32 KERNEL32 dll Module L232 dll Location E WINNT System324L232 dll Module ntdll dll Location E WINNT System32 ntall dll Module RPCAT 4 dll Location EYWINNTAS ystem32HRPCRTA dil Module SHELL32 dil Location E WINNT System32 SHELL32 dll Module SHLWAPI_dll Location E WINNT System32 SHLWAPI dll Module USER32 dll Location E WwINNT System32 USER 32 dll Module VERSION dll Location E WINNT System32 VERSION dll Module WINSPOOL DRY Location E WwINNT System32 wINSPOOL DRY Properties Cancel OK Illustration 13 13 Dependency Walker With DLL Listing A list of DLL dependencies will be displayed 4 Check the box next to each file you want added to your installer Items marked with an asterisk are core operating system components and should be added at your own risk 5 Click the Properties button to display the Explorer s property dialog for the cur rently selected file 6 Click OK to add the checked files to your installer The Verify Archive command can be used to verify the compressed file data stored in the current VCT file Chapter 13 Insta
139. Deluxe Install OR the Deluxe Fonts build directive is active File Properties EE Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Before After Alo Build Directives Check All Uncheck All Debug Build Basic Install Deluxe Install Deluxe Fonts Illustration 15 6 Any Match Build Directive Example 6 Open the Build Directive window and check the build directives which should be active 7 Close the Build Directive window 8 Build the installer Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management Installer VISE for Windows Build Targets 15 5 Build Ta rgets Build Targets allow you to set up different kinds of installs and to easily switch between them when building Build Targets also allow the build process to be automated Edit Build Target x General eSeller Name Debug Single file to QA Target Single File Segment size Installer File Name ju pp25 etupl Illustration 15 7 Build Target Setup Items which can be controlled by Build Targets include Name E Name the name of the Target displayed from the Target popmenu in the Archive window Target m Target items selected from the Target popmenu control what happens when you select Build Installer from the File menu Target Explanation Ask At Build At build the standard build dialog will be displayed where save location segment name debug status and postprocessing can be determined Ask at Buil
140. Dir on page 19 6 13 a WinDrive on page 19 7 The Browser variable contains the path name of the default web browser on the target machine For example C Program Files Plus Microsoft Internet Iexplore exe If the target machine does not have a default browser it is blank The CDROMDrive variable contains the drive letter of the first CD ROM drive found on the target system For example D If there is not a CD ROM drive found this variable will be set to With this drive letter you can search for files on a CD ROM and copy files from a CD ROM to another location The CommonDesktop variable contains the path name of the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP desktop for all users For example C Winnt40 Pro files All Usersi Desktop This is only valid when the installer is running on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable will be blank 1f the installer is run on a system other than Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP The CommonFilesDir variable contains the path name of the Common Files folder as read from the registry entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Current Version CommonFilesDir For example C Program Files Common Files Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables Installer VISE for Windows CommonPrograms CommonPrograms CommonStartMenu CommonStartUp DefProgramFolder Desktop Installer VISE for Windows
141. E for Windows Display Screen Action Item 8 15 Function Default path The path that appears in the disk prompt wndow when the disk prompt window first appears You can design your installer to start with AX B or any path name The default path name is not restricted to drive letters Your user can change path name to different path if the default path is not point to the correct location Variable You can store the path name of the directory that the user selects and the installer accepts This variable can be used to tell the installer where to find files to install Table 8 5 Disk Prompt Fields See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 E System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 A Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Display Screen Action You can add a Display Screen action to the archive using the Display Screen action item item command This action item allows you to display a custom or standard screen at any point during an install It can be used in place of the Screens menu options when you require greater control over screen display order
142. E for Windows Chapter 10 Using installer Screens 10 20 Customizing the Ready To Install Message Screen 4 Make entries in the following fields Select Program Folder Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Select Program Folder Screen This field defaults to Select Program Folder Setup will add This field defaults to the following Setup will add pro gram icons to the Program Folder listed below You can type a new folder name or select one from the Existing Folders list Click Next to continue Edit the text if nec essary Program Folder This field defaults to ProductName See Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables for more information Table 10 10 Select Program Folder Options 5 Click on the Show skip button checkbox to show the Skip button on the Select Program Folder Screen 6 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Select Program Folder Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 7 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the
143. Edit Layout Align ca eS le al ae abla 5 01 Untitled Dialog For Help press F1 344 grt 259 177 7 Illustration 11 8 Screen Editor In this Screen Editor you can create very powerful screens that can display text and pic tures and also display buttons checkboxes radio buttons combo boxes and edit text fields from which you can obtain user input You can store the user s input into variables and also perform conditional actions based on the results of the user s actions You can even save a custom screen you create as a template so that you can later use that same screen in other installers or to provide a consistent look if you are creating multiple cus tom screens There are four areas in the screen editor m Menubar m Toolbar m Edit area m Status bar Menu and Toolbar All commands can either be selected from the menubar or by clicking on the correspond Commands ing toolbar button A description is given below for each command Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 6 Import Template Ctrl O Export Template Ctrl E Close Alt F4 Illustration 11 9 Screen Editor File Menu Description Opens a custom screen that you have previously saved as a template Saves the currently displayed custom screen as a template file that you can later use in another installer or if you are creating multiple custom screens and want to start with the same basic screen
144. Folder Ready To Install Message Read Me Message 2 Finished Message Finished Message 2 aa Illustration 18 5 MindVision Language Translator window The left hand side of the window displays all the folders and files in the installer Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages 18 8 Importing the Translation File into the Installer 3 Select a file to translate The MindVision Language Translator window appears sim ilar to the following Spanish dat MindYision Language Translator File Edit Help License Agreement Verify Password Source language string Registration Information Samples Select Install Directory Se Select Install Type Select Components Scree Select Program Folder Ready To Install Message SK Read Me Message 2 Finished Message Finished Message 2 Packages Archive Items Scripts Ink S Target language string Samples 123 bmp Scriptl re Illustration 18 6 Language Translator with file selected to translate Text appears in the Source language string field in the default language in which it was created in Installer VISE 4 Type the text from the Source language string field in the Target language string field in the language you are translating to The information from the Source language string field appears for you to modify 1f it was selected by the person
145. If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 7 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears You can customize the installer s Finished Message Screen You can add a side bitmap with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels There are three possible check boxes that can be displayed to your customers Each one that you have checked in this dialog is displayed to the customer at install time The text for each text box can be edited in the language file so these strings can be localized for other languages Each one of these options can launch another applications and pass parameters to that application A good example of how to use this feature is an option that displays a Read Me file to the customer if the checkbox is selected To set this up in the dialog select a checkbox type the name of the application you want to launch in the appropriate File name field for example type WinDir notepad exe type the path name of your Read Me file in the Params field for example type TargetDir Readme txt If the customer selects this checkbox the Notepad is launched and your Read Me file is displayed to the customer as the installer exits Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 24 Customizing the Finished
146. Include VCT File Include items from another VCT file into the cur rent VCT file at build time See Include VCT File Item on page 8 40 Ini File Entry Creates an Ini file entry that can be written read into a runtime variable or removed from the ini file See Ini File Entry on page 8 42 Input Chapter 8 Using Archive Items fal Input action items display a input box when the customer runs your installer See Input Box Action Item on page 8 43 Table 8 1 Action item Overview Installer VISE for Windows Archive Item Overview 8 3 Archive item Description This action item creates an insertion point for the Goto item See Label Action Item on page 8 45 Location Prompt This action can be used to display a dialog to the customer that lets him her choose a directory See Location Prompt Action Item on page 8 46 Message Message action items display a message box when the customer runs your installer 13 See essage Box Action Item on page 8 47 Move action items can be used to move files and folders to different locations on the customer s machine See Move Action Item on page 8 49 Open Internet This action item can be used to open World Wide Address Web pages on the customer s computer 19 See Open Internet Address Action Item on page 8 51 Program Item Creates or removes a program item or program group
147. LOG pagefile sys lt DIRECTORIES gt lt Don t display changes in the following directories and their gt lt sub directories wherever they may exist gt system32 Recent Temporary Internet Files lt REGISTRY gt lt Don t display changes in the following registry keys or values gt Software Microsoft Windows Current ersion Explorer Software Microsoft Windows Current ersion NotificationMgr Software Microsoft Windows Shared Tools Find Fast HARDWARE DESCRIPTION System CentralProcessor SYSTEM Select SYSTEM ControlSet SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Uninstall Illustration 14 4 Sample SkipList txt You can display and edit this text file by clicking on the Edit Skip List button You need to be careful in editing these entries that you understand their correct format There are three basic areas in this file lt FILES gt lt DIRECTORIES gt and lt REGIS TRY gt Under each area the entries are entered as partial pathnames For example we wouldn t want to include changes to the Temporary Internet Files directory The full pathname may be C WinNT Temporary Internet Files on this particular machine but on another user s machine it might be D Windows Temporary Inter net Files Therefore we only enter the partial pathname that we know will be the same on every user s machine Remember the entries in the SkipList txt file are still tracked during the snapshot scanning just not included or displayed by default
148. Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Function Desktop Folder This option will install the item on the user s desktop Start Menu Folder This option will install the item in the user s start menu folder The item will be displayed on the user s start menu Programs Folder This option will install the item in the programs folder which is displayed as a sub menu on the user s start menu Startup Folder This option will install the item in the startup folder which 1s displayed on the user s start menu under the programs sub menu Items that are in this folder are processed as Windows starts up Fonts Folder This option will install the item in the fonts folder Common Desktop Folder This option will install the item on the desktop that is common to all users Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Common Start Menu This option will install the item in the start menu folder Folder that is common to all users The item will be displayed on all users start menus Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Table 8 22 Folder Install Locations for WinNT and 95 98 only Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 38 Setting Folder Advanced Properties Function Common Programs This option will install the 1tem in the programs folder Folder which is displayed as a sub menu on all users start
149. MinadVision Installer VISE User s Guide Designed for 00 A Be EPT Microsoft Windows NT Windows 95 User Guide MindVision Installer VISE for Windows release 3 6 1 MindVision Software 2000 2012 DR MyCommerce Inc All rights reserved This manual as well as the software described in it is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not in and of itself be con strued as a commitment by DR MyCommerce Inc DR MyCommerce Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this book The copyrighted software that accompanies this manual is licensed for use by the Licensee only in strict accordance with the Soft ware License Agreement which the Licensee should read carefully before commencing use of the soft ware Except as permitted by such license no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of DR MyCommerce Inc Contents i Contents Introduction art es a ae ea ees 1 1 ANS ol a PEE a A E ee Oe ee EE 1 1 staller VISE OVEN e V nat crt eua A Heed Cheha wR OT ea ew ee ea 1 1 Tris taller VISE TF eaire e A IT AAA AA
150. MindVision Getting Assistance from MindVision Preparing to Contact Us Installer VISE for Windows Complete customizable uninstaller Include an installer log file listing the events of the installation Custom editing of installer screens and messages displayed during the installa tion Display a splash screen read me file and a license agreement during the installa tion If the end user declines the agreement the install does not proceed Built in translation support for exporting strings for localization and then importing the localized strings back into Installer VISE Automatically create a single multi lingual installer uninstaller executable for international software distribution CD ROM support including the ability to store files compressed or uncom pressed on the CD ROM and to store a catalog of files in the archive instead of compressed versions of the files themselves Automatically compress build and segment the installer executable for multiple floppy disk distribution Automatically create an installer for CD ROM diskette Internet or network server distribution Create installers containing update files built with Updater VISE for Windows for distributing software updates to end users Create a professional looking installer that includes a wizard interface for easy installation by the end user Automatically update the source files of your distribution set for your next release using Update Arch
151. MyApp exe D MyProduct Builder Release MyApp exe b Causes Installer VISE to build an installer from the specified archive and save it at a specified location This command line switch can specify the Build Target for the installer Example InstVise exe F temp file vct b F temp setup exe target Table 20 1 Command line switches for building installers Chapter 20 Automating Installer VISE 20 2 Automating Installers Through a command available in its File menu Installer VISE can generate a batch file for you that updates specific files and builds an installer at the location you specify You can use this file in conjunction with other batch files to automate your build process For details see Generating a Batch File on page 6 46 Automating Installer VISE installers can be controlled through the following command line switches Installers which for convenience and automation purposes will typically be used in batch files Command Line Switch Function S Causes the installer to silently process any items in its Silent Setup package The purpose is to provide an install that can be used with a batch file no customer intervention is required and no dialogs are displayed Example setup exe s See Creating Packages Sub Packages and List Packages on page 6 7 t Causes the installer to use the specified path as the default target directory Example setup exe t C Program Files My Application
152. MyProd uct Setup exe builds the installer F temp MyProduct Setup exe from the archive F temp MyProduct VCT u Update File Causes Installer VISE to update a file in the specified archive For example InstVise exe F temp MyProduct VCT u MyApp exe D MyProduct Builder Release MyApp exe updates the file MyApp exe in the archive file F temp MyProduct VCT using the file D MyProduct Builder Release MyApp exe as the source Installer VISE can generate a batch file for you that updates specific files and builds an installer at the location you specify You can use this file in combination with other batch files to automate your build process To generate a batch file 1 Select the file s and or folder s you want to update 2 Select Create Batch File from the File menu The Create Batch File dialog box appears Create Batch File I Update selected files M Build installer Cancel Illustration 6 40 Create Batch File dialog 3 Select from the following options by clicking on the appropriate checkboxes Function Update selected files Updates selected files Build installer Builds an installer Table 6 24 Create Batch File options 4 Click on the OK button The Save Installer As dialog box appears 5 Select the location where you want to save the installer and click the Save button The Save Batch File As dialog box appears 6 Select where you want to save t
153. R 6 38 Parameter 2 LPSTR 8 8 17 5 17 8 Params 8 64 Password 7 6 10 10 Password to check for 10 10 Path Name 8 59 Picture 11 8 Please Read the following 10 9 Pre Screens Items 6 7 to 6 8 Product Name 5 1 to 5 2 13 2 19 4 Program Folder 8 28 8 68 10 20 Program group name 6 37 Program Icons 5 4 adding 5 4 Program Item 6 20 8 3 Program item icon path 6 37 Program item name 6 37 Program will be installed with minimum 10 17 Program will be installed with most 10 16 ProgramFilesDir 19 4 Programs 19 5 Progress dialog placement options 10 3 Prompt 8 34 Properties 3 10 13 6 Purchase Has No Effect 6 15 Hides Package 6 15 Shows Package 6 15 Purchase Installer VISE 13 9 Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate 3 16 13 1 Q QuickTime 6 41 QuickTime 3 0 or newer uninstalling 8 56 QuickTime Check 6 20 8 3 R Radio Button 11 8 properties 11 12 Range start 10 13 Read entry 8 42 8 58 Read Me Message 3 11 3 13 6 23 to 6 24 10 6 Ready to Install 10 21 Ready To Install Message 3 13 5 8 6 24 Ready To Install Message Screen 10 20 Ready to Install text 10 21 Rearranging packages 6 16 Rebuild All 15 10 Rebuild the Project 13 2 RecentFiles 3 9 REG_BINARY 8 59 REG_DWORD 8 59 REG_EXPAND_ SZ 8 59 REG_MULTI_SZ 8 59 Installer VISE for Windows Index 7 A B C DEFGuHiiI JIK L_M N OO PQO RST UVWXYZ REG_SZ 8 59 Register File Type 6 20 8 3 Registration 10 12 Registration Form 3 18 Registration Information 3 12 6 23
154. RUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 6 Customizing the Read Me Message 8 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the Read You can add a customized Read Me Message to the installer s Read Me Screen You can Me Message use this screen to display any additional information to your customers For example you might want to add any important notes about your program in this dialog You can add a side bitmap with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels To customize the Read Me Message Screen 1 Select Read Me Message from the Screens menu The Read Me Message dialog box appears Read Me Message Fa F Show this dialog M Use default text Important Notes Set Clear Variable Click to assign E Cancel Help Illustration 10 4 Read Me Message dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Read Me Message window to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue
155. Search for line containing this text field must match the search text to be suc cessful 7 Ifyou selected any of the options in the Action field except Delete search line or Make backup of the file type the text that is going to be added to the file in the Text to add append field If you have chosen Append text to search line in the Action field this text is appended to the end of the search line Otherwise this text is on a line by itself in the specified position Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Files Archive Item See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Property pages Files Archive Item 13 System Property Page on page 9 4 13 Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 After Property Page on page 9 13 item allows you to add existing files and folders to the archive To add a Files archive item You can add a Files archive item to the archive using the Files archive item command This 1 Select Files from the Archive Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Files A file prompt window appears Add Fies amp 3 File and folder names Folders OK Dan C Multimedia Files Cancel 3 Program Files E ATI C RECYCLER E Multimedia Files TEMP E Program Files C WINNT E7
156. See Program Items on page 8 52 QuickTime Check This action item allows you to check for the presence of QuickTime for Windows on the customer s computer See Quicktime Check Action Item on page 8 55 Register File Type This action item can be used to register file types for Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP and to create file associations for Windows 3 1 13 See Register File Type Action Item on page 8 56 Registry Entry Creates a registry entry that can be written read into a runtime variable or removed from the regis try See Registry Entry Action Item on page 8 58 Rename Rename actions can be used to rename files on the customer s machine See Rename Action Item on page 8 62 Run Application This action item can be used to launch other applications or execute batch files See Run Application Action Item on page 8 64 Table 8 1 Action item Overview Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Creating Archive Items Creating Archive Items Archive item Description Shortcut El Creates a shortcut to the installer on the customers system when the installer is run on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 See Shortcuts Action Item on page 8 65 Show Hide Progress 5 Shows or hides the progress dialog See Show Hide Progress Action Item on page 8 68 Sp
157. System Services A System Services action item is added to the archive and the System Services Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The System Services Item Properties General page appears System Service Properties 21 x preageeeeessesesensasen General Advanced Advanced2 Packages System Languages Actions Build_4 gt install service y Tl Don t add to uninstaller log Service interacts with the desktop Service name PO Get service state Star y Check service state Installed Display name PO Binary path name FO E Startup type Automatic Service type Service that runs in it s own process v Illustration 8 52 System Services Item Properties General page Function Action popmenu Enables you to set the action for this System Service action item The action options are Install Service Remove Service Set Service State Check Service State Don t add to uninstaller Click on the Don t add to uninstaller log checkbox 1f log you do not want to add this file to the uninstaller log Service interacts with the Enables a Win32 based service process to interact with desktop the desktop Service name Name of the actual service This is the services name not necessarily the name displayed in the Services control panel May be a runtime variable Set service state Allows the user to determine how the service is started This feature modifies
158. TEMP L pagefile sys E WINNT Drives d NT Network Items to add Add Add All Remove Remove All Illustration 8 18 Add Files Prompt 2 Select the file s and or folder s you wish to add to the archive and click the OK button The items are added to the archive Setting File Item Properties To set file item properties File Properties window for that file item l Installer VISE for Windows grazcenenscneracanezos File s name W in95 amp newer Test pp dl File s name W in3 x Note the name from the field above will be used if left blank Source path Where is the file located on your computer D Program Files T estpp T est4pp dll BI Size 28 00KB 28 672 bytes File version Comp Size n a Modified Friday July 06 2001 11 17 18 AM Created Thursday May 30 2002 11 22 52 AM Illustration 8 19 File Properties 1 Ifa file item was added double clicking it in the archive window will display the Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 26 Setting File Item Properties 2 Make the following entries Function File s name Win95 8 Name the file will be given when it is installed on newer Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP Typically a long file name File s name Win3 x Name the file will be given when it is installed on Windows 3 x Typically a short file name If this field 1s blank the name from the above field will be used
159. Time for Windows stand alone installer is available for downloading from the Apple web site Table 8 33 QuickTime Check General Properties Uninstalling Quicktime 3 0 or newer does not remove Quicktime func wating tionality Many applications access Quicktime s functionality through various dlls most notably Quicktime qts Installer VISE uses this dll to O determine 1f Quicktime 3 0 or newer has been installed on the user s hard drive This dll and many other Quicktime dlls are not removed during the uninstall process The uninstall process removes the Quicktime movie player and the program items created during the Quicktime install If you need access to the Quicktime player you will need to supplement the Quicktime check with a Find action for MoviePlayer exe See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Register File Type Action You can add a Register File Type action to the archive using the Register File Type action item item command This action item can be used to regist
160. Type Chapter 2 Getting Started Installer VISE for Windows Contents of the Installation 2 5 9 The next step is to select the Program folder for this install J1 Select Program Folder xi Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the Existing Folders list Click Next to continue Skip This gt Logitech Mouseware Macromedia Dreamweaver 3 y lt Back Cancel Illustration 2 6 Select Program Folder When you are finished click on the Next gt button The Setup dialog box appears displaying the progress of the installation 10 Once the setup process is completed the Finished screen appears Jd Finished xi Setup is complete and Installer VISE 3 6 1 is now installed V Launch Installer VISE 3 6 1 Illustration 2 7 Finished The setup is complete and Installer VISE is installed 11 By default the Setup program will launch Installer VISE when you click on the Close button To prevent this uncheck the box next to Launch Installer VISE 3 6 before you click Close Contents of the Once the installation is complete the Installer VISE items that were installed appear as Installation icons in the program folder you selected similar to the following Following are the items that are installed m Installer VISE This application allows you to build installers m Installer VISE Manual An on line user manual for the I
161. Windows 2000 or Windows XP This value is stored in the runtime variable TargetDir See Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables for more information You can also click on the button to access the Choose Direc tory dialog box Table 10 7 Select Install Directory Options 5 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Select Install Directory Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 6 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 7 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears You can customize the installer s Select Install Type Screen You can add a side bitmap with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels These options correspond to the Typical Compact and Custom setup packages This screen in the installer al
162. Windows System directory System32 Directory Installs the file to the Windows System directory If the installer is running on Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP the item is installed to the Windows System32 directory Temp Directory Installs the file to a temporary directory maintained by Installer VISE This temporary directory and all the items in 1t are deleted when the installer exits Table 8 13 Install Location Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 28 Setting File Item Advanced Properties Function Ask User Prompts the user to identify a location where the file should be installed Find Result Installs the item at the resulting path of an earlier find action item If a file was found matching the search criteria the file s parent becomes the install location If a folder was found matching the search criteria its path name becomes the install location If the find result failed the item is not installed Other Lets you select any location where the file is to be installed You can use variables here If the folder does not exist it is created Table 8 13 Install Location Options The following install locations are only valid when the installer is running on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Function Desktop Installs the file on the customer s desktop Start Menu Folder Installs the file im the customer
163. Windows XP desktop folder For example CAWin95A Desktop This is only valid when the installer is running on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable 1s blank 1f the installer is run on Windows 3 1 or Windows NT 3 5 Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables 19 4 Fonts This variable allows you to use the correct location of the customer s desktop folder which might be different for different customers running the same system different for Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP and dif ferent for other languages With this path you can move items onto the desktop or delete items from it Fonts The Fonts variable contains the path name of the fonts folder for Windows 9 x Win dows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP For example C Win95 Fonts This is only valid when the installer is running on Windows 9 x Win dows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable 1s blank if the installer is run on Windows 3 1 or Windows NT 3 5 This variable allows you to use the correct location of the fonts folder that might be dif ferent for different customers running the same system different for Windows 9 x Win dows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP and different for other languages With this path you can add fonts to the system or delete them from it INetDataFilePath If doing an Active Web Install the InetDataFi
164. abel item See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 El Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Include VCT File Item You can add an Include VCT command to an archive using the Include VCT item com mand You can use this item to include items in another VCT file into the current VCT file at build time Installer Properties Screen menu settings and packages will not be car ried over Only items that are listed as part of the Support Files package or the Typical Setup package will be included Items that are part of the Typical Setup package in the included VCT file will inherit the package flags of the Include VCT File item in the mas ter VCT file Items that are part of the Support Files package will be included in the Sup port Files package If the external VCT file contains localization information for the included item it will be carried over The VCT file can be nested more than one level deep Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Include VCT File Item To add an Include VCT item 1 At the Archiv
165. ackages which are packages that are components of a larger package also known as hierarchical packages If customers choose to install a package that contains sub packages they can select any of the sub packages associated with it m Create list packages which contain several files from which the customer can select as many individual files as desired m Set system requirements for packages to determine whether they are displayed to the customer as part of the installation m Specify which packages are available for install after a successful online transac tion This option applies when you build your installer to integrate with the eSell Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Types of Packages Packages Included with Installer VISE Custom Packages Types of Packages 13 erate e commerce system an optional service See eSeller tab on page 15 8 for more information Each package in the archive must contain files You can run Archive reports prior to building an installer to see which files are assigned to a package or which packages do not 13 contain any files See Generating Archive Reports on page 6 43 for more information There are two types of packages the packages that are included with Installer VISE and custom packages The packages that are included with Installer VISE perform different functions This sec tion describes the packages that are included in an archive and how they function when a cu
166. ackground Window 3 11 6 23 10 2 Batch Build 3 8 15 9 Batch File creating 6 46 Before Install 6 38 17 4 Behavior 11 10 Billboard 6 18 8 1 bitmap placement 8 6 Billboards automated 6 24 Binary path name 8 73 BMP graphics 34 Browse for file 11 10 Browse for folder 11 10 Browser 19 2 Build 3 6 Build Automation 15 9 Build Destination Target ask at build 15 5 CD installer 15 5 disk images 15 5 folders 15 5 single file 15 5 web installers 15 5 Build Directives AND condition 15 4 and packages compared 15 1 defined 15 1 15 5 OR condition 15 4 Build Directives Property page 9 11 Build Installer 3 8 5 10 6 46 batch file 6 47 Build Source 15 9 Build Target active 3 6 changing active 3 6 Build Targets 7 2 15 5 to 15 6 Installer VISE for Windows A B C D EFGHI Build Toolbar 3 6 Building 5 9 Building an Installer steps 6 2 Button 11 8 properties 11 9 C C amp ustom 10 17 Cancel button cancels entire install 8 44 Caption 8 14 8 44 8 47 Case sensitive search 6 50 Case Sensitivity and variables 19 8 CD Installer Build Destination Target 15 5 CD ROM 6 48 CDROM Install 6 32 CDROMDrive 19 2 Check Box 11 8 properties 11 11 Check Service State 8 72 Check service state 8 73 Choose Destination Location 10 14 Choose Destination Location text 10 14 Click the type 10 16 Close button 3 7 Combo Box 11 8 properties 11 14 Command line switches builder b 20 1 u 20 1 Command line switches installers 20 2 n 20
167. age 11 22 Setting Properties for an To set the properties for an item select the item and then double click on it with the left Item mouse button Note that if you have multiple items selected only the property dialog for the first item will appear Status Bar The status bar displays the selected item s current coordinates and dimensions 0 x Menu bar Eile Edit Layout Align Ox EE Toolbar l gt Bal Co Y Enter your name and e mail below Selected Item Name E mail Cancel Continue Status bar For Help press F1 Item Coordinates ltem Dimensions Illustration 11 25 Screen Editor Components Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 24 Dialog Units Variable Substitution Chapter 11 Custom Screens Dialog Units Dimensions are displayed in Dialog Units DLUs instead of screen pixel coordinates A DLU is based on the size of the dialog font normally 8 point MS Sans Serif A horizontal DLU is the average width of the font divided by four A vertical DLU 1s the average height of the font divided by eight It is necessary to use DLUs for dimensions so that custom screens and their contents will properly resize depending on the system font You may notice that items shift occasionally as you edit them This is normal because pixels do not always translate to an exact dialog unit Normally you will simply enter the data you wish to display for each item as
168. ages Adds a new sub package to the archive See Creating Packages Sub Packages and List Packages on page 6 7 for more information Table 3 8 Add Menu Commands Archive Menu Build Directives Build Targets Billboards Variables Illustration 3 11 Archive Menu The Archive menu allows you to manage the following Installer VISE functions items Command Function Build Directives Displays the Build Directives window Build Directives allow you to conditionally include or exclude items folders files and action items from your installer at build time See Build Directives on page 15 1 for more information Build Targets Displays the Build Targets window You can use Build Targets to set up different kinds of installs and easily switch between them when building See Build Targets on page 15 5 Billboards Displays the Billboards window You can use this function to manage automated billboards that will display in sequence during an install See Adding Automated Billboards on page 6 24 Variables Displays the Variables window This function allows you to manage runtime variables placeholders that are filled with values when the installer is run on the 13 customers computer See Declaring a Variable and Setting Initial Value on page 19 7 Table 3 9 Archive Menu Commands Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 16
169. ailable in this chapter m System requirements for Installer VISE Installation instructions for Installer VISE Contents of the installation m Registering Installer VISE Certain system requirements must be met for you to build an installer on your system and for your customers to use your installer System requirements for building an installer m Minimum of 386 processor m Minimum of 8 MB of RAM m Windows 95 98 Me or Windows NT 3 5 and newer including Windows 2000 and Windows XP System requirements for using an installer m Minimum of 386 processor Minimum of 4 MB of RAM Installer VISE is easily installed by running the Setup program You only need to run the Setup program once However the Setup program can be run as many times as necessary Chapter 2 Getting Started Chapter 2 Getting Started Installing Installer VISE SSS ee eS AAA It is recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running the Setup program To begin the installation we are assuming it is being installed from the Installer VISE CD 1 Run Windows and insert the Installer VISE CD into the CD ROM drive 2 Double click on the Installer VISE Setup icon 3 The Welcome window appears J1 Welcome x Welcome to the Installer VISE 3 6 1 Setup program This program will install Installer VISE 3 6 1 on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click
170. ake the following entries Caption Type a caption for the message box For example type ProductName Setup You can also use variables in this field Message Type the message you want to display to the user For example type Do you want to install Quicktime for Windows You can also use variables in this field Table 8 30 Message Box Action General Fields 4 Select one of the following from the Button popmenu which represents the Button you want to appear on the message box m OK m OK Cancel m Yes No 5 Select one of the following from the Icon popmenu which represents the icon that you want to display in the message box m None Information m Stop m Exclamation m Question Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Move Action Item 8 49 See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 E After Property Page on page 9 13 Move Action Item You can add a Move action to the archive using the Move action item command Move action items can be used to move files and folders to different l
171. al page Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows DirectX Check Action Item Version popmenu Function This feature allows you to search for all or some of the versions of DirectX You can search for any version of DirectX by selecting Is any version of DirectX installed You can also search for a specific version of DirectX by selecting Is DirectX version 1 or better installed Is DirectX version 2 or better installed and so on up to DirectX version 8 1 Store DirectX version number in this variable Allows you to store the value returned by this function in a variable If this check returns 0 DirectX is not installed 4 1 0 x DirectX version 1 is installed 4 2 0 x DirectX version 2 1s installed 4 3 0 x DirectX version 3 1s installed 4 5 0 x DirectX version 5 is installed 4 6 0 x DirectX version 6 is installed 4 6 2 x DirectX version 6 1 is installed 4 7 0 x DirectX version 7 1s installed 4 8 0 x DirectX version 8 is installed 4 8 1 x DirectX version 8 1 is installed 4 9 0 x DirectX version 9 0 is installed Install DirectX if current version not found If checked the installer will use the path in the Path to DirectX setup files field and call the Windows API routine DirectXSetup Path to DirectX setup files Path to Microsoft DirectX Setup files that will be used if Install DirectX if current version not found is checked and the current version of DirectX is not found Thes
172. ame W in3 x Note the name from the field above will be used if left blank Source path Where is the folder located on your computer Size D 00KB 0 bytes Contains O Files 0 Folders Illustration 6 28 Folder Properties General page 4 For a complete discussion of General and Advanced Properties for Folders see Folder Archive Item on page 8 34 5 See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remain ing File Properties pages 19 E System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 E After Property Page on page 9 13 Setting Installer The final step before testing or building the installer is to add installer properties Installer P prop Properties VISE allows you to set a wide range of options related to the general behavior of the installer Following are some of the installer properties that you can set m Allow a CD ROM install m Generate a log file m Attaching a custom icon to the installer m Include an uninstaller m Attach external code to the general installer instead of to a package Assign minimum requirements for installation WU Installer Properties are specific to Build Targets Any changes you make to Installer Properties will remain associated with the current Build Target the Y a one selected in the upper left
173. an AA AA 8 56 Renty Entry ACHO ent nera as faa ae woe a ee ae ae ias 8 58 Rename ACHOn temic id oe ecg ea dyna oh eae Ra ee Boo Ona ae Gee Aa 8 62 Rim Application Action Mem iso ral ds da ee 8 64 SHOCCUtS ACtION tein ut dd a inden a ds de tad a ota 4 GA 8 65 Setting Shortcut General Properties iia oe ght de Aes Kare ah ONS Saws Sa Tae 8 65 Setting shortcut Advanced Properties aria Aa is 8 66 Show Hide Progress Action tt loas Ce one ee Coe Nee ede ee 8 68 Split Tati Action Item 604 40 acd and ove eee a a ge ew eo ard ed aap da ae 8 69 SOD ACION Celt an o eee WS taba he ie 8 70 System Services Action tem esmena aaan A Raw eee eG ad ae Aa 8 72 Tae ei tc faye tee ete Aid dah Gb ee ee ee a Ed oe eo el Ok da 8 75 Variable Hem rs ideas hah Meta Ned Aid Sak eae 8 75 Setting Common Properties 9 1 Advanced Open ade rd cia ria a io rin da dia ae 9 1 Selecting Modified Date as Search Criteria sl AA AAA AA 9 2 Selecting Created Date as Search Criteria scsi pai DD iaa BS 9 3 Selecting Version Number as Search Criteria 0 eee 9 3 Pa AS POM PAES ota cect to lr ore he ate e ane Becca each i eek ea arate 9 4 System Opery Page Aa alae RAE oe eee 9 4 Setting Platform Requirements caros bid dra de dada 9 5 Setting Audio Requintos drid de ee 9 6 Setting Resoltition Requirements td si a a 9 6 Setting Color Requirements A A AS Rede Sa 9 6 Settine Memory Requirements 4 4 244 055 des dobra train dado gia 9 6 haneiages Property Paste sa oa da
174. anguage dialog checkbox in Language Properties For more complete information on lan guage selection see Illustration 18 10 Language Properties with selected language file Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Actions Property Page You want to unselect all Click on the Uncheck All button All checkboxes are languages cleared You want to select all the Click on the Check All button A check mark appears in languages the checkboxes of all the languages You want to select a spe Click in the checkbox next to the language A check cific language mark appears in the checkbox You want to unselect a spe Click in the checkbox next to the language you want to cific language unselect The check mark is cleared from the checkbox Table 9 4 Language Selection Options Actions Property You can link several action items to an item or package You can also link the installation Page of files or the execution of other archive items to the success or failure of any number of action items from the list below The requirements for the action s result must be met before the item is processed The following action items return success or failure results that you can use to control whether other action items in your archive are installed or executed Call External Code Copy Delete DirectX Check Disk Prompt Download File Find Input Location Prompt Message Move QuickTime Check Rename System Service Chapter
175. archive Store files in archive Compresses and stores file data inside the archive When the files are stored in the archive they do not need to be re compressed each time a build is done This speeds the build process However they do need to be updated if you made any changes to the files since they were placed in the archive To update a file select the file and select Update from the Edit menu Suggest reboot after successful setup Displays a message to the customer during the installer that allows the customer to restart their machine immediately after a successful setup Debug version Displays a debugging window when the installer is run This window displays debug output as the installer 1s running You can use Trace action items to display your own messages in this window Install empty folders Creates empty folders Note It is recommended that you do not select this field so that you can create folders in your archive as organizational containers to hold collections of files For example you could create a folder in your archive named Items to copy to Windows Dir and put all the files that are to be installed to the Windows folder in it See Adding New Folders on page 6 6 for more information Table 6 11 Install properties General Options Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Selecting a Custom Icon Selecting a Custom Icon Installer VISE for Window
176. ard Display at least E seconds Clear Cancel Help Illustration 6 21 Edit Billboard window You may also use the browse button to select a billboard graphic Look in a Billboards el ex i S creenO ne bm p Mb ScreenThree bmp ScreenT wo bmp File name Screen ne bmp Files of type Bitmap Files bmp Cancel ea Illustration 6 22 Browse for Billboard Graphic 4 Set a minimum display time that will allow users enough opportunity to view the billboard If the installer contains multiple automated billboards each will display Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 26 Adding Automated Billboards in sequence for exactly the time specified except for the final billboard which will display for the remainder of the install Edit Billboard x General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments Path D lt x Billboards S creenOne bmp Dimensions 493 x 197 pixels Display at least la seconds Clear OK Cancel Help Illustration 6 23 Edit Billboard window You may also wish to set other properties for the billboard Billboard properties function like other Archive Items See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Property pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 m Acti
177. ard toolbar Batch Build Use this command to build multiple build targets at one time The Batch Build dialog displays the Build Targets for the cur rent VCT file Checked Build Targets will be built when the Build button is clicked Rebuild All will do just that rebuild all the listed build targets See Batch Build on page 15 9 Table 3 5 File Menu Commands Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Edit Menu 3 9 Command Function Reports Generates reports for an open archive For more information see Generating Archive Reports on page 6 43 Update Archive Updates an archive See Updating An Archive on page 6 48 for more information Create Batch File Creates a batch file you can use to automate the build process 13 of installer programs See Generating a Batch File on page 6 46 for more information Recent Files Recently opened VCTs will be displayed in the Recent File area Exit Exits Installer VISE You can also exit by pressing the ALT and F4 keys or selecting Close from the Application Control menu Table 3 5 File Menu Commands Edit Menu Unda EZ fut tiles Eopy Eie EIP Paste Source Directories Find Update Extract Delete Del Duplicate Properties Alt Enter Create Program Item s Create Shortcut s Illustration 3 7 Edit Menu The Edit menu offers the following commands
178. at ia 9 7 ACOSO PE Las ra ii ee AR a 9 8 Buld Directives Property Pages yace de AAA a 9 11 Comments Property Late cited rro oras ia 9 12 B rore operates e hasta olaaa dietarios rat re ere ee ee 9 12 LS A A O A O 9 13 Using Installer Screens oooooooococccooooo 10 1 About Aster Screens rd tds Ps aaa 10 1 Customizing the Background Window o o oooooooorrr eee tenes 10 1 Customizing the Splash Screen tetera er ork a ork Ras a eee Bee 10 3 Customizing the Welcome Screen 4 5 4 0c08 Glenn trad ean bara oe or 10 5 Customizing the Read Me Message diia AA ee 10 6 Customizing the Requirements Screen vides uit ea is 10 7 Customizing the License Agreement Screen 0 0 cee eee eens 10 8 Customizing the Verify Password Screen a Ge AAG eas 10 9 Customizing the Registration Information Screen 0 0 0 0 eee ene 10 11 Customizing the Select Install Directory Screen o ooooooooooooooooooooooo 10 14 Customizing the Select Install Type Screen 0 eee 10 15 Customizing the Select Components Screen 43 4 40240c0or tt Sida dated ei oad ee 10 17 Customizing the Select Program Folder Screen 0 0 ne 10 19 Customizing the Ready To Install Message Screen o oooooooooooooooooooooo o 10 20 Customizing the Second Read Me Message Screen 0 0 cc eee cece eee 10 22 Customizing the Finished Message Screen 0 eect eee teen eens 10 23 Installer VISE for Windows Contents v Customizing the F
179. ation 8 5 Call External Code Action Properties General page 3 Type the name of your dll file in the External code dll file name field For exam ple if your dll file is sample dll type sample dll You can also click the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box to access the dll files added to the archive Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Comment Item 4 Make entries in the following fields Parameter 1 LONG Type the number you want to be passed to the external code Parameter 2 LPSTR Type the string you want to be passed to the external code Variables used here are expanded to their runtime values Store return value in this variable Click to select the runtime variable that saves the return value This variable can be examined at a later time and different actions can be performed based on its value Table 8 2 Call External Code Action General Properties See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 El Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Comment item
180. be assigned to packages and also tied to the results of earlier action items They can be dis played or not displayed based on system requirements install language and action item results Billboards are displayed in the order that they appear in the archive then click OK Billboard action items will display only if the installer s Background Win dow is enabled To verify this setting select Background from the Screens menu Make sure that Show background window 1s checked and To add a billboard to your installer 1 Add the image file you wish to display to the archive 2 Remove the image file from all packages except the Support Files package Files in the Support Files package are copied to a temporary folder on the customer s hard Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Billboard Action Item drive before the installation takes place Files that are copied to this temporary folder are removed with the folder when the installation is completed Select Billboard from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Billboard A Billboard action item is added to the archive and the Billboard Properties window appears Click on the General tab The Billboard Properties General page appears General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B4 Start color Red D Green 2 Bue 0 Pick Endcolo Red 0 Green 2 Blue 0 Pick Image file
181. be removed when the uninstaller is run See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Property pages 13 E System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 19 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Edit Text File Item 8 23 Edit Text File Item You can add a new edit text file item to an archive using the Edit Text file command This command can do the following m Edit text files m Add text to the beginning or the end of a file m Search for text in the file and append text to that line remove that line or replace that line with the new text m Insert a line of text before the search line or after the search line m Make a backup of a file The file is saved with the extension bak in the same directory as the original file The uninstaller undoes actions performed by this item The Edit AUTOEXEC BAT and Edit CONFIG SYS items can perform actions on these files that are undone by the unin staller For more information see 19 m Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item on page 8 19 m Edit CONFIG SYS Item on page 8 21 To add a Edit Text File 1 At the Archive window select Edit Text File Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add
182. button all edit text fields that have their Required Input checkbox selected will be verified to make sure the user has actually entered information Dimensions Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note Dimensions are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Table 11 4 Button Item Properties Check Box Properties Checkbox Item x 2 A Variable Click to assign M Default On Dimensions Left 29 Width 55 Top 29 Height 8 Cancel Illustration 11 14 Checkbox Item Properties Window Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 12 Property Radio Button Properties Description Type in the title you wish to be displayed for the check box NOTE You can also enter a variable name here if you wish to dynamically set the title See the section below on Variable Substitution Variable You can assign a user defined variable to this check box Click and select the variable you wish to associate with this check box IMPORTANT The variable will automatically be assigne
183. can at any time by clicking the Stop button Step 5 Find Differences ES 4 scan is now being performed to see what has changed since the snapshot of your selected directories files and registry entries was taken This task may take a few minutes A Scanning files Program Files Microsoft s t Differences 23 Sp 3 Modified File H Program Files Plus Microsoft Internet PLUGINS npatplugin dil C New Directory H Program Filest QuickTime J New File H Program Files QuickTimeDelsL1 isu New File H Program Files QuickTime MoviePlayer exe LJ New File H Program Files QuickTime PictureViewer exe L New File H Program Files QuickT ime TInfo exe J New File H Program Files Quick Time readme wri LJ New File H Program Files QuickTime S ample mov New File H Program FilestQuickTimet sample qtif 7 New File HARECYCLER S 1 5 21 1274694031 2049838272 927750060 1 000 C y b Illustration 14 7 Find Differences Screen Once this scan is completed the Snapshot Wizard will automatically open the Dif ferences Found list Differences Found List 13 The Difference Found screen displays a list containing the differences found and details for each difference including its name type and location There is also a Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard 14 8 Customizing Difference List checkbox to the left of each item to include
184. chive window appears Clearing External Code To clear external code from the Installer Properties dialog box 1 At the Installer Properties dialog box click on the Clear button by the appropriate option For example if you want to clear external code that is to be called at instal lation click on the Installation Clear button The external code is cleared from the Installer Properties dialog box 2 Click OK The Archive window appears Calling External Code This section describes how to call external code before or after a file has been installed or Before or After Install an action performed To call external code 1 At the Archive window select the archive item that you want the external code to be called before or after 2 Select Properties from the Edit menu The Properties dialog box of the selected item appears Chapter 17 Using External Code Installer VISE for Windows Calling External Code Before or After Install 17 7 You want to call external Click on the Before tab The Before Property page code before a file has been appears installed or an action is Copy Action Properties per formed General Advanced System Languages Actions Before After Call these external codes before this item is installed Call external code Sample32 dll Param 0 Param2 EN Delete You want to call external Click on the After tab The After Property page appears code after a file has been Cops Action Prop
185. ck A QuickTime Check action item is added to the Archive and the QuickTime Check Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The QuickTime Check Properties General page appears QuickTime Check Properties EES General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B ls QuickTime version 4 fil or better installed Store QuickTime version number in this variable Click to assign Install QuickTime if check fails Path to Worekohime mstaller Illustration 8 41 QuickTime Check Properties General page Function Is QuickTime version or Use the two provided fields to specify a QuickTime better installed version number for this check For example to check for version 4 1 of the QuickTime for Windows dll enter 4 in the first field and 1 in the second field Store QuickTime version Allows you to store the value returned by this function in number in this variable a variable Table 8 33 QuickTime Check General Properties Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Install QuickTime if check fails Register File Type Action Item Function If checked the installer will use the path in the Path to QuickTime installer field to launch an installer Path to QuickTime installer Path to the QuickTime installer that will be launched if Install QuickTime if check fails is checked and the specified version of QuickTime is not found The Quick
186. cked Installer VISE will verify file paths when saving your project and prompt you to locate any files whose paths are unknown Every so often a user hits cancel during an installation leaving files where they shouldn t be To prevent this problem turn on Rollback changes after cancelled installs With Rollback activated your installer will undo changes made by a cancelled install Changes rolled back include those made to m Files m Folders m Registry entries m Ini file entries p Rollback does not yet support Rename Copy Move and Delete actions Installer VISE allows you to include an uninstall function in your installer The uninstaller performs the following operations Locates the items from the archive for which you did not select the Don t add to uninstaller log option If the customer has placed new items in folder that is marked to be deleted dur ing the uninstall the folder is not removed By default the uninstall function looks for items in the location that the installer thinks they were installed To remove an item that might have been moved to another location use the Delete action item to identify and locate oo the target file If you think customers might change the name of an item identify it by modified date created date and version number in the Advanced tab of Delete Action Properties See Advanced Property Page on page 9 1 _ AA gt
187. come Screen Read Me Message Requirements Screen License Agreement Verify Password Registration Information v Select Install Directory Select Install Type Select Components Select Program Folder v Ready to Install Message Read Me Message v Finished Message Finished Message 2 Illustration 11 1 Screens Menu They are displayed in a predetermined order as listed in the Screens menu at specific times during the installation Select the screens you wish to display from the Screens menu then enter any data specific to your installation such as Read Me text Splash Screen bitmap etc Complete information on these builtin screens and how to set them up is described in Chapter 10 About Installer Screens Sometimes however there may be instances where you wish to change the order these built in screens are displayed and when they are displayed during the installation Perhaps you want to display a License Agreement screen at the very beginning of the installation Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 2 Sample Custom Screens Chapter 11 Custom Screens Sample Custom Screens instead of after the Welcome Screen Or display the Registration Information screen at the end of the installation The Display Screen action allows you to override the default order and times that Installer VISE s built in screens are displayed Finally the built in screens may not provide enough flexibility and powe
188. ct HKEY CLASSES ROOT 2 For the second entry select HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT 3 For the third entry select HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT 4 For the fourth entry select HKEY_CLASSES_ ROOT 5 For the first entry type vct This should be the your file extension For the second entry type InstallerVISE Archive This should be a descriptive label of your file type For the third entry type InstallerVISE Archive DefaultIcon For the fourth entry type InstallerVISE Archive shell open command Table 8 36 Registry Entry to Display an Icon Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 62 Rename Action Item Leave this field blank 9 For the first entry type InstallerVISE Archive This should be a descriptive label of your file type 10 For the second entry type Installer VISE Archive This should be a descriptive name of your file type For the third entry type TargetDir Installer VISE InstVise exe 1 This is the pathname of the file that contains the display icon The number is a 0 based index of the icon in this file Note Do not use quotes around the pathname here For the fourth entry type TargetDir Installer VISE InstVise exe 1 This is the pathname of the file to launch when a file with your type is dou ble clicked 1 is replaced with the name of the file to open Note Use quotes around the pathname and the 1 Table 8 36 Registry Entry to Display an Icon Repeat these four
189. ction item 1 Select Input Box from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Input Box An Input Box action item 1s added to the archive and the Input Box Action Properties window appears Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 44 Input Box Action Item 2 Click on the General tab The Input Box Action Properties General page appears Input Box Item Properties 21 x pregarnenannanennnnnzos General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B_4 gt Caption Message Default Variable Click to assign I Disable cancel button Cancel button cancels entire install Illustration 8 31 Input Box Action General page 3 Make the following entries Caption Type a caption for the message box For example type ProductName Setup You can also use variables in this field Message Type the message you want to display to the user For example Please type your serial number You can also use variables in this field Default Default text that will appear in the edit field Variable Name of the variable that the response will be stored in Disable cancel button Disables the Cancel button Cancel button cancels When checked clicking the Cancel button will cancel the entire install entire install in addition to canceling the dialog Table 8 28 Message Box Action General Fields Input Box Item Propertie
190. ctivate that user defined menu Customize Opens the Layout List wndow where layouts can be defined and edited Table 3 12 Layout Menu Items Help Menu Help Topics Technical Support Ordering Information Registration Form About Installer VISE Illustration 3 15 Help Menu Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 18 Using Installer VISE Help Accessing Help from the Archive Window Using the Help Contents Page Using Installer VISE Help The Help menu offers the following commands Command Function Help Topics Displays a list of help topics for using Installer VISE See Using Installer VISE Help on page 3 18 for more infor mation Technical Support Provides information about contacting the Technical Support department at MindVision See Chapter 1 Intro duction for more information Ordering Information Provides the terms and conditions for using Installer VISE Registration Form Provides the registration form that you need to complete and return to MindVision to be able to receive technical support See Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics for more information About Installer VISE Displays the version number of the Installer VISE soft ware you are using You can also activate your copy of Installer VISE from this window See Activating Installer VISE on page 2 6 for more information Table 3 13 Help Menu Commands Installer VISE
191. ctory In this instance if you wanted to default the value of CAMyTemp as the default installa tion directory then you would do this Variables 0 TargetDir c MyTemp Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables Installer VISE for Windows Externally Setting TargetDir 19 9 Any additional entries would be in numerical sequence as in the following example Variables 0 TargetDir c MyTemp 1 UserDefVar 2 2 UserVar2 10 3 UserVar3 c MyApp Externally Setting The target directory contained in the variable TargetDir can be set externally at TargetDir installer run time There are two methods for doing this 1 Use the t command line switch as shown here setup exe t C Program Files My Application This is useful when launching other Installer VISE installers and their install loca tions need to be dynamically set using external means 2 Add an entry to the win ini file located in the Windows directory as shown here Installer VISE TargetDir C Program Files My Application If this key is found the target directory will be set to its string value and the sec tion will be removed from the win ini file You can use this feature to set the target directory from external code As long as the external code is called at initialization time and adds this section and key to win ini the installer will be able to use that string as the default target directory For information on externally setting any
192. d Snapshot Wizard Dependency Watcher Dependency Walker verity Archive Purchase Installer WISE Illustration 13 1 Tools Menu This chapter covers the following Installer VISE Tools 13 m Visual Basic Project Wizard on page 13 2 m Dependency Watcher on page 13 4 m Dependency Walker on page 13 6 m Verify Archive on page 13 7 m Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate on page 13 8 For information on the Archive Wizard see Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard For information on the Snapshot Wizard see Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools 13 2 Visual Basic Project Wizard Visual Basic Project The Visual Basic Project Wizard can be used to scan a Visual Basic project file for file Wizard dependencies Visual Basic Project Wizard Ea The Installer VISE Project Wizard for Visual Basic 5 0 will create an Installer VISE project which includes the files required by your Visual Basic application Product name o Default directory 2ProgramFiesDi Browse Visual Basic project file bp FO Browse T Rebuild the Project Required files checked files will be added to your project I Add duplicate files Dependency of gt Properties Cancel Lok Illustration 13 2 Visual Basic Project Wizard To use the Visual Basic Project Wizard 1 Select Visual Basic Project Wizard f
193. d If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 7 Click the OK button The Archive window appears This option allows you to customize the installer s Select Components Screen This dialog is automatically displayed if your customer chooses Custom Setup from the Select Install Type dialog or if there are no items in the Typical Setup and Compact Setup packages and there are items assigned to Custom packages You can add a side bitmap with the dimen sions of 138x258 pixels You can also add a message to be shown to your customers Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 18 Customizing the Select Components Screen To customize the Select Components Screen 1 Select Select Components from the Screens menu The Select Components dialog box appears V Use default text Select Components Select Components Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Set Clear Variable Click to assign i f Cancel Help Illustration 10 11 Select Components dialog 2 Click on the Use default text checkbox 1f you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox
194. d a kamen e a a a 17 8 Deletins Extemal Code e ds dat 17 9 Creating Installers in Different Languages 18 1 Aboutthe Localization Features odas da eee 18 1 About Tantas VLG BCS sre iri aaa dt ela aad ane AA EA Shido as 18 1 Language VLG Files Vs Translation DAT files 0 ccc ee ees 18 1 Supported Languages 204 6 5 eno a AA oh sd 18 2 Escalization Process cia A A iS 18 2 sinele Laneiage Installers A RRA AA hp eA AA 18 2 Mult Lane ase Jnstaller al EII AE AOS 18 2 Creatine aol ranslation Pl a AAA Aa 18 3 Setting Language Properties ea A A A aS awe 18 3 Translitans a Transition Pile A E ia 18 6 Importing the Translation File into the Installer o oooooooooommm m 18 8 Turning off the Use default text checkbox 0 nes 18 11 Editing the Installer Language Properties 0 0 eee eens 18 12 Delete an Installer Landa uci wee chewed aes eee Sah Che eb wee Rhone en 18 12 Using Runtime Variables 0 0 ees 19 1 About Runtime Variables niece et Se ahieetk a is 19 1 Rine Vatiables lapa actes 2 einen sh Ae no na tsa ee eae eo De ote aoe A 19 1 VOB NS Oasis E N 19 2 MERO MDI ido ida taa aa eta 19 2 Common esktOpl0 tt A A A A awa 19 2 Common Ples Diro e isa dira Bare dct ad aro liado da do b s da De add ass 19 2 COMMON LOSA MS exc Ss A Be a ae ee eee ad 19 3 COMMONSA Meni Git 65 4573705 case ed Git ae Ad tdo 19 3 COMMONS ANUP A Le ee em ee A
195. d depending on the state of the check box when the user exits the custom screen If the check box state is On the variable value will be set to 1 If the check box state is Off the variable value will be set to 0 Default On If this check box 1s selected then the check box item will default to being selected when the custom screen is displayed Dimensions Radio Button Properties Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note Dimensions are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Table 11 5 Checkbox Item Properties Radio Item x Title Radio 1 Variable Click to assign Default On m Dimensions Left E width a1 Top E3 Height fe Cancel Illustration 11 15 Radio Button Item Properties Window Chapter 11 Custom Screens Installer VISE for Windows Radio Button Properties Property 11 13 Description Type in the title you wish to be displayed for the radio button NOTE You can also enter a variable name here if you wish to dynamically set the title See the section be
196. d installs Cancel Help Illustration 6 30 Installer Properties General tab 3 Type the name of your product in the Product name field For example type My Product The installer replaces any occurrence of the runtime variable Product Name with this string This variable is frequently used in the screen dialogs to dis play the correct product name 4 Select the maximum size that you want the segment to be from the Segment size popmenu Select one of the following Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Unlimited m 1420 710 Setting Installer General Properties If you select Unlimited a single executable file is generated Otherwise the installer is split up into segments no bigger than this maximum size For example if your installer contained 2MB of data two segments are created MyProduct Setup exe and MyProduct 002 5 Select from the following options by clicking on the appropriate checkboxes Generate log file Creates a log file in the destination directory The log file appears with the name setuplog txt This file can be opened and read with any text editor for example Notepad exe CDROM install Creates a single install file that can be used on a CD ROM This allows the customer to be able to click and drag files from the CD ROM as well as run a setup program that copies the files for them The installer expects the layout of the CD ROM to be exactly as described in the
197. d is the build behavior which most closely matches that of Installer VISE versions prior to 2 8 Disk Images At build installer disk segments will be created at the location designated by the path field This option creates an installer that would be identical to one produced by building to floppies Folders At build an installer is created at the location designated by the path field Segments are saved within the appropriate disk folder CD Installer At build a CD installer is created at the location designated by the path field and files are extracted from the archive and copied to the same location as the CD installer Single File At build a single file installer containing compressed archive items is created at the location designated by the path field Web Installer At build a web installer and designated group files are created at the location designated by the path field Table 15 1 Build Target Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management Segment size Destination Path Installer Name Settings Specific to Build Targets Segment size m The Segment size popmenu 1s active only when one of the following is selected in the Targets popmenu Ask At Build Disk Images or Folders The choices for segment size include Unlimited 1420K or 710K m Destination Path determines where the built installer along with any segments file groups or web catalog files will
198. d the FAQ download the latest version of Installer VISE and much more Batch Build Build automation can be achieved by using Installer VISE s Batch Build feature Batch build enables multiple build targets to be built at one time To build multiple build targets at once 1 Select Batch Build from the File menu New Ctrl N Open Ctrl Ol Save Ctrl S Save As AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer Properties Language Properties Build Installer Test Installer F5 Batch Build Reports Update Archive Create Batch File 1 CustomsScreens1 WET 2 D Work In Progress T est2 CT 3 docs y ct 4K Untitled CT Exit Illustration 15 16 Batch Build menu item Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management 15 10 Batch Build 2 Check all build targets you wish to build at once and select the Build button Batch Build Ed Configurations Debug Sinale file to QA Ask at Build Rebuild All Web Installer Cancel M elease Installer SILI Illustration 15 17 Batch Build window To rebuild all build targets regardless of checked status select the Rebuild All but ton Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive Multi file Updater Archives Installer VISE Automates the Process The AutoCreate Updater Process Installer VISE for
199. dded files and folders to the archive you need to create packages sub packages and list packages and assign the appropriate files to them This section describes each of these items how to create them and how to assign files to them Packages or components can be used to group sets of files and folders that you want to be installed together When creating an installer you specify which files and folders you want to include in a package in the archive You have the option of creating an installer that automatically installs specific packages or allows the customer to choose from a list of packages to customize the installation pro cess For example you might create an Application package a Demo package and an Additional Tools package When customers run your installer they can use the Typical Setup option to install all the materials Compact Setup to do a minimum install or they can use the Custom Setup option to install only the packages which meet their needs All archive items can be added to packages Files can be selectively installed or actions selec tively performed Installer VISE allows you to create up to a total of 256 packages including the Support Files Typical Setup Compact Setup Silent Setup and Pre Screens Items packages which are automatically built in Following is what you can do to a package m Add a description of each package or sub package to aid the customer in choos ing what to install m Create sub p
200. ddresses where the built Sites active web installer can retrieve file groups You may set up multiple download sites At runtime the installer will prompt the end user to select one of these download sites To set up Internet download sites 1 From the Internet menu select Download Sites 2 In the Internet Site List click the New button 3 In the Edit Internet Site window enter a Name a Server Address an Initial Direc tory and click the OK button Edit Internet Site ES Name MindVision Website 00 Server Address Jactivesite mindvisioncom User Name FO Password PO Initial Directory factivesitewwebvise 00 Server Type HTTP y Cancel Illustration 7 10 Edit Internet Site In the example above on the server at address http www activesite mindvi sion com there is a directory named activesite that contains a sub directory named winvise which will contain the File Group files created when the installer is built When entering Server Address do not preceed with http The http pro tocol declaration will be added by the web installer prior to searching for the server at the address specified in the Server Address field In the example above the Server Type is set to HTTP Both HTTP and FTP are supported as server types If the FTP protocol is selected you will need to enter information for User Name and Password 4 After creating all download sites you will be using click OK to dismiss the Internet
201. delete files by name and location See Delete Action Item on page 8 10 DirectX Check lt a This action item checks for the presence or version of DirectX for Windows 13 See DirectX Check Action Item on page 8 12 Table 6 10 Archive Items Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows List of Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Archive item Description Disk Prompt Bl This action item prompts the user for a disk that is not necessarily part of the installer See Disk Prompt Action Item on page 8 14 Display Screen The Display Screen action allows you to display a standard screen or a custom screen at any point during the installation process It can be used in place of the Screens menu options which display screens in a set order to enable full control over screen display order See Display Screen Action Item on page 8 15 Download File E This action item is used to download a file from an FTP or HTTP server at any point during the instal lation process See Download File Action Item on page 8 17 Edit AUTOEXEC BAT File Edits the AUTOEXEC BAT file See Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item on page 8 19 Edit CONFIG SYS i le Adds a new edit CONFIG SYS item to the archive See Edit CONFIG SYS Item on page 8 21 Edit Text File ul Edits text files See Edit Text File Item on page 8 23 Files
202. dll E WINNTSystem32 ComCat dll E WINNT System32 Ctl3d32 dll E WINNTSystem32 MSYBYM50 dll E WINNTSystem32 0leAut32 dll E WINNTSystem32 0lePro32 dll E WINNT System32 Std0le2 tlb iS K S lt lt A 2 Dependency of Main Project Executable or DLL File y Properties Cancel Illustration 13 4 VB Project Wizard following Scan 7 Check the files you want added to your installer 8 Use the Dependency of combo box to examine why files were included in the list 9 Click the Properties button to display the Explorer s property dialog for the cur rently selected file pass_cli exe Properties 21x General Version l Security O pass_cli exe Type Application Location E Program Files DevStudio VB4sa passthru Size 14 0KB 14 336 bytes 14 336 bytes used Compressed size File is not compressed MS DOS name pass_cliexe Created Friday July 24 1998 9 03 39 4M Modified Friday July 24 1998 9 03 40 4M Accessed Thursday July 30 1998 9 48 03 4M Attributes M Read onlk J Hidden MV Archive System Compressed Cancel ppi Illustration 13 5 Selected File s Properties Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools 13 4 Dependency Watcher Dependency Watcher 10 Click OK to add the selected files to your installer Untitled Mind ision Installer VISE File Edit View Screens Add Arch
203. dows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Setting Folder Advanced Properties Function Source path This field is used for updating If Source path is a valid directory updating the folder will add files that are not in the archive as well as updating the files that are currently in the archive If Source path 1s not a valid directory only the files currently in the archive will be updated Size Total size of the files contained in the folder Contains Number of files and folders contained in the folder Don t Install Folder Placeholder This option allows you to install any archive 1tems from inside the folder without installing the folder itself Table 8 19 Folder Properties General Tab Setting Folder Advanced To set folder advanced properties Properties 1 Select the folder properties advanced tab 2 At the Install from popmenu set the location from where to install the folder Function Default Location Folder will be created by the installer Other Location Path name of a location where the folder can be found For example SrcDir lang the contents of this location will be copied from this location to the target folder Table 8 20 Folder Properties Advanced Tab 3 At the Install to popmenu set the location where the item will be installed Install Directory Function Installs the item to it s relative location as it appears in the archive
204. drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 6 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 7 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the Second You can customize the second installer s Read Me Screen You might want to use this Read Me Message option if you have any last minute notes for your customers before the install 1s complete Screen You can add a side bitmap with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels To customize the second Read Me Message Screen 1 Select Read Me Message from the Screens menu The Read Me Message dialog appears Read Me Message x F Show this dialog M Use default text Important Notes YA Set Clear Variable Click to assign i E Cancel Help Illustration 10 14 Read Me Message dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Read Me Message Screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized
205. e dll that is to be name called from the uninstaller This is called before the uninstaller removes anything You can add any additional code to this dll you would like For example you could add code to do additional cleanup for your application Parameter 1 LONG Type the number that can be passed to the external code dll Parameter 2 LPSTR Type the string that can be passed to the external code dll Variables used here are expanded to their runtime values Table 6 14 Uninstaller Properties Any custom external codes which you defined can be attached to the installer on the Installer Properties External Codes page Custom external codes can be called at the following times Before Install This option calls the code after the install button is clicked and before any files are installed For example you can use this option to check whether certain packages are selected before beginning an installation m After Install This option calls the code after installation is complete but before a dialog box appears to the customer For example you can use this option to bring up a dialog box so the customer can register your software package m Initialization This option calls the code immediately when the installer is launched before anything appears to the customer To set installer external code properties at the Installer Properties dialog box click on the External Code tab The Installer Properties External
206. e Add me 11 3 To create a new Display Screen action nu select Items Items Package Sub Package Illustration 11 4 Add Items menu 2 In the Add Items Add Items ltem dialog select Display Screen and click the Add button olx Description 8 Billboard Call Exter Z Comment Copy Ef Delete ES Directx Check E Disk Prompt El Display S Download File Pe Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Displays a billboard during the install Calls an external code library for custom programming Displayed only in the item list has no function during an install An action that copies file s folder s An action that deletes file s folder s Checks for the existance of Directx on the target machine Displays a dialog that prompts the user for a disk Displays 4 custom or built in dialog to the user Downloads a file from a FTP or a HTTP server Edits the Autoexec bat file nal Code creen 8 Edit CONFIG SYS Item Edits the Contig sys file FY Edit Text File Item An action that edits text files 3 Files Adds existing files and folders to the archive al Find An action that searches for file s folder s C Folder Creates a new folder in the archive 9 Goto Item Create a Goto action which can be used to jump to Label items l Include CT File Item Merges the contents of another WCT file at build time 5 Ini File Entry Read write or remove an entry in an
207. e External Code File to the Archive Calling the External Code Calling External Code at Initialization Installer VISE for Windows 17 3 Once you build the external code file you must add it to the archive To add the external code file to the archive 1 At the Archive window select Files from the Add menu The Add Files dialog box appears Add Files 3 af X File and folder names Folders a work in progress 2 7ReleaseNotes doc 7 ATTACHED 3DD 3 button names bmp decklist txt 3 exporttt tab expt txt Drives g DATA Network Add Add All Remove Remove All Items to add Illustration 17 1 Add Files dialog 2 Select the dll file you want to add and click on the OK button The file is added to the archive and the Archive window appears 3 Remove the dll file from all packages except the Support Files package Files in the Support Files package are copied to a temporary folder on the user s hard drive before the installation takes place Files that are copied to this temporary folder are removed along with the folder when the install 1s completed Once you have added the external code file to the archive you must select how you want it to be called by the installer Following are the three ways in which external code can be called from the installer at run time At initialization time before setup begins copying the files or after setup
208. e customer runs your installer 13 See essage Box Action Item on page 8 47 Move action items can be used to move files and folders to different locations on the customer s machine See Move Action Item on page 8 49 Open Internet This action item can be used to open World Wide Address Web pages on the customer s computer 19 See Open Internet Address Action Item on page 8 51 Program Item Creates or removes a program item or program group See Program Items on page 8 52 QuickTime Check This action item allows you to check for the presence of QuickTime for Windows on the customer s computer See Quicktime Check Action Item on page 8 55 Register File Type This action item can be used to register file types for Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP and to create file associations for Windows 3 1 13 See Register File Type Action Item on page 8 56 Registry Entry Creates a registry entry that can be written read 8 8 into a runtime variable or removed from the regis try See Registry Entry Action Item on page 8 58 Rename Rename actions can be used to rename files on the customer s machine See Rename Action Item on page 8 62 Run Application This action item can be used to launch other applications or execute batch files See Run Application Action Item on page 8 64 Tab
209. e ee eek eee wears pea 19 3 Del rosr mkolderdo sand Acts De note cede ES are dG rae ve hep ca at 19 3 ID ESOPO ara iia diia tia 19 3 EOS A ope Re ae ents nae a Ue Set 19 4 ColNetDataPile Path Ossi sitet hv dias eae ae ade Std Bae Sah Reece Ro AY 19 4 COQ ero A tito Oe hath ce ao uta eee eet Oh eee Aha aaa etek eas 19 4 a See ae rae ae a ra ee ee A a 19 4 OGIO Ct AN ies AAA A A ac eee a ee 19 4 NOAA e ds ans eee a 19 5 PRESI e amaa a ee ee ati eee ee 19 5 Do Se tial Via BOLO cnie don die ake sane Perey A eet eed bo hk 19 5 OSC ye Oats tartan fag Meare e e ae ee ae ae dee ae ete 19 5 OG SCT Oe Gree ak Sedo Aosta aia hs cad aaah haan ae Rca a Bess mak aed evs EASA 19 5 OO SCT TACOS te lic Be sesh ion ew aaah Gest de teas ato aa dk dina At Ash ego Syn ise tod ica detal hate pi iio des 19 5 VOS TABLETA tg oo bcc AR ee tok Sh A eee ee he he eos 19 5 Installer VISE for Windows Contents vii vo Star UDIT dr AeA ea eat a ace AER a eee wane a ee Oa aes 19 6 DOS SI Me Ors ati spat dh Grd te a A a OS OO REO Reo 19 6 US A A A E EEE re 19 6 arial aaa ds Soros us adidas E Sua dd ee te a ad 19 6 SA A E 19 6 A fee G8 ee tae se ey Re Ge aay Ge BA Deh ae EE 19 6 NS op lt 8 fase het a See SN ah NI ea Satan od WS ain aan 19 6 Wo remp Ve Ors ute sara dd td a Sate chore Bas te BOGS eet Sse eae ae ee 19 6 US ENAMORA ace ae Rae ee etna 19 6 WONG Oe pasar A Dyes See OS Ee ee es Ea ee Oe MM ks Gun BE oe Rie 19 6 A A cists ae II E ares sa dle he 19 7 Use
210. e in E My Documents y e a e Ea amp Untitled4 CT My Pictures amp Installer VISE 3 5 4CT amp Install CT amp Untitled CT amp Untitled3 VCT File name I chive YET Save as type Installer VISE Files vct v Cancel Li Illustration 16 6 Save As dialog 9 After saving the archive window for the newly created updater archive will be dis played Updater Archive CT MindYision Installer ISE File Edit Yiew Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help Jejeje l0x 2 CI Support Files f E InstallervISE 3 Compact Setup Y What s New txt Silent Setup YI Installer VISE J Pre Screens Items Y Installer_Vise exe YI Support Y 25 Update file LayoutInfo ini Update file Readme txt Update file Relnotes txt For Help press F1 Illustration 16 7 AutoCreate Updater Archive Results Message xq A IMPORTANT The update files created during this process will all use the default settings You may need to open some update files if you need to modify the default settings Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive 16 6 The AutoCreate Updater Process Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 17 17 1 Using External Code About External Code Building an External Code DLL File Installer VISE for Windows
211. e or sub package Copy Here Makes a copy of the selected package or sub package in the selected package or sub package Table 6 9 Package Rearrangement Options The items you add to an archive need to be assigned to the appropriate packages and sub packages Following are the different items that can be assigned to a package or sub package m Files m Folders m Action items You can assign items to as many packages and sub packages as needed When assigning items to sub packages you must assign the same items to the parent package For example your installer includes a parent package called Samples and sub packages called Database samples and Spreadsheet samples Any items that you assign to the Database sam ples and Spreadsheet samples sub packages must also be assigned to the Samples package y To add items to a package or sub package do one of the following 1 Select the package or sub package you want to add the items to Click in the box to the left of the item you want to add A check mark appears indicating that the item is selected 2 Select the item you want to add and drag and drop it on the desired package or sub package Multiple items can be assigned at once by holding down the CTRL key selecting the items you want to add with the mouse and dragging and drop ping the selected items on the package or sub package 3 Select the item you wan
212. e project is for Visual C 32 bit You can copy the project and use it as a starting point Chapter 17 Using External Code Creating External Code for Installer VISE Installers entry point as follows extern C LONG CALLBACK ViseEntry LONG lParaml Creating External Code for Installer VISE Installers In order to interface with an Installer VISE installer your external code must have a main LPCSTR lpParam2 DWORD dwReserved If you need access to information returned by calling the external code beyond simple success or failure your code source must also include the following class definition class CViseEntryData public HWND m_hwndMain HWND m_hwndProgress BOOL m_bUninstall LPCSTR m_lpszUninstallLogFile LPCSTR m_lpszTempDir HINSTANCE m_hinst char m_szInstallerName MAX PATH eSellerate shopping cart data LONG m _nShoppingCartCount LPCSTR m_lpShoppingCartSKUl 64 LPCSTR m_lpShoppingCartID 64 eSellerate serial number data LONG m_nSerialNumberCount LPCSTR m_lpSerialNumberID 64 LPCSTR m_lpSerialNumber 64 LPCSTR m_lpSerialNumberKey 64 eSellerate file location data LONG m_nFileLocationCount LPCSTR m_lpFileLocationID 64 LPCSTR m_lpFileLocation 64 Main window handle Progress dialog window handle Uninstaller flag Uninstall log file path Installer VISE s temp directory path Instance handle of the VISE dll Name of the installer Number of ite
213. e setup files are available for downloading from the Microsoft web site as a component of the DirectX SDK You will need the Redistributable download Table 8 4 DirectX Check General Properties See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 19 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 19 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 14 Disk Prompt Action Item Disk Prompt Action Item You can add a Disk Prompt action to the archive using the Disk Prompt action item com mand This action item allows you to prompt for a disk that is not necessarily in the set of install disks You can also prompt for a disk when installing from other media such as CD ROM and local or network hard drives This action item can also be used to install enabler or signature files that are unique for each user You can design your installer to accept only certain disks based on specific cri teria like disk label or existing files To add a Disk Prompt action item 1 Select Disk Prompt from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialo
214. e that can be called after an item is processed To access the After Property page 1 Click on the After tab on the Properties window of the selected item The After Property page appears Copy ction Properties EES System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments Before Alter os 4 Illustration 9 13 After Property page 2 Click on the New button The Call External Code Item Properties dialog box appears See Chapter 17 Using External Code for more information 3 Select the external code and click on the OK button The After Property page appears Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties 9 14 After Property Page You want to edit external code Select the external code and click on the Edit button The Call External Code Item Properties dialog box appears Make the appropriate entry and click on the OK button The After Property page appears You want to delete external code Select the external code and click on the Delete button The external code is deleted Table 9 8 Editing and Deleting After External Code Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens This chapter describes the different pre built screens that can be added to an installer Your customers view these screens while installing your software About Installer The Installer VISE installer screens are displayed to your custom
215. e translation file with the Translator exe application makes changes and sends the translation file back to you You might want to send a copy of this section to the person who 1s doing LEA tis the translation for you Y a Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages Installer VISE for Windows Translating a Translation File Installer VISE for Windows 18 7 To translate a translation file 1 Launch the Translation application The Open dialog box appears Open Look in work in progress cs la Spanish dat File name Spanish dat Files of type Translator Files dat y Cancel ee Illustration 18 4 Open dialog with Translation file selected for opening 2 Select the translation file and click on the Open button The MindVision Language Translator window appears oe Spanish dat MindYision Language Translator File Edit Help 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000009 0 0 Packages Archive Items 3 Scripts Ink 3 Sample32 dll Installer Properties General Uninstaller Screens Background Window Splash Screen Q Welcome Screen eS Read Me Message 1 Requirements Screen License Agreement Lees Verify Password Registration Information Select Install Directory Select Install Type Select Components Screen Select Program
216. e uninstaller will remove in use files They use will be deleted when the user restarts If not checked files that are in use will not be removed Table 6 13 Uninstaller Options Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Setting Installer Uninstaller Properties 3 Make entries in the following fields Field Option Uninstall log file path Allows the user to specify the path and file name of the uninstall log file Uninstall display name Type the name of the product For example MyProduct 2 0 If running Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP this is the text that appears in the Add Remove Programs control panel applet If running Window 3 1 or Windows NT 3 5 this text is not used Registry Key Name Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP store uninstall information under the registry key HKEY_ LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion Uninstall This field allows you to change the name of the key created here Program group name Type the Program group name where you want the uninstall program item to be created The field defaults to the runtime variable DefProgramFolder DefProgramFolder is set by selecting Select Program Folder from the Screens menu and typing the Program Group name in the Default program folder field If the Select Program Folder screen is shown to customers at runtime they
217. e window select Include VCT File Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu An Include VCT File item is added to the archive and the Include VCT File Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Include VCT File Item Properties General page appears Include YCT File Item Properties 24 x pregarnenannanecnnnnzos CT file s path name Illustration 8 27 Include VCT File Item Properties general page 3 Type the path to the VCT you wish to include or select a VCT by clicking the lookup button Open 1515 ea ES Lookin 2 Desktop y amp ex JE My Computer Sa Network Neighborhood LJ vBGs Installer VISE web CT E Scripts Fa Stevew Filename installer VISE web VCT Files of type vct Files vct bal Cancel Comcel Illustration 8 28 Selecting a VCT file to include 4 The VCT will be included in the installer upon build Include YCT File Item Properties RIES General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Before After CT file s path name D Work In Progress My Product 3 3 CT E Illustration 8 29 Included VCT path Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Ini File Entry See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Property pages 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 m Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Pro
218. eb Installer 7 2 Creating an Active Web Installer Build Target NANA 5 Active web installers require a web server which supports HTTP 1 0 or greater Overview of steps necessary to create an Active Web Installer m Create an Active Web Installer Build Target m Set up File Groups and assign files to file groups m Set up Download Sites m Build the installer m Place the File Group files at the designated web sites In the following pages we will go into more detail on each step needed to create an Active Web Installer Creating an Active Web In order to assign file groups later in the process you must first set up an Active Web Installer Build Target Installer Build Target To create an Active Web Installer Build Target 1 From the Archive menu select Build Targets Archive Build Directives Build Targets Billboards Variables Illustration 7 1 Build Targets Menu Item 2 In the Build Targets List window click Add Configurations Close Default Illustration 7 2 Build Targets List Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Installer VISE for Windows Creating an Active Web Installer Build Target 7 3 3 In the Add Build Target window type a name for the target in the Name field Add Build Target x Active Web Installer Cancel Copy settings from Default v Illustration 7 3 Add Build Target window 4 Select the OK button in the Add Build Target wi
219. ed with the name of your product Select OK in the Buttons popmenu and select Exclamation from the Icon popmenu Another way to use the Message Box action is to ask the customer a question and take dif ferent actions based on the response For example type a caption and a message for the message box Select Yes No from the Buttons popmenu Select Question from the Icon popmenu Make sure this action appears in the list before the items that depend on the response Open the properties window for the actions you want to perform if the cus tomer clicks Yes Go to the Actions page and click New Select the message box from the list and select Succeeds in the Results popmenu Open the properties window for the actions you want to perform if the customer clicks No Go to the Actions page and click New Select the message box from the list and select Fails in the Results popmenu Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 48 Message Box Action Item To add a Message Box action item 1 Select Message Box from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Message Box A Message Box action item is added to the archive and the Message Box Action Properties wndow appears 2 Click on the General tab The Message Box Action Properties General page appears Message Box Action Properties EAES prrmarnenancancnnnnazos Caption Message Buttons ok y Icon None y Illustration 8 36 Message Box Action General page 3 M
220. educed server loads as well as an increase in customer satisfaction with the downloading and installation expe rience In addition MindVision s technology provides developers with unprecedented flex ibility in choosing when to offer updates and enhancements to on line users The Active Web Install technology automatically handles interrupted connections and corrupted files When a connection 1s interrupted previously downloaded files will remain intact on the end user s system and the remains of the active file being downloaded at the time of the interruption will automatically be removed When the end user reconnects the download will continue with the interrupted file and finish downloading the remaining files MindVision s Active Web Install features include m Grouping and packaging of files to create the smallest possible data sets for downloading m Storing the downloaded data for future installs m Various settings to easily handle the creation of an Internet ready installer for the Web An Active Web Installer differs from any other installer you might create in only a few ways In addition to the normal setup items such as package setup and assignment action item creation splash screen and billboard creation an Active Web installer needs informa tion about the way that files will be stored called File Groups and where on the web the installer can obtain file groups called Download Sites Chapter 7 Creating An Active W
221. eet the cond tions set up for the installation You can drag a bitmap file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the frame or click the Set button to choose a side bit map to display The dimensions of the side bitmap are 138x258 pixels License Agreement Display a license agreement automatically to the user for the software being installed If the user clicks Yes the install will continue if the user clicks No the installer will exit You can drag a text file 29K maximum from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the mes sage edit field The text in the file will be appended to the text in the message edit field Verify Password Display a password screen automatically to the user as a simple way to check for a password before the install can continue You can drag a bitmap file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the frame or click the Set button to choose a side bitmap to display The dimensions of the side bitmap are 138x258 pixels Registration Information Display a registration screen to the user for them to enter information that can be used to verify valid serial numbers for the installation will continue The runtime variables UserName Organization and Serial Number will contain the values entered by the user on this screen If the Organization field is left blank only the User name and Serial number fields will be visible to the user If the Serial number field is
222. elds Function Min memory Type the amount of memory that must be available on the target machine to use this installer Action if requirement is This field represents the message that appears to the not met customer if the minimum memory requirement is not met Select one of the following Warn and allow to continue Notify and exit setup Table 6 15 Min Memory Options 3 Click on the Platform checkbox if the target machine must be running a required operating system for the installer to run Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Setting Installer System Requirements Make entries in the following fields Option Function Select Platform This field represents the operation system the target machine must be running for this installer Select one of the following Windows 3 1 Win32s Windows 95 Windows 95 OSR2 Windows 98 Windows 98SE Windows Me Windows NT 3 x Windows NT 4 Windows 2000 Windows XP Version Major Type the major version number of the selected platform Version Minor Type the minor version number of the selected platform Action if requirement is not met This field represents the message that appears to the customer if the platform requirements are not met Select one of the following Warn and allow to continue Notify and exit setup Admin privileges required Select this field if Administrative pr
223. elected screen s dialog box appears 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox See Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens for setting up the available options for each installer screen There are two types of billboards which Installer VISE can display during an install Manual billboards created using the Billboard action item Manual billboards allow com plete control over when during an install a billboard will be displayed For more informa tion on manual billboards see Billboard Action Item on page 8 5 Automated billboards are displayed during an install in sequence Automated billboards have additional display options not available for manual billboards To add automated billboards to an installer 1 From the Archive menu select Billboards Build Directives Build Targets Variables Illustration 6 19 Archive Billboards menu item 2 From the Billboards window select New to add a new billboard Billboards ES y IV Display in a separate window i Delete Edit Preview Illustration 6 20 Billboards window Chapter 6 Creating an installer Installer VISE for Windows Adding Automated Billboards Installer VISE for Windows 3 In the Edit Billboard window type in the path to the graphic file you wish to use for your billboard Edit Billboard EW General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments Path El Dimensions No billbo
224. em 1s installed move the action item so it appears before the entry for the file or folder in the Archive window If you need to move duplicate or copy an action item see Managing Package Items on page 6 17 Once an action item is added to an archive an icon represents it on the right side of the Archive window Action items for which you identified the name of the file or folder to search for display that name in the Archive window Action items that you do not identify the name of the file or folder to search for only display the name of the action item Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Adding Installer Screens Adding Installer Screens Accessing Installer Screens This section lists the different screens that can be added to the installer and the general procedures for adding them to an archive See Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens for com plete information on each type of installer screen and how to set its available options These screens are displayed to the customer when the installer is run You can control which screens you want to display and when A default message is available with these dia logs You have the option of displaying the default dialog or changing it to meet your spe cific needs This text can also be localized for other languages See Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages for more information To access the screen commands 1 2 At the Archive
225. em allows you to show or hide the progress dialog at any point during the install Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Split Path Action Item Split Path Action Item Installer VISE for Windows To add a Show Hide Progress action item 1 Select Show Hide Progress from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Show Hide Progress A Show Hide Progress item is added to the archive and the Show Hide Progress Item Properties window appears Show Hide Progress Properties 24x pregacnencananencnnnza Show progress dialog Illustration 8 48 Show Hide Progress Properties 2 Select Show or Hide from the progress dialog popmenu See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 El Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 E System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 m Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 You can use the Split Path action item to extract the drive directory and name from a path and store the results in variables For example this action item would split the path C Program Files My Application myplugin ini into Drive C Directory Program Fi
226. em command from the Action Item toolbar or by selecting Items from the Add toolbar Package Sub Package Illustration 6 16 Add Items menu Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 22 2 Adding Action Items to an Archive From the Add Items dialog select the item s you wish to add You can select and add items one by one without leaving the dialog or you can select multiple items and click Add Mi ES Add Items 913 oard Displays a billboard during the install E Call External Code Calls an external code library for custom programming E Comment Displayed only in the item list has no function during an install Copy An action that copies file s folder s ey Delete An action that deletes file s folder s E Directx Check Checks for the existance of Directs on the target machine E Disk Prompt Displays a dialog that prompts the user for a disk El Display Screen Displays a custom or built in dialog to the user Downloads a file from a FTP or a HTTP server Edits the Autoesec bat file Edits the Config sys file An action that edits text files j Download File Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item as Edit CONFIG SYS Item EY Edit Text File Iter G Files Adds existing files and folders to the archive 2 Find An action that searches for file s folder E Folder Creates a new folder in the archive a Goto ltem Create a Goto action which can be used to jump to Label items Merges the contents of anoth
227. ement window Edit the text if necessary Table 10 1 License Agreement Fields 5 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 6 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the Verify You can customize the installer s Verify Password Screen This dialog provides you with a Password Screen simple way to check for a password before the install can continue You can also add a side bitmap with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 10 Customizing the Verify Password Screen To customize the Verify Password Screen 1 Select Verify Password from the Screens menu The Verify Password dialog box appears Show this dialog M Use default text Verify Password Password Setup requires that you enter your password before continuing Type your password into the box below and then click Next If you do not know the password you cannot continue Click Cancel to exit Setup Password to check for PASSWORD Set Clear Variable Click to assign E Cancel Help Illustration 10 7 Verify Password
228. entries for each file type that you want to have a custom icon and or automatically launch a program and open when double clicked You can also use the Reg ister file type action item Rename Action Item You can add a Rename action to the archive using the Rename action item command Rename actions can be used to rename files on the customer s machine For example you could rename the file TargetDir MyApp exe to TargetDir MyAppBak exe before installing a new version of MyApp exe Rename actions do not find hidden files or folders Wildcards cannot be used here To add a Rename action item 1 Select Rename from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Rename A Rename action item is added to the archive and the Rename Action Properties window appears Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Rename Action Item Installer VISE for Windows Rename Action Properties 21 x General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments BA gt Path name v New name Replace Aways I I Version check Illustration 8 44 Rename Action Properties General page 3 Type or select the path name of file or folder you want to rename in the Path name popmenu For example type TargetDir Readme txt 4 Type the new name for the file or folder in the New name field For example type Readme2 txt 5 Select one of the foll
229. er WET file at build time Read write or remove an entry in an INI file g amp l Include CT File Item 5 Ini File Entry Illustration 6 17 Add Items Dialog This adds the action item s to the Archive window Set options for the action item Action items can be conditionally processed using system or install language requirements Action items can be tied to the results of other action items External code can be called before or after the action has been performed See Chapter 8 Using Archive Items for more information about setting options for action items Assign the action item to packages Like any other item in an archive action items can be assigned to packages By default all action items are part of the Typical Setup package You can add action items to other packages except the Support Files package so that they are performed during Custom Installs or remove them from the Typical Setup package See Assigning Items to Packages and Sub pack ages on page 6 16 for more information Placing action items in the correct order Archive items that are dependent on the results of an action item must be placed after that item in the archive list The item that is dependent on the action item cannot be processed if the order 1s not cor rect Action items whose results affect the installation of an item in the archive must be performed before the item is installed To ensure that an action item is per formed before an it
230. er file types for Windows 9 x Win dows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP and to create file associations for Windows 3 1 This action adds the registry entries needed if the installer is run on Win dows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP This action adds the appropriate ini entries to the win ini file if the installer is run on Windows 3 1 To add a Register File Type action item 1 Select Register File Type from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dia log and select Register File Type A Register File Type action item is added to the archive and the Register File Type Item Properties window appears Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Register File Type Action Item 8 57 2 Click on the General tab The Register File Type Item Properties General page appears Register File Type Item Properties 121 x prrgacnonancanannnnnzn File extension for example vct I Don t ask user to replace if already registered T Don t add to uninstaller log File type for example Installer VISE archive Icon path for example ZT argetDir InstVise exe Icon index for example 1 El 0 Open with for example ZT argetDir InstVise exe vr Illustration 8 42 Register File Type Item Properties General page 3 Type the extension of the file you want to register in the File extension field Do not include the period For example type vet not vct 4 Click on
231. er installing the item What to do in case there is a duplicate of the item on the target system For complete information about available options see 13 a Setting File Options on page 6 28 13 m Setting Folder Options on page 6 29 Sample Options for Following 15 a sample of some of the kinds of information that you can specify for each Packages package in an archive mA text description of the contents of the package which can include information to help the customer decide whether to install 1t The standard typical compact and custom packages can be edited from the Select Install Type screen a Whether certain system conditions must be met in order for the package to be part of an installation m Whether the package should be a list package which allows your customer to install selected files from the package m Whether the package is available for install after a successful online transaction This option applies when you build your installer to integrate with the eSellerate e commerce system an optional service 13 For complete information about available options see Creating Packages Sub Packages and List Packages on page 6 7 Sample Options for the Following is a sample of some of the kinds of information you can specify for the installer Installer in General in general m A Read me file to be displayed to the customer before the install begins or after it ends m A license agreement t
232. erent actions can be performed The path name of a successful Find action can also be stored in a variable If the result of a successful Find action is stored in a variable the variable always holds the path name of the found item Find action results can also be used as a file s or folder s install location When an item s install location is set to the result of a Find action if the item found is a folder the install location is set to that folder if the item found 1s a file the file s parent directory becomes the install location Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 32 Find Action Item To add a Find action item Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Find actions do not find hidden files or folders 1 Select Item from the Add menu Package Sub Package Illustration 8 21 Add Item menu You may also select Find Action from the Action Item toolbar 2 Select Find in the Add Item dialog and click the OK button Add ltem ES Call External Code Comment Copy Ef Delete 0 DirectX Check EI Disk Prompt El Display Screen Download File Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Edit CONFIG SYS Item EY Edit Text File Item la Goto ltern Include VCT File Item 5 Ini File Entry Displays a billboard during the install Calls an external code library for custom programming Displayed only in the item list has no function during an install An action that copies file s folder s An action that
233. ers when the installer is Screens run The screens can be customized to meet your needs You can control which screens you want to display and when Also you have the option of displaying the default text or adding your own This text can also be localized for other languages See Chapter 18 Cre ating Installers in Different Languages for more information In addition most of the screens allow you to add a customized bitmap Pre built installer screens accessed through the Screens menu are specific VV to Build Targets Any changes you make to these screens will remain associ Ny ated with the current Build Target the one selected in the upper left corner of the archive window See Build Targets on page 15 5 Customizing the You can customize the installer s Background Window You can set the color of the win Background Window dow add a bitmap and display a progress dialog Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 2 Customizing the Background Window To customize the Background Window 1 2 3 Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Select Background from the Screens menu The Background Window dialog box appears Background Window ES M Show background window I Title bar Start color Fed fo Greer 128 Blue 128 Select Red fo Greer 128 Blue 128 Select Image file Set Clear Image placement Center y Border width 0 255 o
234. erties installed or an action 18 General Advanced System Languages Actions Before After performed Call these external codes after this item is installed Call external code Sample32 dll Param 0 Param2 ea Delete Table 17 3 Before and After External Code Setup 4 Click on the New button to add external code to the list The Call External Code Item Properties dialog appears 5 Type the name of your dll file in the External code dll file name field For exam ple 1f your dll file is sample dll type sample dll You can also click on the button and the Select File from Archive dialog box appears The dll files that you added to the Support Files package appear Select the appropriate file and click OK The Call External Code Item Properties window appears 6 Make the following entries Field Action Parameter 1 LONG Type the number you want to be passed to the external code Table 17 4 Call External Code Items Fields Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 17 Using External Code 17 8 Calling External Code Any Time During the Installation Parameter 2 LPSTR Type the string you want to be passed to the external code Variables used here are expanded to their runtime values Store return value in this Type the name of the runtime variable that saves the variable return value This variable can be examined at a later time and different actions can be performed based on its value
235. es IDS_TITLE and IDS_MESSAGE Title This text is used as the title for the Select Install Lan guage dialog Text This text is used as the message for the Select Install Lan guage dialog Table 18 2 Language Properties Fields To create a translation file 1 Once you have set up the installer at the Archive window select Language Prop erties from the File menu The Language Properties window appears Create Translation File Import Translation File Edit Default language is English y Default installer resources English z Default display text Engish Show select enquage dialog IV Use default text Title Select Language Next Please select the language that you would like to use during the installation Illustration 18 2 Language Properties Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages 18 6 Translating a Translation File Translating a Translation File 2 Click on the Create Translation File button The Create Translation File dialog box appears Create Translation File Fa Source language Cancel Use source language as the default translation Illustration 18 3 Create Translation File dialog 3 Select Default Language from the Source language popmenu This is the language used in the archive window 4 Click on the Use source language as default translation checkbox if you want to use the
236. es General page 3 In the Path field enter the path you want to split This can be an actual path name or a variable Next specify the variables for Drive Directory and Name by clicking on each of their buttons If you have not already defined these variables you will be prompted to do so See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 El Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 El System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 19 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 El Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 19 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 Before Property Page on page 9 12 m After Property Page on page 9 13 Stop Action Item You can add a Stop action item to the archive This action item causes the installation to exit immediately Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Stop Action Item 8 71 Following is an example of the Stop dialog that 1s displayed to the customer during the install x Setup was unsuccessful Illustration 8 50 Stop dialog To add a Stop action item 1 Select Stop from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Stop A Stop action item is added to the archive and the Stop Action Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Stop Action Properties General page appears Stop ction Proper
237. et Samples a tie Processing Samples Explorer Delete Details New Folder it Illustration 5 4 Files Folders A checkbox with the minus sign represents a folder that is open A check box with the plus sign represents a folder that 1s closed Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Adding Program Icons Chapter 5 Adding Program Icons You want to delete a file or Select the file or folder and click on the Delete but folder ton The file or folder 1s deleted from the Files Folders window You want to view the Select the file or folder and click on the Details but source pathname for the ton The File Details dialog box appears file or folder The name of the folder appears in the Name field and the source path appears in the Source pathname field Click on the OK button The Files Folders window appears Table 5 2 File Detail Options 5 Click on the Next gt button The Program Icons window appears The Program Icons window allows you to add icons to specific files in your installer Program Icons Icons for files in your installation can be added to the Program Manager or Start Menu Type the name of the Program Manager group or Start Menu sub menu in the field below Default group name Product ame Icons will be created for the following files Click Add to add a new icon to the list Pace Delete Details lt Back Next gt
238. et to one Install font The file will be treated as a font Win31 and WinNT35 file will be copied to the Windows System directory and the font registered Win9 x WinMe WinNT4 0 Win2000 and WinXP file will be copied to the Windows Fonts directory and the font will be registered Register exe dll ocx tlb If the file is an exe dll ocx or tlb that supports self files registration that code will be called at install time Please note that beginning with version 3 6 Installer VISE does not automatically set this option for self registering files that are added to the archive Developers are responsible for manually setting this option for files as needed Don t add to uninstaller If this is checked the file will not be added to the log uninstall log and will not be removed when the uninstaller is run This is useful for fonts or dlls that you do not want to be removed if the user runs the uninstaller Table 8 17 Advanced File Properties Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Find Action Item Find Action Item Installer VISE for Windows 8 31 Function Replace 1f locked If this 15 checked the existing file will be replaced at install time even if the file is locked Attributes Attributes that will be given to the file after 1t has been installed Table 8 17 Advanced File Properties E Installers can postpone selfregistration of certain files until after a re
239. ete search line 8 24 Deleting a file or folder 5 4 items from packages 6 17 Dependencies 8 74 Dependency of 13 3 Dependency Walker 3 16 13 1 13 6 Dependency Watcher 3 16 13 1 13 4 Desc 6 10 Desktop 8 28 8 68 19 3 Destination Path 15 6 Index 4 A B C DeEFGuHitIJIK LM N OPQReSsTUVW KXK YZZ Diagnostic Report 6 43 Dialog Units 11 24 Differences 14 7 different 16 4 Directories 14 3 DirectX version 8 13 DirectX Check 6 18 8 1 Disable cancel button 8 44 Disk 6 19 8 2 Disk Images 15 5 Disk label 8 14 Disk Prompt 6 19 8 2 Display in a separate window 6 27 Display name 8 73 Display Screen 6 19 8 2 Display Screen action 11 3 DLL dependencies 13 4 to 13 5 DLU 11 24 Do not display Setup was unsuccessful dialog 8 71 Do you accept 10 9 Don t add to uninstaller log 8 54 8 57 8 60 8 72 Don t display search dialog 8 33 Don t Install Folder Placeholder 8 36 Download File 6 19 8 2 8 17 Download Sites 3 17 7 6 Drag and Drop 3 4 5 2 6 4 Duplicate 3 10 Duplicating Items 6 17 E Edit AUTOEXEC BAT File 6 19 8 2 Edit CONFIG SYS 6 19 8 2 Edit Layout 12 3 Edit Menu 3 9 Edit Text 11 8 Edit Text File 6 19 8 2 Enable Back button 11 4 End color 8 6 10 2 Env Variable 8 77 Error control 8 74 eSeller tab 15 8 eSellerate 15 8 to 15 9 17 2 Exit 3 9 Export Template 11 6 External Code 6 18 6 28 6 38 8 1 17 1 adding to the archive 17 3 building a dll file 17 1 calling 17 8 calling after install 17
240. exist it 1s created Comment search line Comments lines that match the search criteria If the search line is not found no changes are made to the file Insert text before search Adds text before search line Adds the text specified in line the Text to add field before the line that contains the text specified in Search for the line containing this text field If the search line is not found the line is added to the end of the file Insert text after search line Insert text after search line Adds the text specified in the Text to add field after the line that contains the text spec ified in the Search for the line containing this text field If the search line is not found the line is added to the end of the file Table 8 9 Action Options 4 Click on the Match entire line only checkbox if you want the entire line to match the search text to be successful 5 Ifyou selected Comment search line Insert text before search line or Insert text after search line type the text that you want to search for in the file in the Search text field 6 If you selected any option except the Comment search line type the text that is to be added to the file in the Text to add field Otherwise this text is on a line by itself in the specified position Note Commented lines are skipped 7 Click on the Don t add to uninstaller log checkbox if you do not want the edit CONFIG SYS item to be added to the uninstall log and not to
241. ext specified in the Search for the line containing this text field If the line 1s not found no changes are made to the file Insert text after search line Adds the text specified in the Text to add append edit field after the line that contains the text specified in the Search for the line containing this text field If the search line is not found the line is added to the end of the file Insert text before search line Adds the text specified in the Text to add append field before the line that contains the text specified in Search for the line containing this text field If the search line 1s not found the line is added to the end of the file Make backup of the file The file specified in the File name field is backed up The backed up file has the extension bak Replace search line with text Replaces the line that contains the text specified in Search for the line containing this text field with the text in the Text to add append field If the line 1s not found no changes are made to the file Table 8 10 Action Options 5 Ifyou selected Append text to search line Delete search line Insert text after search line Insert text before search line or Replace search line text in the Action field type the text that you want to search for in the file in the Search for line containing this text field 6 Click on the Match entire line only checkbox if the entire line that you entered in the
242. f the Serial number field is left blank only the User name and Organiza tion fields appear to your customer If both Organization and Serial number fields are left blank only the User name field appears to your customer 5 In the Verification area make entries in the following fields None The serial number will not be verified It will only be stored in the variable SerialNumber Automatic The serial number will be verified automatically by the installer Clicking the Options button displays the Serial Number Generator dialog This dialog is used to generate a list of valid serial numbers which you can use for your installer Custom The serial number will be verified using custom code in a external DLL Clicking the Options dialog displays the Custom Serial Number Verification dialog Table 10 4 Verification Options Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Registration Information Screen 10 13 6 Automatic Verification options Seed value Used to generate a list of serial numbers for your installer This value needs to be a unique number We recommend three digit numbers for the best randomization Also the maximum value supported 1s 2147483647 If this number gets out others will be able to generate serial numbers for your installer Range start The index of where to start generating the serial numbers How many How ma
243. ff the Use default text checkbox 1 Click on the Screens menu and select one of the checked items 2 Click in the Use default text checkbox to turn it off if necessary Select Install Directory M Show this dialog Tr Use default text Choose Destination Location Setup will install 4ProductN ame in the following directory To install to this directory click Next To install to 4 different directory click Browse and select another directory fou can choose not to install ProductName by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Default destination directory win3 x Default destination directory W in95 WinNT ProgramFilesD ir El Set Clear Variable Click to assign Cancel Help Illustration 18 10 Screens menu item Use default text checkbox 3 Click OK to close the window 4 Repeat these steps for all screens the installer will display Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 18 Creating installers in Different Languages 18 12 Editing the Installer Language Properties Editing the Installer You might need to edit the language properties of an installer Language Properties To edit language properties 1 At the Language Properties dialog box select the language for which you want to edit properties The Language Properties dialog box appears with the selected lan guage 2 Select the installer resources you want to associate with this language from the Installer Resource p
244. folder names scroll list displays the contents of the folder selected in the Folders list 2 In the Folders list select the folder that you want to add or from which you want to add files You can change the drive if necessary in the Drives field The contents of the selected folder appear in the File and folder names scroll list You want to add a specific file or folder to an archive Select the file or folder from the File and folder names list and click on the Add button The selected file or folder appears in the Items to add list You want to add all the files or folders displayed in the File and folder names list Click on the Add All button All the files and folders selected appear in the Items to add list Table 6 1 Add Option Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 6 Adding New Folders ee If you select a file only the file is selected If you select a folder all con tents of the folder are selected 4 The file s and or folder s you selected appear in the Items to add list You want to remove a Select the file or folder from the Items to add list Click specific file or folder on the Remove button The file or folder is removed You want to remove all Click on the Remove All button All files and or files and or folders folders are removed from the Items to add list Table 6 2 Remove Options 5 Once you have selected which files and or folders you wa
245. g and select Disk Prompt A Register File Type action item is added to the archive and the Register File Type Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Disk Prompt Item Properties General page appears prengereseesecesessasen Caption Message Disk label Key file name Default path Variable Disk Prompt Properties 21 x Disk Needed Please insert the disk labeled x If the files on this disk can be found in another location for example in another drive enter its full path or click the Browse button to select its path Click to assign Illustration 8 10 Disk Prompt Item Properties General page Function Caption Caption of the disk prompt window Message Message that displays in the disk prompt window The message can be used to prompt for the correct disk or explain the next series of events Disk label The label of the disk that the installer expects The installer will not accept disks unless the disk label matches the string specified in this field If you leave this blank the installer allows any disk with any disk label Key File Name To ensure that the user inserts the disk VISE can check for a key file or disk label If the inserted disk does not have the correct key file then VISE will not accept the disk and will prompt the user for the disk again Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Table 8 5 Disk Prompt Fields Installer VIS
246. g Audio Requirements Setting Audio You can set audio requirements if the customer s machine must support either Wav file Requirements and or Midi file playback for an item or package to be processed To set audio requirements 1 Click on the Audio checkbox 2 Select one of the following from the Audio popmenu a WAV file playback MIDI file playback m WAV and MIDI file playback Setting Resolution You can set resolution requirements if the customer s machine must support a minimum Requirements screen resolution for an item or package to be processed To set resolution requirements 1 Click on the Min resolution checkbox 2 Select one of the following from the Min resolution popmenu m 640 x 480 m 800 x 600 m 1024 x 768 m 1280 x 1024 Setting Color You can set color requirements if the customer s machine must support at least 16 256 Requirements 65356 or 24 million colors for the item to be processed To set color requirements 1 Click on the Min colors checkbox 2 Select one of the following from the Min colors popmenu 16 colors m 256 colors m 65356 colors m 24 million colors Setting Memory You can set memory requirements if the customer s machine must have a minimum Requirements amount of memory to process an item or package To set memory requirements 1 Click on the Min memory checkbox 2 Type the amount of memory that must be available in the Mb field Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Instal
247. ganized by item Diagnostic A report containing troubleshooting information such as files which are not associated with packages packages which do not contain any files and packages that do not have a description Registry Items A report of all registry items in the archive Output filename CAR eport tut ES Open the report file with Notepad when finished cancel Illustration 6 38 Reports dialog 2 Click on the radio button of the report you want to generate 3 The Output filename field displays the directory where the report is to be saved followed by the default name of the report Report txt To change the directory and name of the report click on the button to access the Save as dialog box 4 Click on the Open the report file with Notepad when finished checkbox if you want the report to open immediately with Notepad after it is generated 5 Click the Report button You selected to view the report with The report is saved in the selected loca Notepad tion and the Notepad window appears with a copy of the report Once you have reviewed the report close the window The Archive window appears You did not select to view the report with The report is saved in the selected Notepad location and the Archive window appears Table 6 21 Report Options Testing an Installer Installer VISE allows you to test your installer to make sure it is working properly prior to building the final installer To
248. ge 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Advanced Property The Advanced Property page allows you to select the following search criteria Page m Modified date m Created date E Version number Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Selecting Modified Date as Search Criteria To access the Advanced Property page Click on the Advanced tab on the Properties window of the selected item The Advanced Property page appears General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives B 4 gt MV Modified date MM y fo fo fo M Created date fii y fo fo fo A 0 k CU bee p Illustration 9 1 Advanced Property page Selecting Modified Date You can select the modified date of an item as search criteria as Search Criteria Note This does not apply to folders To select the modified date as search criteria 1 Click on the Modified date checkbox 2 Select one of the following options from the Modified date popmenu Function is Searches for files that match the date in the Modified date fields is not Searches for files that were modified on dates other than the date in the Modified date fields is less than Searches for files that were modified before the date in the Modified date fields is lt or equal Searches for files that were modified before or on the same date in the Modified date fields is greater than Searches for files that were
249. ge file Download data file name o ooo Do not display disconnect dialog after download is complete Cancel Help Illustration 6 37 Installer Properties Web Tab Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Generating Archive Reports 6 43 2 Make entries in the following fields Function Support byte range Your HTTP or FIP server must have support for byte downloads range downloads for this to work If checked all file data will be compressed into one file named visedata dat This file along with viseicat cat and viseicat idx should be placed on your server The Active Web Installer will not download the entire data file it will only download sections of the data file that contain the compressed file data it needs FIP servers must support the REST command Web servers must support HTTP 1 1 or better Generate download data If checked the builder will generate a file that contains storage file the compressed file data If this file is present when the installer runs it will use the file data from this file rather than getting it from the Internet If the file is not found the installer will attempt to get it from the Internet Download data file name Name for the download data file name If left blank the name of the file will be ProductName dat where ProductName will be replaced with the installer s product name If the Product Name is left blank the file name will
250. gning default values in the Variable list m Set Variable action items which execute during installation Form controls buttons checkboxes and radio buttons which are activated by user choices in custom dialogs during installation Runtime variables can be used as placeholders which will be substituted with variable text when the installer is run In the following example we will set up and use a variable for runtime text substitution The basic steps for setting up variables for text substitution are m Declare variables and set initial values m Enter variables in desired text areas m If necessary Add Set Variable actions to reset variables to initial values for install ers which may be run multiple times without quitting between runs To declare a variable and set its initial value 1 From the Archive menu select Variables Build Directives Build Targets Billboards Variables Illustration 19 1 Archive Variables menu item 2 The Variable List window will be displayed Click the New button Variable List x Name Value Comment New Cancel Delete Edit Illustration 19 2 Variable List window Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables 19 8 Entering Variables in Text Areas Externally Setting Variables Entering Variables in Text Areas 3 In the Edit Variable window type in a variable Name You may also enter a default Value for the variable If you wish to add an explanatory
251. has fin ished copying the files m Before or after an archive item has been processed m Anytime during the installation process Calling external code at these points in the installer allows you to customize the installer to do things it does not currently do For example you could create a custom registration dialog and display it to your customers before the installation takes place If the customer registers correctly the registration dialog never appears again if the customer does not reg ister correctly he she is unable to continue This section describes how external code can be called at initialization time before setup begins copying the files or after setup has finished copying the files If you are calling external code before the install the runtime variables TargetDir and TargetDirShort are undefined at this point because the installer has not yet created the target folder If you need to pass these variables to external code add a call external code action item to the archive and move it to the top of the list The external code is then the Chapter 17 Using External Code 17 4 Calling External Code at Initialization first item executed and the TargetDir and TargetDirShort variables are defined at this point To call external code 1 At the Archive window select Installer Properties from the File menu The Installer Properties dialog box appears 2 Click on the External Codes tab The Installer Proper
252. hat Type the source path name of the files or folders you want to replace Replace with Type the name of the replacement source path Case sensitive search Turn on this checkbox to run case sensitive searches These searches differentiate between names such as MyApp and MYAPP Table 6 26 Edit Source Directories 3 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears The archive is now updated with the new source path name Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Active Web Installers Your users will greatly benefit from technical breakthroughs that seamlessly address data Active Web Installer Setup Installer VISE for Windows transfer rate interrupted connections and various hardware configurations for a conve nient trouble free download and installation over the Web End users frequently do not need all the files contained in an installer Previously on line users faced an often daunting task of either downloading complete installers or choosing just the right installer for their system MindVision s Active Web Installer technology simplifies the user experience by first downloading a small installer which can retrieve just the pieces needed for the user s specific requirements Users will benefit from reduced download times reduced risk of download glitches and the most up to date software available Developers will benefit from r
253. hat must be accepted before the customer can continue with the installation mA customized splash screen Minimum installation requirements such as the operating system and minimum memory For complete information about available options see Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Chapter 4 Designing an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Building an Installer with the Archive Wizard Selecting the Product Name and Directory Installer VISE for Windows Installer VISE provides you with an Archive Wizard which automates the process of creat ing an installer It 1s recommended that you use the Archive Wizard if this is your first installer If you need more details on any of the information presented in this chapter see Chapter 6 Creating an Installer The Archive Wizard automates the process of building a basic installer To build an installer with the Archive Wizard 1 Launch Installer VISE The Archive window appears 2 Select Archive Wizard from the Tools menu The Archive Wizard dialog box appears The Archive Wizard window allows you to enter the name of your product and select the default directory where you want your product installed on the customer s computer Archive Wizard The Archive Wizard will quide you through the necessary steps of creating an installation for your software On the following screens you will be asked a series of questions Your responses will be
254. he batch file and click on the Save button The Archive window appears After the batch file has been created you can edit it to execute other commands or launch other programs if you wish Your command line switch can specify the build target for the installer For example InstVise exe F temp file vct b F temp setup exe target 1 will use the target1 build target and save the installer as setup exe Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Copying the Installer to Installation Media Copying the Installer to Floppy Diskettes Copying the Installer to CD ROM Maintaining Archives Updating An Archive Copying the Installer to Installation Media Once you have built the installer you need to copy it to the type of installation media you want to use Installer VISE allows you to create Setup programs for floppy diskette CD ROM or Internet distribution Setup programs can be compressed and segmented for floppy disk installs or can be created to install uncompressed files from CD ROMs Single file executables can also be created for Internet or File Server distribution You do not need to zip your setup files before posting them for downloading If you are creating a floppy diskette installation after you have built the installer you have a main setup executable and possible multiple segment files depending on the size of your files Copy the main executable to di
255. he user from typing or editing text in the edit text field Dimensions Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note Dimensions are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Table 11 9 Edit Text Item Properties Group Box Properties A Group Box item is simply a nice visual way to group related items in your custom screens In the Group Box Item properties window below the dimensions fields are enclosed by a group box entitled Dimensions Group Box Item Ea Group Box Top 46 Height 85 omes Dimensions Left es Width 1125 Illustration 11 21 Group Box Item Properties Window Property Description Title Type in the text you wish to be displayed for this group box item It is drawn in the upper left corner of the group box Dimensions Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen
256. hed This field defaults to Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer Edit this field 1f necessary Table 10 14 Finished message 2 Fields 5 Select one of the following radio buttons and type the appropriate message in the corresponding field Function Yes I want to This field defaults to Yes I want to restart my computer now If the customer selects this radio button during the install his her computer is automatically restarted No I will This field defaults to No I will restart my computer later If the customer selects this radio button during the install his her computer is not automatically restarted Table 10 15 Finished Message 2 Options 6 Type a message in the Remove any field This field defaults to Remove any disks from their drives and then click Close to complete setup 7 You can use the default bitmap displayed or select your own customized bitmap to add to the Finished screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap
257. his is a list of dll files that are part of the Support Files package 3 Sample32 dll i Cancel Illustration 17 4 Select File from Archive dialog The dll files that you added to the Support Files package appears Select the appro priate file and click on the OK button The Call External Code Item Properties window appears 5 Make the following entries Parameter 1 LONG Type the number to be passed to the external code Parameter 2 LPSTR Type the string you want to be passed to the external code Variables used here are expanded to their runtime values Store return value in this Type the name of the runtime variable that saves the variable return value This variable can be examined at a later time and different actions can be performed based on its value Table 17 2 Call External Code Item Fields Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 17 Using External Code 17 6 Clearing External Code 6 Click on the OK button The External Codes page of the Installer Properties dialog box appears with the name of the selected file similar to the following Installer Properties x General Uninstaller External Codes System Requirements Initialization Sample32 dll Parami 0 Param2 Set Clear Before install Set Clear After install Set Clear OK Cancel Help Illustration 17 5 Installer Properties External Codes page 7 Click on the OK button The Ar
258. ic Illustration 9 9 Multiple actions with OR logic Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Installer VISE for Windows Build Directives Property Page 9 11 Build Directives Property Page Installer VISE for Windows You want to edit an action Select the action item and click on the Edit button item you selected The Select Action Item dialog box appears Make the appropriate entry and click on the OK button The Action Property page appears You want to delete an Select the action item and click on the Delete button action item The action item is deleted Table 9 6 Editing and Deleting Actions Build directives allow you to conditionally include or exclude items folders files and action items from your installer at build time You set build directives for an item through its Build Directives Property page To access the Build Directives Property page 1 Click on the Build Directives tab from the Properties window of the selected item The Build Directives Property page appears Copy Action Properties EES General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Je alo Build Directives J ny Match Check All Basic Uncheck All Deluxe Deluxe Fonts Illustration 9 10 Build Directives property page 2 The Build Directive list will display any build directive that has been set up in the Build Directive window as well as the Any Match item
259. ic 2 Locate the information you want to display and double click or click on the Dis play button The topic is displayed Using the Help Index Page The Index page lists topics alphabetically To use the Index page 1 Click on the Index tab The Index page appears 2 Type the subject you want to view A list of topics appears on the bottom of the page similar to the following Help Topics Installer VISE Help 24x Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for Find Action Finished Message Finished Message 2 Folder Item General Installation Properties El Generating a Batch File Goto Action Help About Installer VISE Help Menu Commands Help Topics Include CT File Item xl Display Erit Cancel Illustration 3 17 Installer VISE Help Index Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 20 Using the Help Find Page 3 Locate the information you want to display and double click or click on the Dis play button The topic is displayed Using the Help Find Page The Find page allows you to find all topics that contain a specific word or phrase To use the Find page 1 Click on the Find tab The Find page appears 2 Type the word or phrase you want to find and click on the Find Now button A list of words is displayed in the middle of the page to help narrow your search if necessary similar to the following Help Topics Installer VISE Help
260. icating what 1s to be done with the file Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Properties 21x General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B f gt Add to PATH 2T argetDirShort Action Add text to beginning of file y MA dd text to beginning of file E Seach A Add text to end of file before WIN Comment search line Insert text before search line Text to aq insert text after search line fa Match entire life omy a T Don t add to uninstaller Illustration 8 15 Action popmenu items Function Add text to beginning of Adds the text in the Text to add field to the beginning of file the file If the file does not exist it is created Add text to end of file Adds the text in the Text to add field to the end of the before WIN file before the WIN if it appears If the file does not exist it 1s created Comment search line Comments lines that match the search criteria If the search line is not found no changes are made to the file Insert text after search line Adds the text specified in the Text to add field after the line that contains the text specified in the Search for the line containing this text field If the search line is not found the line is added to the end of the file before the WIN statement Insert text before search Adds the text specified in the Text to add field before the line line that contains the text specified in the Search for
261. ied in the Env Variable field to the variable specified in the Variable name field Installer VISE enables this feature when the Get environment variable option 1s selected Default Value Installer VISE assigns this value to the variable specified in the Variable name field when the environment variable specified in the Env Variable field does not exist Table 8 47 Variable Item General Property Options See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Property pages 13 E System Property Page on page 9 4 19 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Several of the windows and dialog boxes in Installer VISE share common properties This chapter addresses setting the following common property pages 13 a Advanced Property Page on page 9 1 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 19 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on pa
262. ield appears in the Description area of the Select Components screen 1f you are adding the list package to a Package or the Select Sub components screen if you are adding it to a Sub package 5 If you build the installer to integrate with the eSellerate e commerce system an optional service make a selection from the Purchase popmenu The Purchase set ting allows you to specify whether the package should be shown or hidden as the result of an online purchase If you are not using eSellerate with this package the default setting Has No Effect is correct For more information on eSellerate and 13 the Purchase popmenu see eSeller tab on page 15 8 6 Close the Properties page window The Archive window appears Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 16 Rearranging the List of Packages and Sub packages Assigning Items to Packages and Sub packages Rearranging the List of Packages and Sub packages Packages and sub packages are displayed in the Archive window in the order in which they were created Installer VISE provides the following menu options to help you rearrange the list of packages or sub package To access this menu select a package or sub package with the right mouse button and drag it to the appropriate location Function Insert Here Moves the package or sub package to the selected location in the list Move Here Assigns a package or sub package to the selected packag
263. ile The Snapshot Wizard dialog will appear Follow the steps listed below to create your snapshot file run your third party installers and automatically create an Installer VISE snapshot installer Saving the Snapshot File The first screen you see asks you to either create a new snapshot file or open an existing one Snapshot Wizard x The Snapshot Wizard will guide you through the necessary steps of creating an installer based on before and after snapshots of your machine On the following screens you will perform a series of steps to create this snapshot installer First create a new or open an existing snapshot file where information is stored about your computer s directories files and registry entries before you run any installer s Snapshot File AAA A C Open an existing snapshot file File HAT EMP Snapshot ven Browse I Automatically delete snapshot file when finished Bact Cancel Illustration 14 2 Create a new snapshot file Select the Create a new snapshot file radio button to create a new snapshot file that will capture the current state of the machine Select the Open an existing snapshot file radio button to open an existing snapshot file that contains the state of the machine that was captured at a previous time This may be useful if you are using the snapshot as a diagnostic tool or you wish to add a new third party installer to an existing install set If you select this o
264. ile Folder Y os Pre Screens Items L Endofday txt Text Document M Ae DNS 1 7 Endofmonth txt Text Document Vv aia i 17 Endofyear txt Text Document v pplication y Application window A Application 3 ject Folder File Folder v DY _ _ Letter iv Beginning Exercises s Memo Y 3 Advanced Exercises IL Report z 4 Samples MIE Shortcut to MyProduct 3 3 Y 3 Database Samples l o Stop installation iv Spreadsheet Samples 3 Word Processing Samples Status Bar For Help press F1 Illustration 3 5 Installer VISE Archive Window The following table lists the parts of the Archive window and a description of each part Description Application Window The window within which you create archives Application Control menu The menu that allows you to manipulate the Archive window Title Bar The bar at the top of the Archive window This bar displays the name of the current archive you are working in Standard Toolbar A bar that displays the most commonly used functions as icon buttons Action Item Toolbars 1 Bars that displays action items that can be added to an and 2 archive as icon buttons Build Toolbar A bar that displays the currently active build target enables the changing of the currently active build target and contains buttons for building and testing of installers Menu bar A list of menu names Status ba
265. ile playback Action if requirement is This field represents the message that appears to the cus not met tomer if the audio requirements are not met Select one of the following Warn and allow to continue Notify and exit setup Table 6 18 Audio Options 6 Click in the QuickTime checkbox if the target machine must have a specific ver sion of QuickTime for Windows installed for this installer to run Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 42 Setting Installer Web Properties Make an entry in the following field Function Is QuickTime Complete these two fields for your minimum version requirement For example for QuickTime 4 1 enter 4 in the first field and 1 in the second Action if requirement is This field represents the message that appears to the cus not met tomer if the target machine does not have the minimum required version of QuickTime for Windows Select one of the following Warn and allow to continue Notify and exit setup Table 6 19 QuickTime Options 7 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Setting Installer Web To set installer web properties Properties 1 At the Installer Properties dialog box click on the Web tab The Installer Proper ties Web page appears Installer Properties i q x General Uninstaller External Codes System Requirements Web T Support byte range downloads Generate download data stora
266. ilent as standard installation packages Shortcut support Built in VISE compression decompression technology compresses the installa tion files into an installer program and when the end user runs the installer pro gram the installation files will be decompressed and placed in the appropriate installation destinations Built in action commands for the installer to delete move find rename and copy files and directories on the end users system Display messages to end users and install or don t install files based on the end user s response Add edit and update entries to the registry and system INI files Edit the AUTOEXEC BAT CONFIG SYS and other text files Attach DLLs for complete customization of the installer Run other installers and or applications as part of the installer Stop or Exit the installation process based on conditions that must be met for the installation to continue Open an Internet address as part of the installation Display billboards and BMP JPEG or GIF graphics during the installation Built in conditions to always replace never replace replace if newer and or the same as the target file or ask the end user installation options Built in check for QuickTime extension Support for automatic replacement of in use files Built in support for installation and registration of fonts Built in password protection for installer executable Installer VISE for Windows Getting Assistance from
267. ill expire after three days 13 See Activating Installer VISE on page 2 6 for more information Your copy of Installer VISE is activated The Installer VISE splash screen does not appear to the customer and the installer does not automatically expire Table 6 23 Registration Options 2 The Save Installer As dialog box appears Save Installer As Save ir 3 work in progress File name MyProduct Setup exe Save as type Executable Files exe Cancel Zi Illustration 6 39 Save Installer As dialog Installer VISE automatically assigns an exe extension to the installer 3 Select the location where you want to save the Installer in the Save in popmenu 4 Type the name for your installer in the File name field and click on the Save but ton This field defaults to Setup The Building window appears Once Installer VISE is done building the installer the Archive window appears You are now ready to copy the installer to either floppy diskettes or a CD ROM Generating a Batch File There are two command line switches that can be used with Installer VISE to update files in the archive and build your installer Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows b Build Installer 6 47 b Build Installer Causes Installer VISE to build an installer from the specified archive and save it at a spec ified location For example InstVise exe F temp MyProduct VCT b F temp
268. in the Screen Editor Default Text A TF Required Input P Auto Scroll Multiline T Password M Number I Want Return Horizontal Scroll Y Border I Auto HScroll T Read only y T Vertical Scroll Use text file y Alignment Left y Left 75 Width 36 Top 109 Height 14 Wariable Click to assign Cancel Illustration 11 20 Edit Text item Properties Window Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 18 Chapter 11 Custom Screens Edit Text Properties Property Description Default Text Type in the initial text you wish to be displayed in this edit text item NOTE You can also enter a variable name here if you wish to dynamically display text See the section below on Variable Substitution Use Text File You can optionally read text out of a text file to be dis played in this edit text item Type in the relative path where the text file will be located during the installa tion The combo box list displays run time variables for some of the typical directories For example if the text file will be on the installation CD for your software you might enter CDROMDrive License txt Alignment Determines how text is aligned in the static text item The possible values are Left Center and Right Variable You can assign a user defined variable to this edit text item Click and select the variable you wish to associate with this edit text item IMPORTANT When the user exits the cu
269. in your snapshot installer They can still be included if you need to This is very different from the Exclude Directories or Exclude Registry Keys lists which actually skip selected directories or registry keys during the snapshot scan For more information read about the Show SkipList items checkbox later in this chapter A A A A Once you have completed the above select the Next button 9 This screen automatically starts the snapshot scan process which captures the state of your machine During the scan status information will be displayed showing the progress of the scan You can stop the scan at any time by pressing the Stop but Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard 14 6 Run Installers ton The scan may take several minutes depending on the size of your drives and registry Step 3 Take Snapshot 4 snapshot is now being taken of the selected directories files and registry entries This task may take several minutes to perform Press the Stop button to cancel snapshot a Scanning files k C Program Files Plus SYSTEM Illustration 14 5 Take Snapshot Screen Once the scan has completed select the Next button Run Installers 10 Now that the snapshot file has stored the state of your machine you are ready to run your third party installer s To run an installer simply type in the path and file name of the installer you wish to run and then click the Run button You may also use
270. indows 3 1 or Windows NT 3 5 This variable allows you to use the correct location of the startup folder on the start menu that might be different for different customers running the same system different for Win dows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP and different for other languages With this path you can add new items to the startup menu or remove items from it Items that are in the startup folder are automatically started when Windows boots The SysDir variable contains the path name of the current Windows System directory For example C Windows System The SysDrive variable contains the drive letter where the current Windows System directory is located For example C The TargetDir variable contains the long path name of the target directory for the installation files For example C Program Files MyProduct See Customizing the Select Install Directory Screen on page 10 14 for more information on this runtime variable The TargetDirShort variable contains the short path name of the target directory for the installation files For example C PROGRA 1 MYPROD 1 See Customizing the Select Install Directory Screen on page 10 14 for more information on this runtime variable The TargetDrive variable contains the target drive letter of the destination path name for the installation files For example C The TempDir variable contains the destina
271. ing m The localized archives contain file names package names and descriptions in the selected language However the file assignment to packages disk information replace option etc are the same as the original archive m The messages generated by the installer are in the selected language You can create installers that are localized for a single language such as a Spanish installer or installers that are localized for multiple languages such as a Spanish French German installer Please note that localization requires a special language file file extension vlg for each language that the installers will display Language files reside in the Installer VISE Support folder and provide localized text for built in installer components such as buttons Installer VISE ships with the English vlg file Other language files are available for pur chase from MindVision or you can create your own To create your own language file make a copy of English vlg and translate the text strings Then save the file with an appropriate name such as German vlg If you prefer to purchase language files you can find more information on our web site at http www mindvision com pricing html To order call 402 323 6600 or contact sales mindvision com In addition to language files another file type required for Installer VISE localization 1s the translation file file extension dat If you create an installer for any language other than yo
272. inished Message 2 Screen ir Oana Wad ed bps aR 10 25 Custom Screens oc 06 t ent t tenes 11 1 VEIS aio a Bice ae a doo oe ae a ha ee ee he ee at cei a ake 11 1 Sample Custom Screens arde sica shack ain da eee eds 11 2 Creating a New Display Screen action aa A aa 11 3 Editine Built in Sereens AE AAA AE 11 4 Edinin CUA oC NS erotica A ete ae eae ees shen ee ert 11 5 Menu and Toolbar Commands 2 d0n0d aban bh ae era be da eS ene Se ees 11 5 Edine Tens 10 the edited finest oh AAA oe ae 11 22 Customizing the Archive Window 0405 12 1 ATCHIVE Window OVERVIEW 20 ARA ee eh ala a A AAA A AAA 12 1 User definable Archive Window Layouts 2 dd a6 oe bea be ee eRe ees 12 1 Defining an Archive Window Layout 25 265 bodg we aurd ee Sed keene A 12 2 Ay GUE Set arado ES No alte ais 12 4 Customizing th Layout MENTA AAA 12 4 Installer VISE Tools 00 66 eees 13 1 Wisual Basic Projecte Wizard a a Ae asta ae de Oo RSE aca eR ew Date Wess 13 2 Dependency Watcher ri Wives exis AE VEE ee ewe ed ass 13 4 Dependenci Walker cie iaa AAA Mk Parente aes 13 6 WEI AGC HIVE AAA 13 7 Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate o ooooooooooroooorr eee ees 13 8 Using the Snapshot Wizard 0 cence 14 1 Soaps hot OVENI a NI a ds bd er 14 1 N Patrica Snapshot aa ene ea tbat a hoe ae oes 14 1 A O len ee Aaah t 14 5 Advanced Project Management 0 0 c eee eee 15 1 Build Directv 6s ow ba fed
273. irectory program folder name and selected packages What is displayed depends on which screens are displayed to the user Read Me Message Display a message screen with information that will be displayed to the user after the files have been installed Table 3 7 Screens Menu Commands Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Add Menu Function Display a finished installation message that offers three possible check boxes to perform an action that the user selects once the installation has finished Each check box that is checked will be displayed to the user The text for each text box can be edited in the language file This is so these strings can be localized for other lan guages Each one of these options can launch another application and pass parameters to that application 3 14 Command Finished Message Finished Message 2 Add Menu Display an alternative finished installation message that gives the user the option of restarting the computer Table 3 7 Screens Menu Commands Items Package Sub Package Illustration 3 10 Add Menu The Add menu offers the following commands Command Function Items Opens the Add Items dialog allowing you to select one or more action items to be added to the archive You can select and add items one by one without leaving the dialog or you can select multiple items and click Add Add Items lel ES
274. ision com Illustration 7 16 Installation progress The User s After a web installer downloads the necessary file groups the data 1s saved locally and Subsequent does not need to download them again unless they have changed Experiences When the user to runs the web installer again with the same package selection the follow ing message will be displayed Installer VISE Setup x 2 The installer has all the files necessary to complete the chosen install Click Install to begin the install now or click Update to check the web for more current versions of the install files Update Cancel Illustration 7 17 Message Installer has all necessary files If the Install button is clicked the initial installation will be repeated Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer 7 10 The User s Subsequent Experiences If the Update button is clicked the user is asked to initiate an internet connection The installer then checks the data on the web server If the local data is the same as that on the server the following message is displayed Installer VISE Setup x yes UL No download was necessary the files contained in the installer are up to date Illustration 7 18 No download necessary If the catalog on the server indicates that the data in the user s installer is older than that on the server the necessary updated file groups are downloaded and the user can con tinue with the
275. ister File Type 6 20 8 3 Registry Entry 6 20 8 3 Rename 6 20 8 3 Run Application 6 20 8 3 Shortcut 6 21 8 4 Show Hide Progress 6 21 8 4 Split Path 6 21 8 4 Stop 6 21 8 4 System Service 6 21 8 4 Trace 6 21 8 4 Variable 6 21 8 4 Action Links checking 13 8 Active Web Installers 7 1 Add 6 5 Add All 6 5 Add Files Dialog 6 4 Add Items 8 5 11 3 Add Menu 3 14 Add text to beginning of file 8 20 8 22 8 24 Add text to end of file 8 22 8 24 Add text to end of file before WIN 8 20 Adding Action Items 6 18 6 21 Adding Advanced Items 6 23 Adding Existing Files and Folders 6 4 Adding Installer Screens 6 23 Adding items to packages 6 16 to sub packages 6 16 After Install 6 38 17 4 Align 11 21 All statements must be true AND logic 9 10 Always replace option 8 10 8 50 8 63 AND logic 9 10 Append text to search line 8 24 Application Control menu 3 6 Application path 13 5 Application Window 3 6 Archive 3 2 changing location 3 3 changing name 3 3 opening existing 3 2 updating 6 48 Archive Menu 3 15 Archive Reports 6 43 Archive Window 3 2 6 1 to 6 2 layout 12 1 parts of 3 6 searching for items 6 2 Archive Wizard 3 16 5 1 Ask At Build 15 5 Ask User 8 28 8 67 Ask user replace option 8 10 8 50 8 63 Assigning External Code 6 28 At least one statement must be true OR logic 9 10 Audio Options 6 41 Authenticode support 6 35 Auto HScroll 11 15 AutoCreate Updater Archive 3 8 16 1 Automatic Verification 10 13 B B
276. its value Table 17 5 External Code Fields 6 Click on the OK button The File Properties dialog box appears Editing External Code To edit external code 1 At the Call External Code Action Properties dialog box select the Before or After tab The Before or After page appears Chapter 17 Using External Code Installer VISE for Windows Deleting External Code 17 9 2 Select the external code you want to edit and click on the Edit button The Call External Code Item Properties dialog box appears 3 Make the appropriate changes and click on the OK button Deleting External Code To delete external code 1 At the Call External Code Action Properties dialog box click on the Before or After tab The Before or After page appears 2 Select the external code you want to delete and click on the Delete button The external code is deleted Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 17 Using External Code 17 10 Deleting External Code Chapter 17 Using External Code Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 18 18 1 Creating Installers in Different Languages About the Localization Features About Language VLG Files Language VLG Files Vs Translation DAT files Installer VISE for Windows This chapter contains information about the Installer VISE localization feature that allows you to create installers in different languages Installer VISE allows you to create installers for different languages that do the follow
277. ive Install remove change the state check the state of system services for Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP Detect DirectX version information Prompt the user for a floppy disk CD or hard disk location not in the set of installation disks Specify an Install From location to install files from a location outside the com pressed segments Default screen text available in all supported languages When you purchase Installer VISE you get our commitment to the best technical support available But we need your help to help you better Below are some tips that save you time Your purchase is important to us but your long term commitment to our products is more important Call us at 402 323 6600 for assistance To provide you with the information you need in the quickest and most accurate manner it is important that you read the pertinent information that addresses the operation you are trying to perform Read the pertinent topics again to assure yourself that you understand the features and their implementation within Installer VISE Chapter 1 Introduction Contacting Us Chapter 1 Introduction Contacting Us You can send an e mail message to winsupport mindvision com Often a written sum mary of your problem 1s more concise than a phone call We will send you a response within 24 hours with answers to your questions You may also call us at 402 323 6600 for technical support Our regular office hours are
278. ive Tools Internet Layout Help ele el 3 Support Files Size Type Modified Date 3 Typical Setup O ASAS 2186KB Application 10 5400 3 46 PM a Compact Setup 7 AspneFilt dll 624KB Application Exten 10 5 00 3 46 PM J Silent Setup C ComCat dll 343KB Application Exten 10 5 00 3 46 PM QU Pre Screens Items Y Cti3d32 dll 60KB Application Exten 10 5 00 3 46 PM L1 MSVBM50 dil 32KB Application Exten 10 5 00 3 46 PM LJ Ole ut32 dll 45KB Application Exten 10 5 00 3 46 PM L OlePro32 dll 161KB Application Exten 10 5 00 3 46 PM 1 StdOle2 tlb 365KB Type Library 10 5 00 3 46 PM lt e K al el KS KA rrrrrrre For Help press F1 Illustration 13 6 Archive After Adding Selected Files If Add duplicate files is checked all checked files will be added otherwise only files that are not already part of the installer will be added The Installer VISE Dependency Watcher can be used to watch an executable run and determine implicit and dynamic DLL dependencies To use the Dependency Watcher 1 Select Dependency Watcher from the Tools menu The Dependency Watcher win dow will appear Dependency Watcher x Enter a file s path and click Launch to watch an application run and determine implicit and dynamic module dependencies Application path o Browse Launch Module
279. ivileges are required for the installer to run Note This field is only applicable with Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP Table 6 16 System Requirements Platform Options 4 Click in the Min Resolution checkbox if the target machine must support a mini mum screen resolution for this installer to run Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Setting Installer System Requirements 6 41 Make entries in the following fields Function Select Min resolution This field represents the minimum resolution that the target machine must have to run this installer Select one of the following 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 Min colors This field represents the minimum colors that the target machine must support Select one of the following 16 colors 256 colors 65356 colors 24 million colors Action if requirement is This field represents the message that appears to the cus not met tomer if the minimum resolution requirements are not met Select one of the following Warn and allow to continue Notify and exit setup Table 6 17 Min Resolution and Colors Options 5 Click on the Audio checkbox if the target machine must support either Wav file and or Midi file playback support for this installer to run Function Select Audio Select one of the following WAV file playback MIDI file playback WAV and MIDI file playback WAV or MIDI f
280. ld For custom screens change the default text to the name you wish to give to your custom screen Table 8 6 Screen Properties Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Download File Action Item 8 17 Function Edit Screen The edit screen button opens the Screen Editor for custom screens or opens the edit window for standard screens For complete information on custom screens and screen editing see Chapter 11 Custom Screens Enable Back Button For built in screens this checkbox determines whether the Back button will be enabled or disabled Table 8 6 Screen Properties See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 E Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 E System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 19 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 19 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 E After Property Page on page 9 13 Download File Action You can add a Download File action to the archive using the Download File action item item command This action item is used to download a file from an FTP or HTTP server at any point during the installation process To add a Download File action item 1 Select Download File from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add
281. le 6 10 Archive Items Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Adding Action Items to an Archive 6 21 Adding Action Items to an Archive Installer VISE for Windows Archive item Description Shortcut a Creates a shortcut to the installer on the customer s system when the installer is run on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP See Shortcuts Action Item on page 8 65 Show Hide Progress Shows or hides the progress dialog See Show Hide Progress Action Item on page 8 68 057 Split Path Extracts the drive directory and name from a path and stores the results in variables See Split Path Action Item on page 8 69 E Stop action items cause the installation to exit immediately ee See Stop Action Item on page 8 70 Stop E This action item installs removes or checks the state of Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP system service See System Services Action Item on page 8 72 System Services e Trace il Displays text in the debug window of the installer See Trace Item on page 8 75 Variable zA Adds a new variable item to the archive See Variable Item on page 8 75 Table 6 10 Archive Items The following are the procedures for adding action items to an archive To add action items to an archive 1 Create the action item by selecting the appropriate action it
282. lePath variable will contain the path name where the download file is being stored Organization The Organization variable holds the organization name entered by the customer in the Registration Information dialog See Customizing the Registration Information Screen on page 10 11 for more information Saving this information in the registry is a good example of how this variable can be used 13 See Registry Entry Action Item on page 8 58 for more information ProductName The ProductName variable holds the product s name This value is set in the Product name field of the Installer Properties dialog box The variable ProductName is replaced with this value The installer replaces any occurrence of the runtime variable ProductName with this string See Setting Installer Properties on page 6 30 for more information This variable is frequently used in the screen dialogs to display the correct product name See Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens for more information This variable is also used extensively in the language file to display your product s name in the setup dialogs See Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages for more infor mation about the language file A Message box action item is another good example of where this variable can be used See Message Box Action Item on page 8 47 for more information ProgramFilesDir The ProgramFilesDir variable contains the path name
283. ler VISE for Windows Languages Property Page Languages Property Page Installer VISE for Windows The Language Property page allows you to select languages that must match the install languages for the item or package to be processed To access the Language Property page 1 Click on the Language tab from the Properties window of the selected item The Language Property page appears Copy Action Properties x Install this item if install v language is Afrikaans Check All Albanian Uncheck All Arabic Arabic Saudi Arabia Arabic Iraq Arabic Egypt Arabic Libya Arabic Algeria Arabic Morocco Arabic Tunisia Arabic Oman Arahic Memen K K K K K K K K K K K lt Illustration 9 4 Language Property page A list of possible languages appears in the Install this item if language is field The install language must be one of the checked languages for the item to be processed during the installation 2 Select install or system from the Install this item if popmenu If install is selected the item will be installed executed based upon the selection made at installer runt ime in the Select Language dialog Select Language E4 Please select the language that you would like to use during the installation Illustration 9 5 Select Language dialog The use of the Select Language dialog is determined by the Show select l
284. les My Application Name myplugin ini These three extracted variables offer increased flexibility in processing Find action results You can use them to delete one occurrence of a file by restricting activity to a single direc tory while leaving any other occurrences untouched They also could show where to install a file as in the following example The Split Path action item can help install the file myplugin ini to the same directory as an existing file plugin ini m Use a Find action to locate the first occurrence of plugin ini on local hard drives and assign a variable to its full path Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 70 Stop Action Item Apply Split Path to that variable which returns variables for drive directory and name m Use the directory variable as the Install to location for myplugin ini under Advanced File Properties To add a Split Path action item 1 Select Split Path from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Split Path A Split Path item is added to the archive and the Split Path Prop erties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Split Path Properties General page appears Split Path Properties 24x General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B Path f Drive Click to assign Directory Click to assign Name Click to assign Illustration 8 49 Split Path Properti
285. les atid Folden iia Bia ed Darel ase ards 6 4 Creating Packages Sub Packages and List Packages o o oooooooooooooooooo 6 7 VCS o e AP Vea ante o Ge Ae ed ha ae Solo eae Ot ha E 6 8 Setting Existing Package Options osii idee ie Bebe oS tees doe Shae eG bee a eee ads 6 9 ADO SUD PACA ri a MAGS AS 6 12 I DOUt ist Parkies eds A EA 6 14 Assigning Items to Packages and Sub packages o o ooooooooooorr eee eee eens 6 16 Manacine Package tems a eee LPG we iva bad te AAA 6 17 Addins Archive mas eresten Ea En Gla wes so Bld a hang he atin itm Sosa RAs Bk wee AAE A 6 18 About Acton MEMS cardiaca rd 6 18 Adding Action Items toan Archive 9 24040504 aana tks OY ee ARS E Sa RSs 6 21 Modding Installer Screens aislar 6 23 ACCESS ie astaller Screens dia a Medien ethos AE AS 6 23 Listo Installer Screens ia ASAS ae 6 23 Addins Automated Billboardi AAA AA ee oe Heda eek 6 24 Assioning External Code da AS EA Caw Ee Se ON heed CaM haw eee as 6 28 Sette ile Options reis tye an haa wean A nn Bare ee ea A eae wd 6 28 Setting Folder OPONI 3 6250 scadeteeeeat aaa iria 6 29 seins Installer Properties casi ak cake o pr a a a a ae 6 30 Setting Installer General Properties sick dis bce Bids Coed SS oh oes te ened Chace 6 31 Setting Installer Uninstaller Properties mita oe ee eee bee PERE 6 35 Setting Installer External Code Properties 43245 0 820bntnieeasiiie ina 6 38 Setting Installer System Requirements nda E ATA AA A A 6 38 Installer VISE for Wind
286. less dialog that can be left open Create Program Item s Creates a program item in the archive See Program Items on page 8 52 Create Shortcut s Creates a shortcut in the archive See Shortcuts Action Item on page 8 65 for more information Table 3 6 Edit Menu Commands View Menu The View menu allows you to display or hide the Standard toolbar the Action Items tool bars the Build Toolbar or the Status bar v Standard Toolbar v Action Items Toolbar 1 v Action Items Toolbar 2 Build Toolbar v Status Bar Illustration 3 8 View Menu Screens Menu The Screens menu allows you select the commands to add different screens to be dis played during the installation to the end user See Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens for Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Screens Menu Installer VISE for Windows 3 11 more information on using Installer VISE s standard screens For information on creating your own custom screens see Chapter 11 Custom Screens Background Window v Background Window Splash Screen v Welcome Screen Read Me Message Requirements Screen License Agreement Verify Password Registration Information v Select Install Directory Select Install Type Select Components Select Program Folder v Ready to Install Message Read Me Message v Finished Message Finished Message 2 Illustration 3 9
287. lete description of Check Box prop erties see Check Box Properties on page 11 11 New Radio Button This command creates a standard radio button con trol For complete description of Radio Button properties see Radio Button Properties on page 11 12 New Combo Box This command creates a standard combo control box control For complete description of Combo Box properties see Combo Box Properties on page 11 14 New Static Text This command creates a standard static text item For complete description of Static Text properties 13 see Static Text Properties on page 11 16 New Edit Text B This command creates a standard edit text field For complete description of Edit Text properties see 14 Edit Text Properties on page 11 17 New Group Box E This command creates a standard Group Box item For complete description of Group Box properties 13 see Group Box Properties on page 11 20 New Picture This command creates a standard Picture item that allows you to display a bitmap image For complete description of Picture properties see Picture Prop erties on page 11 21 Table 11 3 Screen Editor Layout Menu Items Chapter 11 Custom Screens Installer VISE for Windows Button Properties 11 9 Button Properties Button properties can be set in the Button Item Properties window Button Item Ed Wariable Click to assig
288. lit Path Extracts the drive directory and name from a path and stores the results in variables 19 See Split Path Action Item on page 8 69 E Stop action items cause the installation to exit immediately See Stop Action Item on page 8 70 Stop E System Services E This action item installs removes or checks the state of NT system service 13 See System Services Action Item on page 8 72 Trace 5 Displays text in the debug window of the installer 13 See Trace Item on page 8 75 Variable zA Adds a new variable item to the archive See Variable Item on page 8 75 Table 8 1 Action item Overview To create new archive items 1 From the Add menu select Items Package Sul Package Illustration 8 1 Add Items menu Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Billboard Action Item Billboard Action Item Installer VISE for Windows 8 5 2 In the Add Items dialog select the archive item s you wish to add You can select and add items one by one without leaving the dialog or you can select multiple items and click Add When you re finished click Close Add Items Billboard Call External Code Comment Download File FS Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Edit CONFIG SYS Item EY Edit Text File Item lg Goto ltem Include VCT File Item 5 Ini File Entry item Description OL
289. ll be shown in the order listed here Click on the Details button to edit the settings for each screen Welcome Screen Read Me Message jLicense Agreement 4 Verify Password Registration Information Select Install Directory Select Install Type Select Program Folder Ready To Install Message Read Me Message x Details lt lt Back Close Illustration 5 11 Screens window To select screens 1 At the Screens window select the screen you want to add by clicking the check box next to the screen name 2 Click on the Details button The dialog box for the selected screen appears Welcome Screen x MV Show this dialog Welcome Welcome to the ZProductN ameX Setup program This program will install 4ProductName on your computer JV Use default text It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Set Clear Variable Click to assign Cancel Help
290. ller See Disk Prompt Action Item on page 8 14 Display Screen The Display Screen action allows you to display a standard screen or a custom screen at any point during the installation process It can be used in place of the Screens menu options which display screens in a set order to enable full control over screen display order See Display Screen Action Item on page 8 15 Download File E This action item is used to download a file from an FTP or HTTP server at any point during the instal lation process See Download File Action Item on page 8 17 Edit AUTOEXEC BAT File Edits the AUTOEXEC BAT file See Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item on page 8 19 Edit CONFIG SYS i le Adds a new edit CONFIG SYS item to the archive See Edit CONFIG SYS Item on page 8 21 Edit Text File ul Edits text files See Edit Text File Item on page 8 23 Files Adds existing files and folders to the archive See Files Archive Item on page 8 25 Find e E The Find action is used to determine 1f specific files or folders exist on the customer s machine If they do exist certain actions can be performed See Find Action Item on page 8 31 Folder Creates a new folder in the archive See Folder Archive Item on page 8 34 Goto This action item creates a jump to a selected Label item 13 See Goto Action Item on page 8 40
291. ller VISE Menus Installer VISE provides several drop down menus that allow you to easily access com mands from the Menu bar This section displays each menu and gives an overview of each command available You can access each menu by clicking on the appropriate word on the menu bar Oo File Menu File New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Save As AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer Properties Language Properties Build Installer Test Installer F5 Batch Build Reports Update Archive Create Batch File 1 MyProduct 3 3WCT 2 ArcWinS ample CT 3CXWINDOWSA AUntitled CT 4 CustomScreens1 WCT Exit Illustration 3 6 File Menu Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 8 File Menu The File menu provides the following commands Command Function Creates a new Installer VISE archive You can also create a new archive by pressing the CTRL and N keys or clicking on the following button on the Standard toolbar Opens an existing Installer VISE archive You can also open an archive by pressing the CTRL and O keys or clicking on the following button on the Standard toolbar Saves the current archive to its current name and directory When you save an archive for the first time Installer VISE dis plays the Save As dialog box so you can name your archive You can also save an archive by pressing the CTRL and S keys or clicking on the following button on the
292. ller VISE Tools 13 8 Purchase Check For Update Renew Activate To verify an archive 1 Select Verify Archive from the Tools menu Tools Archive Wizard Visual Basic Project Wizard Snapshot Wizard Dependency Watcher Dependency Walker Verify Archive Purchase Installer WISE Illustration 13 14 Verify Archive menu item 2 Each file will be decompressed and its CRC value checked against the CRC value calculated when the file was last compressed Verify Archive will m verify compressed file data that is stored in the vct file m Check for misordered action links i e items linked to actions that appear later in the list m check for misordered shadow files 1 e shadow files that appear before the original file in the list m check for files assigned to nonexistent file groups 3 If there are no errors the following dialog will be displayed Mind ision Installer VISE ES IN The archive was verified without errors Illustration 13 15 Archive Verified Without Errors If there are errors a dialog will be displayed detailing the problem within the archive MindYision Installer VISE Ea AN The File StdOle2 tlb is a shadow file of StdOle2 tlb Please move the shadow file StdOle2 tb after StdOle2 tlb in the archive window Illustration 13 16 Archive Verified With Errors Purchase Check For This menu item will vary depending on the state of your Installer VISE subscription For
293. ller VISE application not any one archive so you will have identical archive layouts for any other archives you open You may create as many custom layouts as you wish in addition to the Installer VISE Standard Layout Should you want to have the same layouts on different computers Archive Window Lay outs are stored in the LayoutInfo ini file located at Installer VISE x x Installer VISE Sup Chapter 12 Customizing the Archive Window 12 2 Defining an Archive Window Layout port Simply copy the LayoutInfo ini file to the Installer VISE Support folder for any other computer Defining an Archive To define an Archive Window layout Window Layout 1 Select Customize from the Layout menu Illustration 12 2 Customize Layout menu item 2 Click the New Layout button on the Layout List dialog Layout List x New Duplicate Cancel Illustration 12 3 Layout List The ordering of items in the Layout List determines the ordering of Layout names in the Layout menu The topmost layout is the default layout used for newly cre ated archives To make a custom layout the default layout drag the custom layout to the top of the Layout List Chapter 12 Customizing the Archive Window Installer VISE for Windows Installer VISE for Windows Defining an Archive Window Layout 3 Click the Edit button in the Layout List window to edit the newly created layout In the Edit Layout dialog Name field type a name for your new layout
294. llion colors GIF gif filename extension The GIF format can only store 8 bits pixel 256 or fewer colors which makes it best for nonphotographic images GIF may be the best choice for simple images with only a few distinct colors Table 3 2 Image File Options Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Exiting Installer VISE 3 5 SSS SST Installers built with few graphics may be slightly larger than in previous Installer VISE versions 3 0 and earlier This is because the JPEG feature adds about 100k to the base product For information on how graphics can be used in installers please see the following pages m In automated billboards Adding Automated Billboards on page 6 24 In manual billboards Billboard Action Item on page 8 5 By customizing pre built installer screens About Installer Screens on page 10 1 m By editing built in screens Editing Built in Screens on page 114 m By editing custom screens Editing Custom Screens on page 11 5 Exiting Installer VISE When you are finished using Installer VISE you can exit it to end the current session When you exit Installer VISE asks you if you want to save any changes if they have not been saved To exit Installer VISE 1 Select Exit from the File menu You have made any The following dialog box appears changes since the last time you saved the archive IN Save changes to Untitled
295. low on Variable Substitution Variable You can assign a user defined variable to this radio but ton Click and select the variable you wish to associate with this radio button If you have previously created another radio button item the variable name will already be filled in for you IMPORTANT ALL radio button items that you cre ate in a custom screen automatically are assigned the same variable name The value for this variable will be be set to the index of the radio item that was selected when the user exits this screen So if you have three radio buttons in your custom screen and the user has selected the first one then the variable will be set to 1 The index order of radio buttons is determined by the tab order If the Radio button state is On the variable value will be set to the index of the selected radio button 1 2 3 Default On If this check box is selected then the radio button item will default to being selected when the custom screen is displayed Only select this property for one of your radio buttons Dimensions Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note
296. lows your customers to select which type of install they want to perform Creating Packages Sub Packages and List Packages on page 6 7 for more infor mation The following is what happens when the customer selects different options from the Select Install Type Screen during the install m If Typical Setup is selected only the items that are in the Typical Setup package are processed m If Compact Setup is selected only the items in the Compact Setup package are processed m If Custom Setup is selected the next dialog displayed is the Select Components dialog This dialog displays all the Custom packages you have set up in your Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 16 Customizing the Select Install Type Screen installer Your customers can then choose which one of these to install Only items that are part of the selected packages are processed To customize the Select Install Type Screen 1 Select Select Install Type from the Screens menu The Select Install Type dialog box appears Show this dialog M Use default text i the type of Setup you prefer then click Next fer ypical Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users Compact a will be installed with minimum required options K C8ustom ou can choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users Set Clear Variable Click to assign i E Cancel Help Select In
297. m mands enable you to do things with a simple mouse action that might require many key strokes For example you can use drag and drop to add existing files and or folders from the Explorer or File Manager into the Archive window To use drag and drop right click on the item then drag the mouse to where you want to insert the item Position the inser tion point and let go of the mouse button to drop the item Using Installer Graphics Billboards use bitmap graphics to help you advertise new features promotions or other benefits Installer VISE allows you to use BMP JPEG or GIF files for billboards By select ing the right format for the job you can achieve a balance between image quality and size For example BMP files can be substantially larger than JPEG files of comparable image quality Therefore if you use a large number of graphics in your installer using JPEGs instead of BMPs may help keep the installer size down An overview of the supported graphic formats follows Format Function BMP bmp filename extension The standard Windows bitmap image format BMP files can provide up to 24 bits pixel quality 16 million colors Of the supported formats BMPs are typically the largest images JPEG jpg filename extension The JPEG format is best for images with a wide range of color such as full color photographs It offers higher compression abilities than the GIF format and stores full color information 24 bits pixel 16 mi
298. m This is the zero based index of the icon you wish to use For most cases this is 0 Table 8 38 Shortcut General Properties Setting Shortcut To set shortcut advanced properties Advanced Properties 1 At the Shortcut Properties wndow click on the Advanced tab The Shortcut Prop erties Advanced page appears Shortcut Properties 124 x R Command line arguments Working directory Window state z Normal Window Install location Install Directory T Don t add to uninstaller log Illustration 8 47 Shortcut Properties Advanced page Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting Shortcut Advanced Properties 8 67 2 Make the following entries Function Comment line segments Type the arguments that are to be passed to the short cut s target This field is usually left blank Working directory Select the working directory for the shortcut s target In most cases leave this blank If this field is left empty the location of file that is launched becomes the working directory Window state Select the initial state of the customer s window Normal Window Minimized Maximized This field defaults to Normal Window Table 8 39 Shortcut Properties Advanced Options 3 Select the location where you want the shortcut to be created from the Install loca tion popmenu Function Install Directory Installs the shortcut to its relative locatio
299. m Icons window Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Adding Shortcuts You want to delete a file or folder Select the file and click on the Delete button The file or folder is deleted You want to view details about the file Select the file and click on the Details button The Icon Details dialog box appears Icon Details x gl of nonin Cancel Command line parameters Target pathname 2 lt T argetDirz Samples s preadsheet Samples Endofmo The name of the file appears in the Icon name field and the target path appears in the Target pathname field You can edit the information and add a command line param eter if necessary in the Command line parameter field Click on the OK button The Program Icons wndow appears Table 5 3 Icon Details 5 Click on the Next gt button The Shortcuts window appears Adding Shortcuts The Shortcuts window allows you to add shortcuts to files in your installation on the cus tomer s Desktop installed Shortcuts can only be created if the installer is run on a computer with Window 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 Windows 2000 or Windows XP AAA Shortcuts Shortcuts to files in your installation can be created on the Desktop They will only be created if the installer is run on a computer with Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 installed Shortcuts will be created on the Desktop for the following files Click Add
300. m group or remove a program group with the Program item command Program groups are created in the Program Manager when the installer is run on Windows 3 1 or Windows NT 3 5 Program items are created as items in these groups Program groups are created as sub menus under the Programs sub menu on the Start Menu when the installer is run on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Program items are created as sub menus under the group menus AAA If you remove a program group or item the action will be skipped if the uninstaller is run To add a program item 1 At the Archive window select Program Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu 2 A program item is added to the archive and the Program Item Properties window appears Setting Program Item 1 At the Program Item Properties window click on the General tab The Program General Properties Item Properties General page appears Program Item Properties 21 x pr engenesecsssesessasen General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives EH gt You can create nested start PO menu items by using the Group M Show group window between oup names ithe DeProganFode OS reece Beren be replaced with underscores v a L and the item will not be nested Params pun Illustration 8 39 Program Item Properties General tab Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting Prog
301. m tab on the Properties window of the selected item 2 The System Property page appears General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Cc4 Platform win 3 1 M wings WinNT 3 x T Win32s T Win 985E Win NT 4 M Win 95 M Win Me A ves oa l Win 95 OSR2 in Admin privileges required Yersion Major fo Minor fo IV Audio WAV file playback y V Min resolution 640 y 490 y MV Min colors 16 colors y Min memon 0 Mb Illustration 9 3 System Property page Setting Platform You can set platform requirements if the customer s machine requires a specific operatin p q q p p 8 Requirements system to process an item or package To set platform requirements 1 Click on the Platform checkbox 2 Click on the appropriate checkboxes to select one or more of the following plat form options m Win 3 1 m Win32s m Win 95 m Win 95 OSR2 m Win 98 m Win 98SE m Win Me m Win NT 3 x m Win NT 4 m Win 2000 m Win XP 3 Type the major version of the selected operation system in the Version Major field 4 Type the minor version of the selected operation system in the Version Minor field 5 If you selected Windows NT 3 x or 4 Windows 2000 or Windows XP click on the Admin privileges required checkbox if Administrative privileges are required for this item or package to be processed Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties 9 6 Settin
302. m the Run popmenu which represents how you want the main window to appear when the application 1s run Normal window m Muinimized m Maximized Click on the Wait for application to finish checkbox if you want the installer to wait until the application has quit before continuing Click on the Launch after successful setup checkbox if you want the command to be executed after a successful install has taken place and the installer is quitting Installer VISE for Windows Shortcuts Action Item 8 65 8 Click on the Minimize installer while application 1s running checkbox if you want the installer to not display while the application is running See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 El Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 19 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Shortcuts Action Item You can add a shortcut to an archive using the Shortcut command shortcuts are not cre ated when the installer is run on Windows 3 1 You can use the Install location popmenu on the Advanced page of the properties window to set the install location for the short cut For example you ca
303. menu An Edit Text File item is added to the archive and the Edit Text File Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Edit Text File Item Properties General page appears Edit Text File Item Properties 24 x P File name x Action Add text to beginning of file y Text to add append Illustration 8 17 Edit Text File Item Properties General page 3 Select the full path and file name of the file that you want to modify from the File name popmenu You can use an absolute path such as C AUTOEXEC BAT or a path using runtime variables such as TargetDir DATA DAT Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Edit Text File Item 4 Select one of the following options from the Action popmenu which represents what you want to do with this file Option Function Add text to beginning of file Adds the text in the Text to add append field to the beginning of the file If the file does not exist it is cre ated Add text to end of file Adds the text in the Text to add append field to the end of the file If the file does not exist it 1s created Append text to search line Appends the text in the Text to add append field to the end of the line that contains the text specified in the Search for the line containing this text field If the search line is not found no changes are made to the file Delete search line Deletes the line that contains the t
304. menus Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Common Startup Folder This option will install the item in the startup folder which 1s displayed on all users start menus under the programs sub menu Items that are in this folder are processed as Windows starts up Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Table 8 22 Folder Install Locations for WinNT and 95 98 only 4 Select the replace option for the folder from the Replace popmenu Function Always Always replace the file if it exists Never Never replace the file if it exists If Target 1s Older Replace the existing file only if it 15 older If Target is Older or Same Replace the existing file if it is older or the same Ask User Ask the user if the file should be replaced If Exists Installs the item only if the item exists on the disk and the modification date of the item in the archive is newer than the one on the target system If Newer Version Compares the version number of the file in the archive against the version number of the file on the target system If the version in the archive is newer the item is installed Ask if False Can be selected in addition to an item above the separator line in the pop up menu If the item above the separator line fails for example If Newer is selected but the item in the archive is older the user is given the
305. modified after the date in the Modified date fields is gt or equal Searches for files with that were modified after or on the same date in the Modified date fields Table 9 1 Modified Date Options 3 Type the modified date in the Modified date fields Three fields are provided to enter the modified date Type the month in the first field the day in the second field and the year in the third field Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Installer VISE for Windows Selecting Created Date as Search Criteria 9 3 Selecting Created Date You can select the created date of an item as search criteria as Search Criteria Nite m This does not apply to folders m This does not apply if the installer is run on a computer with Windows 3 x To select the created date as search criteria 1 Click on the Created date checkbox 2 Select one of the following options from the Created date popmenu Function Searches for files with created dates that match the date in the Created date fields Searches for files that were not created on the date in the Created date fields is less than Searches for files that were created before the date in the Created date fields 15 lt or equal Searches for files that were created before or on the same date as the date in the Created date fields 1s greater than Searches for files that were created after the date in the Created date fields is gt or equal Searches for file
306. mple 1vise28 exe A variable can be used here For example FileName Server Type Server type can be HTTP or FIP Save as Location where the file will be downloaded Must be a full path name Variables can be used For example 0 TargetDir 1vise exe The file s name must be included in the path It does not have to be the same name as the file on the server Table 8 7 Download File item General Properties See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 El Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item 8 19 Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item You can add a new edit AUTOEXEC BAT item to the archive using the Edit AUTOEXEC BAT command This command can do the following m Add text to the PATH m Add text to the beginning or the end of a file m Insert a line of text before the search line or after the search line Comments lines that match the search criteria The uninstaller can undo all of these actions If the file doesn t exist a
307. ms can precede or succeed its Goto item To add a Label action item 1 Select Label from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Label A Label action item is added to the archive and the Label Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Label Item Properties General page appears Label Item Properties 24x Name New Label Illustration 8 34 Label Item Properties General page Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 46 Location Prompt Action Item 3 Type the name of the label you want to add to the archive This names the Label It is important to give your labels unique and distinctive names It will make it easier to locate the Label you want from the Goto item See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 E Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 El Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Location Prompt Action You can add a Location Prompt item to the archive using the Location Prompt action item item command This action can be used to display a dialog to the customer that lets him her choose a directory The path name
308. ms in the shopping cart Array to list SKU IDs corresponding to items in the shopping cart Array to list Product IDS corresponding to items in the shopping cart Number of serial numbers issued Array to list Product IDs corresponding to listed serial numbers Array to list serial numbers Array to list Name based Keys corresponding to listed serial numbers Number of files downloaded Array to list Product IDs corresponding to downloaded files Array to list locations of downloaded files A The eSellerate data included in the CViseEntryData class definition applies to installers that the developer has integrated with the eSellerate e commerce system These eSellerate powered installers can pass the infor mation listed above to the external code during a purchase This gives the developer access to shopping cart serial number and file download data For more information see chapters 4 and 7 of the eSellerate User s Guide In order to correctly format the information defined in the CViseEntryData class your external code must include the following line CViseEntryData pViseEntryData CViseEntryData dwReserved You may then access the CViseEntryData class information in your external code using the following convention pViseEntryData gt m lpszTempDir Chapter 17 Using External Code Installer VISE for Windows Adding the External Code File to the Archive Adding th
309. n Set To Po Behavior Continue installation success Goto EN T Default Button I Validate Fields Top E Height 17 ones Dimensions Left 5 Width 59 Illustration 11 13 Button Item Properties Window Property Description Title Type in the title you wish to be displayed for the button NOTE You can also enter a variable name here if you wish to dynamically set the title See the section below on Variable Substitution Variable You can assign a user defined variable to this button Click and select the variable you wish to associate with this button Set To Type in the value you wish to set the variable defined in the Variable property to when the user presses the button Example values would be TRUE or FALSE Table 11 4 Button Item Properties Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 10 Button Properties Property Description Behavior Select the action you wish to perform if the user selects this button Continue installation Success The default behavior continues the installation as normal The Display Screen action result will return Success Continue installation Failure The installation will con tinue as normal but the Display Screen action result will return Failure Cancel installation The entire installation will be stopped if the user presses this button Goto Jump to either a Label or Screen Action item when the user
310. n added and delete old files During the auto creation process Installer VISE will create the update files create Find Actions for update files to applications add any new files and create Delete actions for old files This can greatly minimize the work that you need to do to create a multi file updater The AutoCreate Updater Archive process is similar to the Bring Up To Date process Bring Up To Date starts with an existing archive compares it with the files at the location of the original source files and produces an updated original archive Installer VISE can start with an existing archive compare it to a new set of files and build an updater archive Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive 16 2 The AutoCreate Updater Process To use the Auto Create Updater Archive command 1 Make sure that the source folder for the archive contains the new or modified files 2 From the File menu in Installer VISE select AutoCreate Updater Archive New Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Save Ctrl S Save As AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer Properties Language Properties Build Installer Test Installer F5 Batch Build Reports Update Archive Create Batch File 1 Untitled 34CT WCT 2 Untitled2 CT 3 test VCT YCT 4 Untitled CT Exit Illustration 16 1 AutoCreate Updater Archive menu item 3 The AutoCreate Updater Archive dialog box will be displayed prompting you to locate three folders nece
311. n as it appears in the archive Windows Directory Installs the shortcut to the current Windows directory System Directory Installs the shortcut to the current Windows System directory System32 Directory Installs the shortcut to the Windows System directory If the installer is running on Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP the item is installed to the Windows System32 directory Temp Directory Installs the shortcut to a temporary directory maintained by Installer VISE This temporary directory and all the items in it are deleted when the installer exits Ask User Prompts the user to identify a location where the short cut should be installed Table 8 40 Install Location Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 68 Show Hide Progress Action Item Function Find Result Installs the item at the resulting path of an earlier find action item If a file was found matching the search crite ria the file s parent becomes the install location If a folder was found matching the search criteria its path name becomes the install location If the find result failed the item is not installed Lets you select any location where the shortcut is to be installed You can use variables here If the folder does not exist it is created Table 8 40 Install Location Options The following install locations are only valid when the installer is running on Windows 9 x Window
312. n checked the search will take place without dialog displaying a search dialog Named Name to search for You can use wildcards Example ReadMe Look in Path name where to start the search There are four special values here Local hard drives The action will search all local hard drives Local hard drive do not include CDROM drives Network hard drives The action will only search mapped network drives Local and network hard drives The action will search local and mapped network hard drives CDROM drives The action will only search CDROM drives You could also choose from several predefined runtime variables or type in a path name for the search Include subfolders If checked will search through subfolders Table 8 18 Find Action General Properties Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 34 Folder Archive Item Function Store the search result in The path name of the first item that was found that this variable matched the search criteria will be stored in this variable if the option Find multiple occurrences is not selected If the item is not found the variable will be empty This variable will hold the pathname of the item that matched the search criteria Store found item s full When checked the full path name to the found item path name including the item name will be placed in the variable When unchecked the path to the found item s parent will be placed
313. n file to the new language using the Translator application 3 Import the translation file into the archive 4 Turn off the Use default text checkbox for all screens the installer will display Following are the general steps for creating a multi language installer 1 Create a translation file for each new language 2 Translate the translation files for each the new language using the Translator appli cation 3 Import each translation file into the archive 4 Turn off the Use default text checkbox for all screens the installer will display When a localized installer is launched the installer immediately checks the user s operat ing system to see if it is one of the languages supported by the installer If it is using a sup ported language all the information in the installer such as dialog boxes package names etc appear in the new language Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages Installer VISE for Windows Creating a Translation File Creating a Translation File Setting Language Properties Installer VISE for Windows 18 3 If the user s operating system does not use a supported language the installer uses the default language which is the language in which the installer was built If you are creating an installer that handles any language other than your native language you must create a translation file for each language you wish to handle You can use the translation file to localize the a
314. n set the install location to the Desktop folder to create a short cut on the desktop To add a shortcut 1 At the Archive window select Shortcut Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu 2 A shortcut item is added to the archive and the Shortcut Properties window appears Setting Shortcut To set shortcut general properties General Properties 1 At the Shortcut Properties page click on the General tab The Shortcut Properties General page appears Shortcut Properties 1 1x prrgarnnnannanacananzo Target file name JE Icon path Icon index aa Illustration 8 46 Shortcut Properties General page Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 66 Setting Shortcut Advanced Properties 2 Make the following entries Name Type the name for the shortcut Target file name Select the path name of the shortcut s target from the popmenu or click on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box You can use variables here For example Y TargetDirW AMyApp exe Icon path Select the path name of a file with an icon from the pop menu or click on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box In most cases you should leave this field blank and set the Icon index field to zero Win dows then uses the first icon 1t finds in the target file for the shortcut s icon Icon index Type the index number of an icon Files can have more than one icon in the
315. n the end user double clicks the installer they are presented with the usual installer items Splash screen packages interface type and Install Location options are the same as those presented from a single v Welcome xi Welcome to the Installer VISE 3 6 1 Setup program This program will install Installer VISE 3 6 1 on pour computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Illustration 7 11 Active Installer Install Window file installer with the exception of a Continue button rather than an Install button Click ing the Continue button takes the user to a download preparation window Before downloading files the user is instructed to initiate a connection to the Internet Jd Installer VISE Setup x Downloading Files The necessary files are about to be downloaded to your computer If you have a dialup connection to the internet make sure it is active and click the Continue button below Approximate amount of data to download 18 57MB I
316. name Image placement Top Left y Border width 0 255 o Border height 0 255 o Illustration 8 4 Billboard Action Properties General page In the Start color and End color area The fields in this area allow you to customize the color of the Billboard If the val ues are the same in the Start and End fields the background window appears as a solid color If these values are different the background window appears as a gradi ent You can enter the numeric color values or click on the Pick button to access the Color Selector window Type the image file name for the billboard in the Image file name field For exam ple if the name of the image file for your billboard is bboard1 bmp type bboard1 bmp You can also click on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box to access the image you added to the archive This file must be added to your archive and added to the Support Files package Files added to the support files package are compressed into the installer s first seg ment and are decompressed into a temporary folder when the installer is run This temporary folder is removed when the installer is finished Select one of the following from the Image placement popmenu which represents where the image appears on the Billboard m Tiled m Top Left m Top Center Top Right m Middle Left m Center m Middle Right Bottom Left Installer VISE for Windows Call External Code Action Item
317. names or other strings that may contain an amper sand need to be displayed No Wrap Displays text left aligned Tabs are expanded but words are not wrapped Text that extends past the end of a line is clipped Sunken Creates a border with a sunken edge around the static text item Table 11 8 Static Text Item Properties Chapter 11 Custom Screens Installer VISE for Windows Edit Text Properties Edit Text Properties Installer VISE for Windows 11 17 Property Description Border Creates a border around the static text item Dimensions Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note Dimensions are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Table 11 8 Static Text Item Properties When creating a standard edit text field you first enter the title you wish to display for the edit text field Enter Title Ea Title Cancel Illustration 11 19 Edit Text Title A static text item will automatically be created and displayed to the left of the edit text field To edit properties double click the Edit Text item
318. nd text is being added the file is created To add a Edit AUTOEXEC BAT item 1 At Archive window select Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item from the Archive Items toolbar or the Add Item menu An Edit AUTOEXEC BAT item is added to the archive and the Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Properties General page appears Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Properties 121 x General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B Alo G Add to PATH TargetDirShort I Don t add to uninstaller Illustration 8 14 Edit AUTOEXEC BAT Item Properties General page Adding Text to the PATH To add text to the PATH 1 Click on the Add to PATH radio button and type the text that you want to add to the PATH statement Runtime variables can be used here WinDir and Sys temDir are replaced with their short path names When referring to the target directory use the variable TargetDirShort This field defaults to TargetDir Short 2 Click on the Don t add to uninstaller log checkbox if you do not want the edit AUTOEXEC BAT item to be added to the uninstall log and not to be removed when the uninstaller is run Adding Text to the File To add text to the file 4 Click on the Action radio button Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 20 Adding Text to the File 2 Select one of the following options from the Action popmenu ind
319. ndow 5 From the Build Targets list window select the newly added build target and select the Edit button 6 In the Edit Build Target window select Web Installer from the Target menu Edit Build Target x General eSeller Name Active Web Installer Target Web Installer v Installer File Name Cancel Help Illustration 7 4 Designating a Build Target as a Web Installer 7 Set the Destination Path and Installer File Name for the build target Edit Build Target x General eSeller Name Active Web Installer Target Web Installer Z Segment size fu nlimited v Destination Path hw N lt P Profiles B ob Desktop El Installer File Name Cancel Help Illustration 7 5 Setting Path and Name for Built Target Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Creating File Groups The Destination Path will determine to where the built web installer will be saved and the File Name will determine the name given to the active installer when built 8 Select the OK button from the Edit Build Target window 9 Select the Close button in the Build Targets list window Creating File Groups After creating a web installer build target you will need to create and assign files to file groups To create a File Group 1 From the Internet menu select File Groups Illustration 7 6 File Groups Menu Item 2 In the File Group List window click New
320. ne if the screen should be dis played 6 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the Select You can customize the installer s Select Program Folder Screen If this screen is displayed Program Folder Screen to your customers they have the opportunity to have the program items created in a dif ferent program group You can add a bitmap file with dimensions of 138x258 pixels to this screen To customize the Select Program Folder Screen 1 Select Select Program Folder from the Screens menu The Select Program Folder dialog box appears Select Program Folder Fa T Show this dialog M Use default text Select Program Folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the Existing Folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder Show skip button ProductN amez Existing Folders Set Clear Variable Click to assign i E Cancel Help Illustration 10 12 Select Program Folder dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Select Program Folders dia log to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps Installer VIS
321. neral Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Je SA Build Directives Any Match iDebug Build Basic Install Deluxe Install Deluxe Fonts Check All Uncheck All Illustration 15 4 Sample Build Directive Setup Items of note about build directive setup No Build Directive An item will be included in all installer builds if it does not have any build Assigned directive assignments Items which will always be included in any build have no build directive assignments i e they are not limited Only One Build Directive Ifan item has only one build directive checked it will only be included in a build when that build directive is active checked in the Build Directives window Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management 15 4 AND Conditions AND Conditions m The item below will only be added to the build if both the Debug Build AND the Deluxe Install build directives are active File Properties EE Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Before After Alo Build Directives Any Match Check All Debug Build Uncheck All Basic Install Deluxe Install Deluxe Fonts lt Illustration 15 5 Build Directive Setup Example OR Conditions Any Match m Because the Any Match build directive is checked in the example below the item will be included 1f either the
322. nfigurations Debug Single File to QA Illustration 15 11 Build Targets2 Window 5 Enter Name Target Destination Path and Installer File Name for the built installer Make a selection from the Segment size popmenu when applicable Edit Build Target x General eSeller Name Debug Single file to QA Target Single File Destination Path Installer File Name ju wApp2S etupl Illustration 15 12 Example Target 6 If you want this build target to create installers that integrate with the eSellerate e commerce system click the eSeller tab After you complete the required tab fields 13 click OK See eSeller tab on page 15 8 for more information 7 Click OK in the Edit Built Target dialog to close it 8 Click Close in the Build Targets list to close it Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management 15 8 eSeller tab eSeller tab 9 Select the build target from the drop down menu in the archive window The target name displayed is considered the current build target The current build target is the one which will be used when the build command is issued Untitled YCT Mind ision Installer VISE File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help yele ex a Debug Single file to QA y Debug Sinale file to D p Modified Date Demo txt 1KB Text Document 4 20 00 9 15 AM a Compact Setup CIL ReadMe_demo_purchase txt 1KB Te
323. ng lt same gt The item has not changed lt different gt At least one item within the folder has been selected for update lt new gt The item did not exist when the archive was created lt missing gt The item in the archive was not found in the source folder That item will be deleted from the archive 1f the checkbox remains selected The item has been selected for update Table 6 25 Archive Update Status 5 To compare the old and the new versions of an item select the item and click the Get Info button A box comparing the old file on the left and the new file on the right will be displayed Click OK to dismiss the comparison box 6 Select any items that should be updated to the archive by clicking the box on the left of the item s name Items that have changed will automatically be selected for updating 7 Click Update to update the archive If any files had the status of lt missing gt then a warning message will ask if you re sure that you want to delete those files from the archive Installer VISE provides you with two ways to update an installer m Update a folder in the archive m Update individual files in the archive Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Updating Individual Files Editing Source Directories Updating Individual Files This option updates the file with contents of the file at the 1tem s Source path To update individual files 1
324. ng Prop erty pages 13 a Advanced Property Page on page 9 1 Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Open Internet Address Action Item 8 51 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 O Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 El Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Open Internet Address You can add an Open Internet Address action to the archive using the Open Internet Action Item action item command This action item can be used to open World Wide Web pages on the customers computer This installer can be instructed to wait until the browser has been closed before continuing continue after opening the page or wait until the installer has completed before opening the Internet address A common use of this action item is to open your web page after the installation of your product is complete The customer s computer must have a web browser installed for this action to be successful To add an Internet action item 1 Select Open Internet Address from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Open Internet Address An Open Internet Address action item is added to the archive and the Open Internet Address Properties window a
325. ng path entered in the value field The result will be stored in the variable entered in the Name field This is done by calling the Windows API function GetShortPathName If the long folder file path does not exist when this is called the long path will be copied to the variable The long folder file path must exist for the function GetShortPathName to work This action will function differently when run on a Windows 3 1 system The long path will be converted to a short path by first removing any spaces in the string then truncating the string until it conforms to the 8 3 format This will happen even if the long folder file path doesn t exist Table 8 46 Variable Manipulation Options 4 Make the following entries Name Select the variable to work with Is If you selected Test Variable select one of the following options which represents what you can test about the variable 18 is not is less than is lt or equal is greater than is gt or equal This field defaults to is Value Type the variable s value Env Variable Specifies the environment variable to read Installer VISE enables this feature when the Get environment variable option is selected Table 8 47 Variable Item General Property Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Variable Item Variable Name Installer VISE assigns the value of the Environment vari able specif
326. ns Assigning External Code Installer VISE supports the addition of external code to an archive This feature gives Installer VISE the flexibility to meet most installation challenges You can write 32 bit code that can be called at points you specify during the installation process Any custom external code which you define can be attached to the installer as well as to individual files Following are the three ways in which external code can be called from the installer at run time At initialization time before setup begins copying the files or after setup has fin ished copying the files Before or after an archive item has been processed Anytime during the installation process Calling external code at these points in the installer allows you to customize the installer to do things it does not currently do For example you could create a custom registration dialog and display it to the customer before the installation takes place If they register correctly it never appears again if the registration fails they are not be able to continue See Chapter 17 Using External Code from information about creating and adding external code to an archive Installer VISE allows you to set several options for each file included in an archive Following are some of the options you can select Location where the file should be installed m Replacement instructions in case of a pre existing item on the customer s com puter m
327. ns for the action Function Set Variable Allows the installer to assign a value to the variable Test Variable Allows the installer to compare the value of the variable against another variable string or integer Installer VISE by default compare the string value of the variable to the string entered Select the option Numeric comparison to compare the integer value of the variable to the integer value of the string or variable entered in the value field Increment Variable Allows the installer to increment the value of a variable This function increments the value by one This feature was designed for use with the looping mechanism created by the Goto and Label features Decrement Variable Allows the installer to decrement the value of a variable This function decrements the value by one This feature was designed for use with the looping mechanism created by the Goto and Label features Table 8 46 Variable Manipulation Options Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Variable Item Get environment variable Function Allows the installer to get the string value of an environment The installer can assign the environment variable to a runtime variable for later use in the installer Installer VISE assigns the value found in the Default Value field if the environment variable does not exist Convert long path to short The installer will attempt to get the short path for the lo
328. nstaller Typical and Custom will be the only options available to the user Program will be installed This field explains what the Compact install does This with minimum field defaults to Program will be installed with minimum required options Edit this field if necessary C amp ustom Type a name for this field This field defaults to C amp ustom Note If this field is left blank Custom setup will not be displayed as an option to the user of the installer Typical and Compact will be the only options available You can choose This field explains what the Custom install does This field defaults to You can choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users Edit this field if necessary Table 10 8 Install Type Options 5 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Select Install Type Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the fol lowing m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 6 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displaye
329. nstaller VISE application m Language Translator This application allows you to build installers in different languages m Updater VISE This application allows you to create updates and fixes for your existing applications m Updater VISE Manual An on line user manual for the Updater VISE application Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 2 Getting Started Activating Installer VISE Chapter 2 Getting Started Activating Installer VISE m License Agreement A copy of the Installer VISE for Windows License Agree ment m Read Me This document contains the following information Full Evaluation Purchasing the Software Software Features System Requirements for Building an Installer System Requirements for Using an Installer and How to Contact Mind Vision Software m Release Notes This document contains last minute updates or changes made to the installer The Installer VISE manual will not contain the last minute changes or modifications found in the Release Notes m Vise Monitor This folder contains files and information that you can use to con figure your application to launch an installer and monitor its progress m Remove Installer VISE This application allows you to remove Installer VISE Before you begin creating an installer it is recommended that you activate your copy of Installer VISE If you create an installer with an unactivated copy of Installer VISE the following occurs A dialog appears each time y
330. nt to add to the archive click on the OK button The Archive window appears Adding New Folders You can also add new folders to the archive To add a new folder 1 Select Folder from the Add menu A folder is added to the archive and the Folder Properties window appears The folder defaults with the name of New Folder and is added to the Typical Setup Package 2 Type the name of the folder in the Folder s name field See Setting Folder Options on page 6 29 for more information 1 7 The left and right arrow keys will expand collapse a selected folder in the VV a a main archive window m LS N 3 Extracting Files and You can extract files and folders from an archive and save them in an another location Folders To extract a file or folder 1 Select the file or folder you want to extract Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Creating Packages Sub Packages and List Packages 6 7 Creating Packages Sub Packages and List Packages About Packages Installer VISE for Windows 2 Select Extract from the Edit menu The Extract To dialog box appears Path F work in progress Cancel Directories Drives f DATA Network Illustration 6 6 Extract To dialog 3 Select the folder where you want to save the selected item in the Directories list and click on the OK button The selected item is extracted and the Archive window appears Once you have a
331. nt to capture and include in your snapshot installer However there are many files and registry entries that frequently change as a result of normal operating system functions like disk caching setting current directory etc The system is constantly updating files and registry entries and the snapshot will detect these changes However you would not want to include these system changes in your snapshot installer To handle this there is a text file included in the Support folder called SkipList txt This text file contains the most common changes that the operating system makes during the course of normal operations By default these changes will be tracked Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Take Snapshot Take Snapshot Installer VISE for Windows 14 5 but not displayed or included in your snapshot installer SkipList txt Notepad A E File Edit Search Help lt SKIP LIST ITEHMS gt lt The items below are files directories and registry items that the gt lt system frequently changes but are usually not desired in your installer gt lt Unlike items in your exclusion lists skip items WILL still be tracked for lt changes but they will by default NOT be shown as changed items gt lt Skip items can be full or partial pathnames gt lt FILES gt lt Don t display changes to the following files gt ffastun RECYCLER NTUSER DAT SYSTEH DAT USER DAT WIN386 SWP ntuser dat
332. nu With this path you can create new categories on the start menu move items into the start menu or delete items from it Items that are in the start menu folder will be displayed on the start menu The CommonStartUp variable contains the path name of the startup folder on the Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP start menu for all users This is only valid when the installer is running on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable will be blank if the installer is run on a system other than Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP An example is CA Winnt40 Profiles All Users Start MenulPrograms Startup With this path you can add new items to the startup menu or remove items from it Items that are in the startup folder will be automatically started when Windows boots The DefProgramFolder variable holds the default program folder name Typing Select Program folder in the Program Folder field window sets this value If the Select Program Folder installer screen is displayed to the customer he she can set this value See Custom izing the Select Program Folder Screen on page 10 19 for more information Another example of when this variable can be using is with program items You can create a Program Item for a Read Me file See Program Items on page 8 52 for more informa tion The Desktop variable contains the path name of the Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or
333. ny serial numbers to generate When the Gener ate button is clicked you are prompted for a location of where to store the serial number text file When the installer is run the user must enter one of the serial num bers from the file before he she can continue installing Table 10 5 Automatic Verification Options 7 Custom Verification options External code dll file name Name of the external code dll that will be called to verify the registration information If blank the registration will not be verified Parameter1 A number that may be passed to the external code Parameter2 A string that may be passed to the external code Default is UserName Organization SerialNumber these variables will contain the registration information entered by the user Table 10 6 Custom Verification Options 8 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Registration Information Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 9 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the va
334. o the archive using the DirectX Check action item item command This action item allows you to check for the presence of DirectX for Windows The installer returns a particular value which indicates the version of DirectX that has been installed You can link other action items to the result of this test For example if a search for DirectX fails or does not find the version of DirectX needed you can instruct the installer to launch Microsoft s DirectX installer To add a DirectX Check action item 1 Select DirectX Check from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select DirectX Check A DirectX Check action item is added to the archive and the DirectX Check Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The DirectX Check Item Properties General page appears DirectX Check Properties 27 xi fis any version of DirectX installed y Interpret version number as follows 0 Directx not installed Store DirectX version number in this variable 4 1 0 x DirectX version 1 0 Click to assign 4 2 0 x DirectX version 2 0 4 3 0 x DirectX version 3 0 4 5 0 8 DirectX version 5 0 4 6 0 x DirectX version 6 0 4 6 2 4 DirectX version 6 1 Install DirectX if current version not found 4 7 0 x Directx version 7 0 4 8 0 DirectX version 8 0 4 8 1 8 DirectX version 8 1 4 9 0 DirectX version 9 0 Path to Directs setup files Illustration 8 9 DirectX Check Item Properties Gener
335. ocations on the customer s machine For example you could move all the files and folder in the directory C MyProd uct to C temp Modified date created date and version information can also be used as criteria for matching files and folders Move actions can be used to locate and move file s and folder s to a location and a move action can conditionally be performed based on the result of another action Move actions search criteria can use name created date modified date or version Wild card characters may also be used in your search criteria Move actions will not move hid den files or folders There are replace options if a file or folder currently exists in the location where you are trying to move it The replace options can be Always Never If target is older If target is older or the same or Ask user You can use version information with replace options If unchecked replace options will use the modified date as its criteria 9 Move actions do not find hidden files or folders To add a Move action item 1 Select Move from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Move A Move action item is added to the archive and the Move Action Properties window appears Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 50 Move Action Item 2 Click on the General tab The Move Action Properties General page appears Move Action Properties 24 x
336. of the files they want to install Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Creating a List Package 6 15 The following window demonstrates an installer in which the customer has selected to dis play the sub components of a package Select Sub components x Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Sub components Downloads Ink W Endofmonth txt DK MEndofmonth txt DK M Endofday txt DK M Endofyear txt OK Mletter txt OK gt Description Select the individual components you wish to install Space Required 1000 K Space Available 1826120 K Illustration 6 13 List Packages Creating a List Package You can add a list package to a Package or a Sub Package To create a list package 1 Double click on the package or sub package for which you want to add a list pack age The Package Properties window appears 2 Click on the Advanced tab The Package Properties Advanced page appears Package Properties 24 x General Advanced System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments IV List package List package description Select the individual components you wish to install Purchase Has No Effect Illustration 6 14 Package Properties Advanced page 3 Click on the List package checkbox 4 Type a description of the list package in the List package description field The information you enter in this f
337. omating installer VISE Installer VISE for Windows Recording and Playing Back Installs Recording and Playing Back Installs How it Works Installer VISE for Windows 20 3 This feature enables customers who use your installer to automate the installation process For example m Systems administrators could use record and playback to control installation of your software on multiple computers in a network m Third party developers could use the feature to automate your installer as needed for inclusion with their products Although you might not use this feature as a developer you might want to provide the following information to select customers who have a need to control the installation of your software In contrast to the Snapshot Wizard see Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard record and playback does not require the user to repackage the installer with Installer VISE Instead customers can simply run your installer once using a special command line switch that records all user settings such as package selection and text input The installer can then be launched on another machine and run silently without user intervention To record an install 1 Launch the installer with a command line that follows this format setup exe r recsettings 1m1 The user settings will be recorded to the INI file specified here 2 Complete the installation process using the selections and input you would like to record for automation purpo
338. on Information Screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox 1f you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 12 Customizing the Registration Information Screen 4 Make entries in the following fields Registration Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Registration Information Screen Setup is ready Type the text you want to appear on this screen amp User Name Type the name you want to use for the User Name field in the installer This field defaults to amp User name and appears as User Name to your customer when the installer is run amp Organization Type the name you want to use for the Organization field in the installer This field defaults to amp Organization and appears as Organization to your customer when the installer is run amp Serial Number Type the name you want to use for the Serial Number field in the installer This field defaults to amp Serial Num ber and appears as Serial Number to your customer Table 10 3 Registration Information Fields a If the Organization field 1s left blank only the User name and Serial num yD AA ber fields appear to your customer I
339. ons Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 5 Add additional billboards from the Billboards window Billboards y IV Display in a separate window New Delete Edit Preview Illustration 6 24 Billboards window with multiple billboards Chapter 6 Creating an installer Installer VISE for Windows Adding Automated Billboards 6 27 6 If you select Display in a separate window billboards will be displayed during an install as in the illustration below Our New Product Setup more powerful easier to use Copying file Dec lnstaller VISE 3 0 Relnotes tet E I Cancel This installation was created with Installer VISE from Mind ision Software http Awa mindyvision com EX SO AG E setu 7 GORRO naw Illustration 6 25 Billboard in Separate Window 7 If you do not select Display in a separate window billboards will be displayed dur ing an install together with the progress dialog as in the illustration below more powerful easier to use Copying file o stevew xxx Installer VISE 3 04 Installer VISE Support Panel2 bmp This installation was created with Installer WISE from Mind ision Software http www mindwision com Illustration 6 26 Billboard With Progress Dialog Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Assigning External Code Setting File Optio
340. ons are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Table 11 11 Picture Item Properties Left Edge Ctrl Left Arrow Right Edge Ctrl Right Arrow Top Edge Ctr Up Arrow Bottom Edge Ctrl D own Arrow Horizontal Center Shift F9 Vertical Center F9 Size To Content Shift F Illustration 11 23 Align Menu Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 22 Menu item Left Edge Editing Items in the Edit Area Description Aligns the left edges of selected items Right Edge Aligns the right edges of selected items Top Edge Aligns the top edges of selected items Bottom Edge Aligns the bottom edges of selected items Horizontal Center Aligns the horizontal centers of selected items Vertical Center Aligns the vertical centers of selected items Size to Content The selected item s will be resized to fit their con tent This command works on buttons checkboxes radio buttons and pictures Table 11 12 Screen Editor File Menu Items Editing Items in the Edit You can easily reposition and resize items directly in the edit area of the screen area Area Selecting An Item To select an item simply click on it with the left mouse button Any other items that are selected will automatically be deselected Selecting Multiple Items To select multiple items simply click the left mouse button while on the desired items
341. opmenu 3 Click on the OK button The change is saved and the Language Properties dialog box appears 4 Click on the Close button The Archive window appears Deleting an Installer You might need to delete a language from the installer Language To delete a language 1 At the Language Properties dialog box select the language you want to delete 2 Click on the Remove button The following message appears MindVision Installer VISE IN Are you sure you want to remove the selected language Illustration 18 11 Confirm Removal of Selected Language 3 Select Yes The Language Properties dialog box appears and the language is deleted from the Language field 4 Click on the Close button The Archive window appears Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables About Runtime Variables Runtime Variables Installer VISE for Windows This chapter describes variables and their usage within Installer VISE Variables can be divided into two types m Runtime Variables on page 19 1 and 13 a User defined Variables on page 19 7 Runtime variables are placeholders that are filled with values when the installer is run on the customer s computer For example WinDir is filled with the path name of the current Windows directory and TargetDir is filled with the path name of the destina tion directory where the customer has chosen to ins
342. or more ways to customize screens For details see Editing Built in Screens on page 114 Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 16 Display Screen Action Item To add a Display Screen action item 1 Select Display Screen from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Display Screen A Display Screen action item 1s added to the archive and the Select Screen Type window appears Select Screen Type Ea Screen types Custom Screen Custom Screen Splash Screen Welcome Screen Read Me Message Requirements Screen License Agreement Verify Password Registration Information Select Install Directory Select Install Type Select Components Select Program Folder Ready To Install Message Cancel Read Me Message Finished Message Finished Message 2 Illustration 8 11 Select Screen Type Window 2 To display a custom screen select Custom Screen from the Screen types popmenu To display a standard screen select the name of the standard screen to be displayed 3 The screen properties window below is displayed Screen Properties El E prragenennacanenenannos General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B gt Name Custom Screen Edit Screen Illustration 8 12 Screen Properties Function Name If a standard screen was selected for display the standard screen name will appear in this fie
343. order like you are when using the Screens menu You can also insert your own custom dialogs anywhere in the sequence and or call custom code in between dialogs Installer VISE for Windows Editing Custom Screens 11 5 The basic method for using Display Screen actions is to uncheck all items in the Screens menu Add your Display Screen actions to the item list and move them to the top of the list Remove the items from all packages except the Pre Screens Items package Make sure the items are part of the Pre Screens Items package This means these items will be executed before anything in the Screens menu is executed We have unchecked everything in the Screens menu so after the Display Screen actions have been executed the installer starts executing the other items in the item list The behavior of the buttons in the built in dialogs function such that the Next button will move execution to the next Display Screen action in the item list The Back button will move execution to the previous Display Screen action in the item list You can mix Display Screen actions and the dialogs in the Screens menu in the same installer However dialogs that are displayed using the Screens menu will not be able to go Back to Display Screen actions and vise versa Editing Custom Screens Ifyou select the Edit Screen button for a Custom Screen you will display the screen edi tor which allows you to create your own custom screens Screen Editor Ml ES File
344. ore Property page allows you to add multiple lines of external code that can be P P p Page called before an item is processed To access the Before Property page 1 Click on the Before tab from the Properties window of the selected item The Before Property page appears Copy Action Properties FEW System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments Before After 4 gt Call these external codes before this item is Installed Mew Edit Delete Illustration 9 12 Before property page 2 Click on the New button The Call External Code Item Properties dialog box appears See Chapter 17 Using External Code for more information Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Installer VISE for Windows After Property Page 9 13 3 Select the external code you want to add and click on the OK button The Before Property page appears 4 Repeat these steps for each line of external code you want to add You want to edit external Select the external code and click on the Edit button code The Call External Code Item Properties dialog box appears Make the appropriate entry and click on the OK button The Before Property page appears You want to delete external Select the external code and click on the Delete button code The external code 1s deleted Table 9 7 Editing and Deleting Before External Code After Property Page The After Property page allows you to add multiple lines of external cod
345. ou build an installer alerting you that you are using unlicensed software and providing you the opportunity to purchase an Installer VISE subscription online m The Installer VISE splash screen appears alerting your customers that you used unlicensed software m The installer expires three days from the date the unlicensed installer was built If you activate your copy of Installer VISE you no longer see the purchase reminder dialog when building installers the Installer VISE splash screen is not visible to your customers and the installer does not automatically expire To activate your copy of Installer VISE 1 From the Installer VISE program folder double click on the Installer VISE icon The Installer VISE splash screen appears This is an UNLICENSED version of Installer VISE from Mind vision Software Commercial distribution prohibited in this DEMO version For licensing information contact MindVision Software 5901 North 58th Street Email sales mindvision com Lincoln NE 68507 Web www mindwyision com Voice 402 323 6600 Fax 402 323 6611 Copyright 1995 2004 Mindwvision Software All rights reserved worldwide Illustration 2 8 Installer VISE Splash Screen 2 Click on the splash screen The Archive window appears Installer VISE for Windows Activating Installer VISE Installer VISE for Windows 3 Select About Installer VISE from the Help menu The About MindVision Installer VISE dialog
346. owing options from the Replace popmenu Function Always Always replaces options if a file currently exists with the new name Never Never replaces options if a file currently exists with the new name If target is older If the item on the customer s machine 1s older replaces options with the new name If target is older or the If the item on the customer s machine is older or the same same replaces options with the new name Ask user Asks the customer if the options should be replaced Table 8 37 Rename Action Replace options 6 Click on the Version check checkbox if you want to use version information with rename options If you want the rename options to use the modified date of the files do not click on this checkbox See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Run Application Action Item 13 Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 After Property Page on page 9 13 Run Application Action You can add a Run Application item to an archive using the Run Application action item Item command This action item
347. ows Contents iii Setting Installer Web Properties 0 edad tidad ee aE OS 6 42 Generating Archive Repons a vis tai A eee ada 4 6 43 Type OL ATRIO REDOMS 44 3555 nu dNeoVer ds daa A de fase we 6 43 Ceanes an Archive Report sauce ds OS eel anak eS Ree a ee se 6 44 sena LENS CANE IG a A Woe AE GA ToT oe Gea RE 6 44 Building the Final installer oy fos oe EA E A AAA ORE EROS 6 45 Gencriuner Bate File sd ta ib ici a Ads Na a a oar ae 6 46 Copying the Installer to Installation Media oooooooooonornroo 6 48 Copying the Installer to Floppy Diskettes 2 tutu 0 2 den oats aria rada es 6 48 Cepyine the nstaller io CDROM gt ss Uco 6 48 Waimea tte Archie bdo da do Gai tA lo Oe a tone oS ad ae GO a eh et we 6 48 Updannt ANAKE san e ais ads A eee aod Braco las oath a eee 6 48 Edita Source Directories rias Bone eyes AA Rye ERR a CERES 6 50 Creating An Active Web Installer o ooo o 7 1 Active Clo LSC ANNCUS trese retr rare palet iaa 7 1 Active Web Installer Seip baaa di daras de 7 1 Creating an Active Web Installer Build Tarta cda 7 2 Creating le GUDS A A Sd a 7 4 Assigning files tO File Groups 2 prado peli doin we ra dai bad alo aaa 7 5 Desienating Download Sites ies A ERAS A AA 7 6 Usina a separate Catalonia Dai q eee ay eae eaten ta ee een 7 6 Mite Users Initial EX perience ssc da IA ERA A E A ia 7 7 The U seks o Ubsequent Experience ie mad diiniita aba de dodo drid seas 7 9 Using Archive Items 0 8 1
348. p has detected that this system does not meet the following requirements for 4ProductName E Cancel Help Illustration 3 20 Context sensitive Help Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics 3 22 Accessing Help from a Window or Dialog Box Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 4 Designing an Installer About Installers About Installer VISE Installer VISE for Windows This chapter contains information about planning and designing an installer to be created with Installer VISE Just as you carefully plan and execute the development of your software you should spend some time planning your installer Your installer is the first direct contact customers have with your software package Although Installer VISE provides an easy and flexible environment for developing installers only you can take into account the requirements of your customers and your product Following are some issues you should consider if you have never designed an installer m Different combinations of applications and files customers might wish to install to customize their installation of your software m Minimum system requirements m Checking for and how to handle specific situations on the target machine For example different architectures or the presence of duplicate files m Whether your product requires custom codes to evaluate the target system or perform additional functions Ho
349. perty Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Ini File Entry You can add a new ini file entry to an archive using the Ini File command Ini file entries can be written read into a runtime variable or removed from the ini file To add an Ini File Entry At the Archive window select Ini File Entry Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu A Ini File Entry item is added to the archive and the Ini File Entry Properties win dow appear Setting Ini File General To set ini file general properties Properties 1 At the Ini File Entry Properties window click on the General tab The Ini File Entry Properties General page appears Ini File Entry Properties 21 x prrgacnnncnnanenananzos write entry Jarabe menty I Don t add to uninstaller File AwinDirzAFlename in Section Po Illustration 8 30 Ini File Entry General Properties 2 Select the type of entry you want to add from the Entry popmenu Function Read entry Adds a read entry to the archive Write entry Adds a write entry to the archive Remove entry Adds a remove entry to the archive Table 8 26 Ini Entry Options Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Input Box Action Item 8 43 3 Make entries in the following fields Function Variable If you selected Read entry select a variable
350. ppears 2 Click on the General tab The Open Internet Address Properties General page appears Open Internet Address Properties 1 1x sresesecesesecesescese Internet Address OKA V Wait for user to exit browser before continuing T Open after a successful setup has completed Illustration 8 38 Open Internet Address Properties General page 3 Type the Internet address you wish to open in the Internet Address field For exam ple type www mindvision com 4 Click on the Wait for user to exit browser before continuing checkbox if you want the installer to wait until the user has quit the web browser before continuing 5 Click on the Open after a successful setup has completed checkbox if you want the Internet address to be opened after a successful setup is finished See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 52 Program Items 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Program items You can create a program item remove a program item create a progra
351. ption the Snapshot Wizard will take you directly to the Run Installers screen m Type the path and file name in the File field where you wish to create the new or open the existing snapshot file You may also use the Browse button to bring up a file selection dialog m Automatically delete snapshot file when finished Turning on this checkbox will automatically delete the snapshot file after the snapshot installer has been created If you do not need to keep the snapshot file around for diag nostic purposes you may want to turn this on Once you have completed the above select the Next button Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Directories Registry Keys and INI Files 14 3 Directories Registry Keys and INI Files Add Directories to be Excluded Add Registry Keys to be Excluded Add INI Files to be Included Installer VISE for Windows 3 The Directories Registry Keys and INI Files screen allows you to exclude specific directories registry keys and include specific ini files Step 2 Directories Registry Keys and INI Files EXCLUDE the following directories from the scan i Add Remove EXCLUDE the following registry keys from the scan Add Remove INCLUDE the following INI files in the scan H WINNT System ini H WINNT Win ini Add Remove Save as defaults Edit Skip List lt Back Cancel Illustration 14 3 Direc
352. r Maybe you need to convey more information to the user or query the user for information during the installation Perhaps you need to conditionally install files based on a user s response to a screen you display in the middle of the installation The Display Screen action allows you to do all of the above and much more by allowing you to create Custom Screens using the built in Screens Editor This is a very powerful feature that allows you to completely cus tomize the installation interface and interaction with the user Displaying a simple screen to convey information during the installation Screen Editor Ox File Edit Layout Align e lt 2 Ba Xx EO J ofre Sample Custom Screen x TreeFrog 2 0 application has been found in the selected directory Please select a different directory ora E AAA AAA Illustration 11 2 Designing a Simple Screen in the Screen Editor Displaying a complex screen to obtain user input and conditionally install files Screen Editor Al E File Edit Layout Align EB 40 abl E Please enter your Registration Name Serial Number and Plug in installation options Name y Serial FO Install Plug in for Acme C Widget Browser Both IV Delete any old version Illustration 11 3 Designing a User Input Screen in the Screen Editor Installer VISE for Windows Creating a New Display Screen action Creating a New Display Screen action 1 From th
353. r 10 Using Installer Screens Select Splash Screen from the Screens menu The Splash Screen dialog box appears Splash Screen E4 M Show this dialog M Use default text ZProductN ame Setup Set Clear Wariable Click to assign i i Cancel Help Illustration 10 2 Splash Screen dialog Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Splash Screen to appear during the install Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps If you left the Use default text checkbox unchecked type what you want to appear in the title bar of the Splash Screen For example type the name of your product and Setup This field defaults to ProductName Setup Refer to the treatment 13 of the runtime variable ProductName on page 19 4 for more information The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played You can use the default bitmap displayed or select your own customized bitmap to add to the
354. r The bar located at the bottom of the Archive window that displays prompts and descriptions of the selected command Table 3 4 Archive Window parts Chapter 3 Installer VISE Basics Installer VISE for Windows Installer VISE Menus 3 7 Description Maximize button The button on the right side of the title bar When you select this button the Archive window fills the available space with the archive you are presently working on This performs the same function as the Maximize command in the Application Control menu Once you select this button it changes to the Restore button Restore button The button on the right side of the title bar When you select this button the Archive window becomes a sizable window Once you select this button it changes to the Maximize button Close button The button on the right side of the title bar with an X When you select this button you close the Archive window This performs the same function as the Close command in the Application Control menu Scroll bars The gray horizontal and vertical bar on the Archive window These allow you to scroll up and down or right and left Minimize button The button on the right side of the title bar When you select this button Installer VISE is stored as an application button on the bottom of the screen This performs the same function as the Minimize command in the Application Control menu Table 3 4 Archive Window parts Insta
355. r exists on the web site and needs to be down loaded it will be saved in the download data folder AAA AAA as Only the necessary file groups are downloaded and saved locally Sd Installer VISE Setup EI Downloading Files Files are being downloaded to your computer Status Receiving File 6 of 25 Downloading esellerate 7619K of 19011K n From Mind ision using FTP protocol Illustration 7 14 Downloading file groups within the Installer Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer Installer VISE for Windows The User s Subsequent Experiences 7 9 When all necessary file groups have been downloaded the user is told that they may dis connect from their Internet connection v Installer VISE Setup Ed Downloading Files The files have been downloaded to your computer If you have a dialup connection to the internet you can disconnect now After disconnecting click the Continue button below Cancel i Illustration 7 15 Download complete message If the user clicks Cancel the active installer will quit All items that were downloaded are saved locally for future install sessions If the user clicks Continue the installation will proceed as if it were a single file installer Copying file C Program Files Installer VISE Installer VISE Support dsetup32 dll This installation was created with Installer VISE from MindWision Software http www mindw
356. r the installer This dialog gives your cus Finished Message 2 tomer the option of restarting the computer Screen To customize the Finished Message 2 Screen 1 Select Finished Message 2 from the Screens menu The second Finished dialog box appears Finished Fa T Show this dialog M Use default text Finished Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer O Yes want to restart my computer now C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Close to complete setup Set Clear Variable Click to assign E Cancel Help Illustration 10 16 Finished Message 2 dialog Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using installer Screens 10 26 Customizing the Finished Message 2 Screen 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the second Finished Message Screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox 1f you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Make entries in the following fields Finished Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the second Finished Message Screen This field defaults to Finished Setup has finis
357. ram Item General Properties 8 53 2 Select one of the following actions you want to take place from the Program item popmenu Function Create program item Creates a program item on the customer s computer Remove program item Removes a program item from the customer s computer Create program group Creates a program group on the customer s computer Remove program group Removes a program group from the customer s com puter Table 8 32 Program Item Options 3 Ifyou are adding or removing a program item type the name of the program item in the Name field AAA A AAA A AA Program Item names are truncated at 40 characters when created on Win dows 3 x 4 Type the name of the program group where the item is to be created in the Group field You can use the variable DefProgramGroup to create the item in the default program group or you can enter a name that should always be used NN A O NS Program Group names are truncated at 30 character when created on Win D f dows 3 x You can nest Program groups in Windows 9 x Me NT 2000 and XP 5 Ifyou are adding a program item select the name of the file from the File name popmenu or click on the button to access the Select File from Archive dialog box 6 Ifyou are adding a program item type the parameters that are passed to the file in the Params field You can use variables here For example type Target Dir Readme txt
358. rchive itself in which case the names of files packages disks and other text appear in the archive in the new language Or you can import the resources of the translator application into a language file for the archive This allows you to keep the archive in your native language while creating installers that sup port foreign languages SS WU Language Properties are specific to Build Targets Any changes you make to Language Properties will remain associated with the current Build Target the one selected in the upper left corner of the archive window See Build Targets on page 15 5 7 S M Language properties are edited by choosing Language Properties from the File Menu Language Properties ES Create Translation File Import Translation File Edit Remove t Default language is English v Default installer resources English v Default display text Engish M Show select language dialog M Use default text Trrveccseesceeeeeesecseseescsssesseoes Title Select Language Text Please select the language that you would like to use during the installation Illustration 18 1 Language Properties Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages 18 4 Setting Language Properties Option Function Languages A list of the languages that are have been imported into the installer Create Translation File Click this button to create a transla
359. rchive window item list and open its proper ties window Select the Advanced tab of the Properties window General Advanced Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Cc_4 gt Install from Default location Install to Install Directory z Replace Attributes Read only J Hidden y If Newer Version IV Archive I System File group IV Replace ifinuse J Register exe dll ocx tlb files Installer VISE y Shared file Il Don t add to uninstaller log Individual File 2 7 Install font IV Replace if locked Illustration 7 9 Assigning files to file groups If a folder is selected then all items within that folder will be assigned to the file group If a folder is selected in the Archive Window and it is set to Individual File all files within that folder will be set to Individual File When the active web installer is built the folder will be created with individual group files for every file in the folder When the installer is run by an end user it will look for that folder on the web server s Initial Directory The installer will then try downloading the file from that directory Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 7 Creating An Active Web Installer 7 6 Designating Download Sites NN NN If the build target selector does not display a web based installer then the file group popmenu 1s dimmed Designating Download Within Installer VISE download sites are predetermined web a
360. rd enned ol arici ok beste Aca ales E ints tae Le S 19 7 Using Variables for Text Substitution aa AR we RSA Re AA 19 7 Declaring a Variable and Setting Initial Value anni rd dant en ei ahaha dedo 19 7 Entero Variables an extrenar A 19 8 Extermnmally Setting Variables a yeu A AA A 19 8 Externally Setting Yo ares iG rr Seok Soe ee Eee ees 19 9 Automating Installer VISE 0 00 20 1 Automatins Installer Buldi dades ib SAL seek eek a GAMER ace a ida 20 1 Build Targets and PAC WY A sabia Meda tote lon are se pest ep Be Be aioe esi gh hae nasties eo eek LD oe 20 1 Bate Hv FCS a ok Gk a ANA 20 1 Ar tomatino Tastallers gt stc acatar nta dhe ale a 20 2 Recording and Playing Back Installs iaa ads 20 3 Monitorning Installer Progress as E E a idos 204 Events Reported by Installers ds A A A cacas 20 4 Finding More Information gt traia dali Vie RARA eA ale aca oie ae oak 20 4 Installer VISE for Windows Contents viii Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome Installer VISE Overview Today s enterprising businesses are continuously seeking an effective means of delivering their products to their customers MindVision Software is committed to providing a soft ware delivery platform for today s business demands as well as envisioning most of the installation needs of tomorrow s businesses We continue to develop state of the art soft ware delivery technology that our customers have come to e
361. rgetDirShort 19 6 TargetDrive 19 6 Technical Support 3 18 Temp Directory 8 27 8 67 TempDir 19 6 TempDrive 19 6 Test 3 6 Test Installer 3 8 5 10 Test Screen 11 7 Test Variable 8 76 Testing an Installer 6 44 Text 18 5 18 11 Time Zone Adjusted Dates 6 34 Title 18 5 18 11 Title Bar 3 6 Tools 13 1 Tools Menu 3 16 Trace 6 21 84 Translation File Installer VISE for Windows Index 9 ABCDEFGH_ u 4MIJKLMNOPQOQORSTOUOV Wx Y az creating 18 3 Verification Options importing 18 8 Automatic 10 13 translating 18 6 Custom 10 13 Typical 10 15 Verify Archive 3 16 13 1 13 7 Typical Setup 6 7 to 6 8 10 15 Verify Password 3 12 6 23 Verify Password Screen 10 9 U Vertical Scroll 11 15 Uninstall display name 6 37 View Menu 3 10 Uninstall log file path 6 37 VISEICat cat dd Uninstaller 6 35 VISEICat idx 7 6 to 7 7 Uninstaller Properties 6 35 Visual Basic project file 13 2 Update 3 9 Visual Basic Project Wizard 3 16 13 1 to 13 2 Update Archive 3 9 6 48 Update selected files W batch file 6 47 Wait for application to finish 8 64 Updater VISE 16 1 Wait for user to exit browser before continuing 8 51 Use common programs folder 6 38 Web Installers 7 1 15 5 Use default text 10 4 10 6 to 10 8 10 10 10 16 10 18 to 10 assigning files to file groups 7 5 19 10 21 10 24 10 26 18 5 benefits 7 1 Use default text checkbox 10 11 10 14 build targets 7 2 Use Proxy 7 8 download sites 7 6 Use source language as default translation 18 6 file groups
362. riable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 10 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 14 Customizing the Select Install Directory Screen Customizing the Select Install Directory Screen You can customize the installer s Select Install Directory Screen You can assign a default directory for the installer in this dialog You can also add a side bitmap with the dimen sions of 138x258 pixels To customize the Select Install Directory Screen 1 Select Select Install Directory from the Screens menu The Select Install Direc tory dialog box appears Select Install Directory x V Show this dialog IV Use default text Choose Destination Location Setup will install 4ProductN ame in the following directory To install to this directory click Next To install to a different directory click Browse and select another directory You can choose not to install ProductName by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Default destination directory Win3 x Default destination directory W in95 amp newer ProgramFilesD ir gi Set Clear Variable Click to assign x Cancel Help
363. rive 19 6 TargetDirShort 19 6 TargetDrive 19 6 TempDir 19 6 TempDrive 19 6 UserName 19 6 WinDir 19 6 WinDrive 19 7 S Same 16 4 Save 3 8 Save As 3 3 3 8 Save In 3 4 Save Installer As 6 45 Scan Project 13 3 Screen Editor 11 1 Screen Editor Components 11 23 Screen Items repositioning 11 22 resizing 11 22 selecting 11 22 selecting multiple 11 22 setting properties 11 23 Screen Properties 11 4 Screens adding 5 8 6 23 custom 11 1 Screens Menu 3 10 Scroll bars 3 7 Second Read Me Message Screen 10 22 Section 8 43 Seed value 10 13 Segment size 15 6 Select Audio 6 41 Select Components 3 13 6 8 6 23 10 18 Select Components Screen 10 17 Select Components text 10 18 Index 8 A B C D E F G H I Select Install Directory 3 12 5 8 6 23 Select Install Directory Screen 6 8 10 14 Select Install Type 3 13 6 23 Select Install Type Screen 10 15 Select Language dialog 9 7 Select Min resolution 6 41 Select Program Folder 3 13 6 37 10 20 Select Program Folder Screen 10 19 Select Program Folders 6 23 Select this package by default 6 11 6 14 Selfregistration of files 8 31 Separators 6 11 to 6 12 Serial Number 19 5 Service interacts with the desktop 8 72 Service name 8 72 Service type 8 73 Set Service State 8 72 Set service state 8 72 Set Variable 8 76 Setting File Options 6 28 Settings 1n1 setting runtime variable values 19 8 Setup has finished 10 26 Setup is ready 10 12 Setup requires 10 10 Setup Type
364. rom the Tools menu The Visual Basic Project Wizard will be displayed 2 Type the name for your product in the Product name field 3 Type the directory where you want your product installed in the Default directory field 4 Type the path for the VB Project file in the Visual Basic project file field or click Browse and select the file Open El ES Look in passthru y E Pass_svr vbp File name Pass_cli vbp Files of type YB Project Files vbp del Cancel Lene Illustration 13 3 Selecting VB Project File 5 Check Rebuild the Project if you want the project file rebuilt before being scanned Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools Installer VISE for Windows Visual Basic Project Wizard 13 3 6 Click Scan Project to scan the project Required files will be displayed in the Required files list box Visual Basic Project Wizard x The Installer ISE Project Wizard for Visual Basic 5 0 will create an Installer VISE project which includes the files required by your Visual Basic application Product name M yYBProduct Default directory 2ProgramFilesDirz Browse Visual Basic project file bp E Program Files DevStudio VB samples entrpris passthru4P Browse Scan Project T Rebuild the Project Required files checked files will be added to your project T Add duplicate files Program Files DevStudio VB samples entrpris passthru pass_cli exe E WINNTSystem32 AsycFilt
365. rty pages 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 m Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 You can add a new variable to an archive using the Variable Item command You can cre ate a runtime variable and set 1ts value or you can test the value of the runtime variable and take an action based on the results of the test If you test a variable you can link other items to the success or failure of the test Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 76 Variable Item AAA All variables are treated internally as strings Keep this in mind if you are doing comparisons between numbers For example 11 will test as less than 2 To add a Variable item 1 At the Archive window select Variable Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu A variable item is added to the archive and the Variable Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Variable Item Properties General page appears Variable Item Properties Ea E pregarnnnannanennnnazos Setvaiable JH Name Click to assign fis Numerne comparison Value Env vanae o Venable Neme Eick ta assign Default Valve He Illustration 8 56 Variable Item Properties General page 3 Select one of the variable manipulation optio
366. s Table 8 15 Replace Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 30 Setting File Item Advanced Properties 5 The File Group popmenu is enabled if the current build target is a Web Installer The combo box contains two or more items Function In Installer Installer will use the Install from field to determine where the file will be installed from Individual File The file will be compressed and a Group File will be created for that file only The Group File must then put copied to the server s that will be used for the active web install Other Group Files The file will be compressed and a Group File will be created for that file only The Group File must then be copied to the server s that will be used for the active web install Table 8 16 File Group Options 6 Set any remaining advanced file properties that apply to the file in question Function Replace if in use If target file is in use it will be replaced after a restart Please note that when using this option on Win95 98 Me a file with a long file name will use the short 8 3 convention file name when it is replaced after the restart This is due to a limitation of Windows A workaround is to use short file names for files that are replaced if in use Shared file If a shared file registry entry exists the count will be incremented by one If a shared file registry entry does not exist one will be added and s
367. s 6 The Custom installer icon checkbox allows you to select the icon that you want to represent your installer on the customer s machine Select one of the following Function Custom installer icon Gives the installer the custom icon you select This feature 15 not supported on Windows 95 98 Me See Selecting a Custom Icon on page 6 33 for more information Table 6 12 Installer Icon Options To select a custom icon 1 At the Installer Properties General page click on the Custom installer icon check box 2 Click on the Change Icon button The Change Icon window appears Change Icon File Mame Current icon El Cancel Browse Illustration 6 31 Change Icon window 3 Click on the Browse button The Change Icon dialog box appears N Ga Orice El ex Ea Files02b ico S Files06 ico G Folder02 ico e Foldrs02 ic FilesO3a ico E FilesO ico E Folder03 ico 2x Graph0 ic IBY FilesO3b ico MA Files08 ico E Folder04 ico ide Graph02 ic EN FilesD4 ico E FilesO9 ico y Folderd5 ico GraphO3 ic J Files05a ico Elo Files10 ico FolderQ6 ico beck GraphO4 ic H FilesO5b ico f Folder01 ico Iig GraphO5 ic fo gt Files of type con Files Cancel Zi Illustration 6 32 Change Icon dialog Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 34 Time Zone Adjusted Dates Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Time Zone Adjusted Dates 4 Select the icon file you want
368. s 24 x General Packages System Languages Actions Build Directives Comments B Caption ProductName Message P enter your serial number Variable Pv eriaINumber O OOOO MV Disable cancel button Cancel button cancels entire install Illustration 8 32 Input Box Item Properties example Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Label Action Item Label Action Item Installer VISE for Windows An Input Box action item set up as in the illustration above produces a dialog like the one in the illustration below when the installer is run My Product 2 0 x Please type your serial number r anc el Illustration 8 33 Example Input Box See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 al Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 m After Property Page on page 9 13 You can add a Label action to the archive using the Label action item command This action item creates an insertion point for the Goto item Label items act as a placeholder The user selects the Label item in the Goto Item properties General tab Label ite
369. s launched For example A The StartMenu variable contains the path name of the Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP start menu folder For example C Win95 Start Menu This is only valid when the installer is running on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable is blank if the installer is run on Windows 3 1 or Windows NT 3 5 This variable allows you to use the correct location of the start menu folder which might be different for different customers running the same system different for Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP and different for other Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables 19 6 StartUp SysDir SysDrive TargetDir TargetDirShort TargetDrive TempDir TempDrive UserName WinDir StartUp languages With this path you can create new categories on the start menu move items into the start menu or delete items from it Items that are in the start menu folder are dis played on the start menu The StartUp variable contains the path name of the startup folder on the Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP start menu For example C Win95 Start Menu Programs StartUp This is only valid when the installer is running on Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP This variable is blank if the installer is run on W
370. s 8 27 Setting File Item Advanced To set file item advanced properties Properties 1 To change Advanced Properties for a file item select the Advanced tab of the File Properties window File Properties El E R Install from Default location Install to Replace Attributes Read only I Hidden Y If Newer Version M Archive I System le Groups IV Replace ifinuse Register exe dll ocx tlb files 74 7 Shared file I Don t add to uninstaller log Install font V Replace if locked In Installer Illustration 8 20 Advanced File Properties 2 Select an Install from option Function Default Location If the installer is a single file or segmented installer the file will be compressed in the installer and decompressed at install time If the installer is a CDROM install the file will be not be compressed in the installer and will be copied from the CD to the target location Other Location Path name of a location where the file to be installed can be found For example SrcDir lang the file will be copied from this location to the target machine Table 8 12 Install From Options 3 Select the install location for the file from the Install to popmenu Function Install Directory Installs the file to its relative location as it appears in the archive Windows Directory Installs the file to the current Windows directory System Directory Installs the file to the current
371. s Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Function Desktop Installs the shortcut on the customer s desktop Start Menu Folder Installs the shortcut in the customer s start menu folder The item is displayed on the customer s start menu Programs Folder Installs the shortcut in the programs folder which 1s dis played as a sub menu on the customer s start menu Startup Folder Installs the shortcut in the startup folder that is displayed on the customer s start menu under the programs sub menu Items that are in this folder are processed as Win dows starts up Fonts Folder Installs the shortcut in the fonts folder Table 8 41 Install Locations Valid for Windows 9 x Me NT4 2000 and XP 4 Click on the Don t add to uninstaller log checkbox if you do not want the short cut to be added to the uninstall log and not to be removed when the uninstaller is run See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Property pages 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 m After Property Page on page 9 13 Show Hide Progress You can add a Show Hide Progress action to the archive using the Show Hide Progress Action Item action item command This action it
372. s an example of the Archive window with a number of items already added Window The Archive window displays the hierarchy of packages in the archive and all the files folders and items in each package This is especially useful for copying and moving files You can open the folder that contains the file you want to move or copy and then drag it to the folder you want to put it in Packages sub packages and separators are located on the left side of the window Folders files action items and advanced items are located on the right hand side of the window Items that are assigned to a package appear with a check mark in the box to the left of the item Searching For Items in If you need to find an item that you have added to the archive use the Find command to the Archive Window search for text in the Archive Window This command looks for your search string in the list of archive items the list on the right side of the window The search always descends and starts with the selected item If the end of the list 1s reached the search wraps around to the beginning of the list To search for an item in an installer 1 4 Select Find from the Edit menu The Find window appears Find what Co Cancel Illustration 6 2 Find window Type the name or partial name of the item you want to search for and click on the OK button Once the item is located it is highlighted on the Archive window click on the Find Next button if you
373. s fields in the Available Fields scroll box and click the gt gt Copy gt gt button Fields can be moved up and down by dragging within the List Columns scroll boxes to change their order in the Archive window The Layout menu is dynamically created based upon the custom layouts and the ordering of those layouts in the Layout List To create a separator in the Layouts menu create a new layout and use a single dash as the layout name then drag the separator layout in the Layout List to the desired location Customize Illustration 12 7 Layout Menu with Separator Chapter 12 Customizing the Archive Window Installer VISE for Windows Default Layout 12 5 Default Layout The default layout is the layout which is listed first in the Layout List The default layout will be used when an archive 1s first opened and when a new VCT is created To set a lay out as the default layout drag the layout name to the top line of the Layout List window The Standard Layout The Standard Layout cannot be edited or deleted Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 12 Customizing the Archive Window 12 6 The Standard Layout Chapter 12 Customizing the Archive Window Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools Installer VISE includes a number of powerful tools to simplify the installer construction process These tools can be accessed from the Tools menu Tools Archive Wizard Visual Basic Project Wizar
374. s list will be deleted Default language is The default strings in the archive will be associated with the selected language What does this mean If the checkbox named Show select language dialog is checked and the default language is Spanish the Select Language dialog will list the default strings as Spanish Default installer resources The default resources for the installer will appear in this language Default display text If Show select language dialog is checked this text will be used as the default language s label in the list of lan guages displayed to the user Table 18 2 Language Properties Fields Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages Installer VISE for Windows Setting Language Properties Installer VISE for Windows 18 5 Function Show select language If checked a dialog will be displayed to the user when dialog the installer is launched asking them to pick one of the languages in the installer If this dialog is not checked and there are multiple languages in the installer dynamic localization will be used to identify the operating sys tem s language and display the proper language strings If the detected language is not included in the installer the default strings will be used Use default text If checked default text will be used for the select lan guage dialog The display text is taken from the vlg file section SelectLanguageDlg under the entri
375. s marked with an asterisk are core operating system components and should be added at your own risk T Add duplicate files Properties Cancel o o Illustration 13 7 Dependency Watcher Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools Installer VISE for Windows Dependency Watcher Installer VISE for Windows 13 5 2 Type the executable s path in the field named Application path or click the Browse button and select the file you want to watch Open olal Look in Updater VISE v L Tutorial updvise exe File name Jupdvise exe Files of type Executable Files exe Cancel ea Illustration 13 8 Selecting an Executable to Watch 3 Click the Launch button to start the executable running A list of DLL dependen cies will be shown after the executable exits Dependency Watcher x Enter a file s path and click Launch to watch an application run and determine implicit and dynamic module dependencies Application path E Program Files Installer VISE 2 7 1 Updater VISE Supdvise Browse Launch Module 4DVAPI32 dll Location E WINNT system32 4DVAPI32 dll Module CFGMGA32 dll Location E WINNT System32 CFGMGR 32 dll Module COMCTL32 dll Location E WwINNT system32 COMCTL32 dll Module comdlg32 dll Location E WINNT system32 comdlg32 dll Module GD132 dll Location E WINNT system324 G D132 dll Module KERNEL32 dll Location E WINNT system32 KERNEL32
376. s of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No Setup will close To install this product you must accept this agreement Variable Click to assign Cancel Help Illustration 10 6 License Agreement dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the License Agreement screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Verify Password Screen 10 9 4 Make entries in the following fields Software License Agree Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the ment License Agreement screen Please Read the following Type text that explains what your customer is to be read ing on this screen Software License Agree Type the text you want to appear on the License Agree ment text ment screen Do one of the following m Find a text file with the Explorer or File Man ager then drag and drop it onto the frame The text in the file is appended to the text in this field m Type the text you want to appear The size limit for license agreement text 1s 29K Do you accept This field explains what the Yes and No buttons are on the License Agre
377. s sub menu Items that are in this folder are processed as Windows starts up Only valid when installer is run on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Table 8 14 Install Locations Valid for Windows 9 x Me NT4 2000 and XP 4 Select the replace option for the file from the Replace popmenu Always Function Always replace the file if it exists Never Never replace the file if it exists If Target is Older Replace the existing file only if it is older If Target is Older or Same Replace the existing file if it is older or the same Ask User Ask the user if the file should be replaced If Exists Installs the item only if the item exists on the disk and the modification date of the item in the archive is newer than the one on the target system If Newer Version Compares the version number of the file in the archive against the version number of the file on the target system If the version in the archive is newer the item is installed Ask if False Can be selected in addition to an item above the separator line in the pop up menu If the item above the separator line fails for example If Newer is selected but the item in the archive is older the user is given the option to install the file in the archive anyway Doesn t apply to Always or Ask User Use Creation Date Forces a comparison of creation dates of the files as opposed to modification date
378. s that were created after or on the date in the Created date fields Table 9 2 Created Date Options 3 Type the created date in the Created date fields Three fields are provided to enter the created date Type the month in the first field the day in the second field and the year in the third field Selecting Version You can select the version number of an item as search criteria Number as Search te Note This does not apply to folders Criteria To select version number as search criteria 4 Click on the Version checkbox 2 Select one of the following options from the Version popmenu Function Searches for files with the same version number as the number in the Version number fields Searches for files with a version number that does not match the number in the Version number fields Table 9 3 Version Comparison Options Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties Packages Property Page System Property Page Packages Property Page Function is less than Searches for files with a version number that is less than the number in the Version number fields is lt or equal Searches for files with version numbers that are less than or equal to the number in the Version number fields 1s greater than Searches for files with version numbers that are greater than the number in the Version number fields is gt or equal Searches for files with version numbers that are
379. ses ei The resulting INI file can be manually revised to preset runtime variable lt values using the format described in Externally Setting Variables on Y i y page 19 8 Password verification when entry is prompted by the Verify Password installer screen is skipped over during playback Once an install is recorded different variations can be created by making copies of the INI file and modifying the contents as needed To play back an install Launch the installer with a command line that follows this format setup exe p recsettings in1 Be sure to reference the INI file that has the desired user settings Chapter 20 Automating Installer VISE 20 4 Monitoring Installer Progress Monitoring Installer The following information describes how applications can launch one or more installers Progress and monitor their progress through messages sent by the installers This feature can be used in conjunction with the installer playback functionality To monitor an installer s progress the application source code must 1 Create a message handler 2 Associate the handler with a possibly hidden window for receiving progress mes sages from the installer 3 Launch the installer with a command line that follows this format setup exe l listener n reporter p settings ini The 1 lowercase L switch and the name that follows signals the request for progress notification The name
380. should be the name of a probably hidden win dow that the application opens for the purpose of receiving and handling notifica tion messages sent by the installer The n switch and the name that follows is optional If present the installer will use the name provided to identify itself in notification messages it sends Thus by naming at command line launch one application could be monitoring multiple installers or multiple applications monitoring multiple launches of the same installer simultaneously without confusion or collision The p switch and the name that follows is also optional It simply illustrates how the notification feature might be used in conjunction with the playback feature Events Reported by The events an installer will report are as follows Installers Begin install m Successful completion of install Cancel or abort install Update of the progress bar whether hidden or not Finding More For more information on this feature see the Vise Monitor folder that s available as part Information of the Installer VISE installation This folder includes the following valuable reference items m Read Me file Sample application Sample application project Chapter 20 Automating Installer VISE Installer VISE for Windows A B C D EFG H Index Index 1 iJK L_MN OPRQRSsTUVWK YZZ Symbols Browser 19 2 CDROMDrive 19 2 CommonDesktop 19 2 CommonFilesDir 19 2 CommonPrograms 19
381. sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note Dimensions are in Dialog Units DLUs rather than pixels See Dialog Units on page 11 24 for more information Table 11 10 Group Box Item Properties Chapter 11 Custom Screens Installer VISE for Windows 11 21 Picture Properties Picture Properties Align Menu Installer VISE for Windows The Picture item creates a standard Picture item that allows you to display a bitmap image Picture Item Fa Bitmap file name po IV Frame Picture Dimensions Left E Width 59 Top E Height 17 Cancel Illustration 11 22 Picture Item Properties Window Property Description Bitmap File Name Type in the file path to bitmap file you wish to display You can also press the Browse button to bring up a standard file dialog When you build your installer this bitmap file will automatically be included with the installer Frame Picture Draws a three dimensional sunken border around the bitmap image Dimensions Sets the left and top coordinates of the item relative to the dialog and also the width and height of the item You can also set the coordinates and dimensions of an item directly in the edit area by dragging it or using the resize handles of a selected item The current dimen sions will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the screen editor Note Dimensi
382. sk 1 and the corresponding segment files to disk 2 disk 3 etc For example assume the name of your archive file is Myproduct vct You are planning to distribute your installation on high density floppies Set the maximum segment size of the install to 1420 and build the installer Let s assume the size of your install requires three floppy disks The files that are generated are Myproduct Setup exe Myproduct Setup 002 and Myproduct Setup 003 Copy Myproduct Setup exe to disk 1 Myproduct Setup 002 to disk 2 and Myproduct Setup 003 to disk 3 If you are creating a CD ROM for the installer it is recommended that you test the installer before it 1s copied To test the installer make a folder and copy the installer into the folder Try launching the installer from that folder If you are able to launch the installer successfully it can be copied to a CD ROM Whether you made a last minute revision to a small file or a major upgrade of your entire software package Installer VISE allows you to easily update and maintain your archive The Update Archive command allows you to easily update your archive Installer VISE dis plays a dialog that lists the layout of your install set when you choose Update Archive from the File menu The Update Archive feature lists files that are new different or missing Installer VISE places checkmarks next to these files Installer VISE updates only checked files To update an archive follow these steps
383. splayed will be the Select Components dialog This dialog will display all the Custom packages you have set up in your installer The user can then choose which one of these to install Only items that are part of the selected pack ages will be processed If the edit field for the Compact setup 1s left blank Compact setup will not be displayed as an option to the user of the installer Typical and Custom will be the only options available If the edit field for the Custom setup 1s left blank Cus tom setup will not be displayed as an option to the user of the installer Typical and Compact will be the only options available You can drag a bitmap file from the Explorer or File Manager and drop it onto the frame or click the Set but ton to choose a side bitmap to display The dimensions of the side bitmap are 138x258 pixels Select Components This screen is automatically displayed if the user chooses Custom Setup from the Select Install Type dialog or if there are no installation items in the Typical Setup and Compact Setup packages and there are installation items assigned to Custom packages Select Program Folder This screen can be displayed to the user giving them the opportunity to have the program items created in a dif ferent Program group Ready to Install Message Display the ready to install message screen to the user displaying an edit text field with the user s previous choices setup type destination d
384. ssary to perform this operation AutoCreate Updater Archive x This dialog helps you create a multi file updater archive 1 Select a storage folder to extract the archive files to 2 Select the folder containing the new files 3 Select the name and location for your multi file updater archive 4 Click Create to compare the files and create your new archive m1 Storage Folder Folder G work in progress Storage Folder Select 2 Compare To Folder Ai i m 3 Create As File G work in progress Updater Archive vet Select Cancel Create Illustration 16 2 AutoCreate Updater Archive dialog The Storage Folder and the Create As locations default to the location of the archive VCT You may change these locations 1f you wish For the Storage Folder it is recommended that you select an empty folder on a vol ume with plenty of available disk space AutoCreate Updater Archive will create two folders inside the selected folder an Updater Archive Files folder which will contain your update files and an Updater Extracted Files folder which will contain the source files which are extracted from your original archive These source files are necessary for Updater VISE to compare with your new files Installer VISE maintains the same folder hierarchy when creating the new update files This allows you to later perform an Update Archive command on your updater archive if
385. stall Type Setup Type Illustration 10 10 Select Install Type dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Select Install Type screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer VISE If you do not want to use the localized text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps 4 Make entries in the following fields Setup Type Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Select Install Type Screen Click the type This field defaults to Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Next Edit this text if necessary amp Typical Type a name for this field Program will be installed This field explains what the Typical install does This with most field defaults to Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users Edit this text if necessary Table 10 8 Install Type Options Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Select Components Screen 10 17 Customizing the Select Components Screen Installer VISE for Windows 8 Compact Type a name for this field This field defaults to amp Com pact Note If this field is left blank Compact setup will not be displayed as an option to the user of the i
386. stalled files will have created modified times set one hour ahead of the cre ated modified times in the Central Time Zone If the installer is created in the Central Time Zone Assign time zone adjusted dates to installed files 1s unchecked and the installer is run in the Eastern Time Zone the installed files will have created modified times set to the same values they were in the Central Time Zone Installer VISE for Windows Hide Starting Setup Please wait dialog Hide Starting Setup Please wait dialog Reserve __ kon first disk Authenticode support Validate file paths when saving project Rollback changes after cancelled installs Setting Installer Uninstaller Properties Installer VISE for Windows If checked the Starting Setup Please wait dialog will not be displayed as the installer starts up This field is enabled if the Segment size field is not set to Unlimited The amount of space will be reserved on the 1st disk of the install set For example if the Segment size field is set to 1420 and the Reserve field is set to 128 the 1st segment of the install set will be set to 1420k 128k 1292k The remaining segments will be 1420k in size If checked you can sign your installer using the Microsoft Authenticode signing process This third party solution verifies signed software to help customers decide whether to download the products over the Internet If che
387. start This helps ensure that all files are registered If a self registering file is in use and can t be replaced the installer prompts the user for a restart The installer makes an entry to the HKLM SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Cur rentVersion RunOnce registry key After the restart the file is installed and then registered One catch the installer must have an uninstaller included for this to work The unin staller handles the registration after the restart This feature applies to individual files and is turned on by default It is active when Replace When In Use 1s checked in Advanced File Properties E See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 a Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 m Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 You can add a Find action to the archive using the Find action item command Other action items are typically linked to Find actions This action is used to see if specific files or folders exist on the customer s machine If they do exist certain actions can be per formed If they do not exist diff
388. stom screen the text entered in the edit text field will automatically be assigned to the variable you define Required Input If you wish to force the user to enter text in an edit text field select this property When the user presses a but ton that has the Continue Installation and Verify Fields properties set all edit text fields with Required Input will be checked If one or more edit text fields do not have text entered an error message will be displayed to the user and the user will be returned to your custom screen with the focus set to the appropriate edit text field requiring input Table 11 9 Edit Text Item Properties Installer VISE for Windows Edit Text Properties Property Multiline 11 19 Description Creates a multiline edit text field By default if a multi line edit text field has focus and a user presses ENTER the dialog box responds as if the user had chosen the default command button If you want users to be able to insert new lines in multi line edit text fields by pressing ENTER you should enable either the AutoHScroll or Want return proper ties When AutoHScroll is selected the multiline edit text field automatically scrolls horizontally when the caret goes past the right edge of the field Pressing ENTER starts a new line When AutoHScroll is not selected the multiline edit text field automatically wraps words to the beginning of the next line when necessary Pressing ENTER s
389. stomer runs the installer Each archive automatically contains Support Files Typical Setup Compact Setup and Silent Setup packages Typical Setup and Compact Setup packages work with the Install Type screen This screen presents the customer with the following three options during the install Typical Setup If selected by the customer items are processed that are part of that package Compact Setup If selected by the customer items are processed that are part that package Custom Setup Presents the customer with the Select Components screen to select which packages he she wants to install This screen displays the custom packages you have defined in the archive m Silent Setup The Silent Setup package is a package that is installed if the installer is launched with the s parameter For instance the command line F MyFiles setup exe s would silently launch the installer setup exe Any items that are in the package are processed The purpose is to provide an install that can be used with a batch file no customer intervention is required and no dialogs are displayed Support Files The Support Files package is used for files that are needed by the installer For example external code dll files and bitmap files for billboards These are files that must be present as the installer is running These files are compressed into the first segment of the install Installer VISE makes the first segment as big as i
390. t Setup packages Chapter 6 Creating an Installer 6 14 About List Packages About List Packages To create a sub package 1 Select the package to which you want to add a sub package 2 Select Sub Package from the Add menu A new sub package is added to the package and the Package Properties window appears 3 Click on the General tab The Package Properties General page appears 4 Make entries in the following fields Name Type the name of the sub package This appears to the customer in the Components area Desc Type a description about the package This appears to the customer in the Description field Table 6 7 Sub package Fields 5 Select from the following options by clicking on the appropriate checkboxes Function Select this package by Selects this package by default in the installer default Package size Checks the sub package size during the install Type the size of the sub package in the KB field Table 6 8 Sub package Options If you want to allow customers to select among several different files to install you can create a list package It presents the files as a list from which any or all of the files can be selected For example if your installation includes a large set of items such as several PostScript Printer Define files customers only need to install the files that meet their requirements By placing those files in a list package customers can select which
391. t needs to be to accommodate all the files that are in the Sup port Files package So it is recommended that you only put files into this pack age if they are really needed here Pre Screens Items The Pre Screens Items package is used for any items you wish to be executed before any of the screens are presented to the user One example usage for the Pre Screens Items would be to set a Find Action to execute pre screens and then use the Find Action result to set the Default Destination Directory in the Select Install Directory Screen Another way to use the Pre Screens Items would be to execute an Input Box action item pre screens request ing a registration number from the user Custom packages could then be dis played or not displayed in the Select Components screen based upon the registration number entered Custom packages are packages that you create For example if you want to include sam ples you can create a package Samples and add sample files to it Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Setting Existing Package Options 6 9 Setting Existing Package Options Creating a Package Installer VISE for Windows You can set options for the Typical Setup and Compact Setup packages included with Installer VISE To set options 1 Select the package for which you want to set options Select Properties from the Edit menu press the ALT and ENTER keys or double click on the package The Package Proper
392. t the fact that o q 16 bit installers were no longer supported in the v3 6 release Building from an old VCT that was set to build a 16 bit installer will now instead build a 32 bit installer The sample16 dll external code example project gt lt Back Cancel Illustration 2 2 Important Notes Window This screen contains the IMPORTANT READ THIS FIRST document You should read this document before continuing with the installation This document is included in the program folder once the installation is complete Installer VISE for Windows Installing Installer VISE Installer VISE for Windows 5 Click on the Next gt button The Software License Agreement screen appears Software License Agreement Ea Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement READ CAREFULLY This MindVision Installer VISE for Windows End User License Agreement Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity known as Customer and MindWision Software which owns a proprietary computer software installation system which includes computer software and on line or electronic documentation and associated media and printed materials collectively known as Installer VISE for Windows or Software By installing copying or otherwise using the Software or any Software Updates Customer agrees to be bound by the terms of this Agreement If
393. t to add by clicking the right mouse button and drop the item on the desired package or sub package Then select Add to Package from the menu In the following example of the Archive window the sub packages Database Sam ples Spreadsheet Samples and Word Processing Samples are associated with the regular package Samples The sub package Word Processing Samples is a list Chapter 6 Creating an installer Installer VISE for Windows Managing Package Items 6 17 package and contains the files Letter Memo and Report Untitled CT MindYision Installer ISE 10 x File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help Support Files CI Typical Setup Compact Setup 13 Silent Setup Modified Date 10 11 2000 10 50 AM 10 11 2000 10 50 AM 10 11 2000 10 50 4M 13 Pre Screens Items CI Samples 3 Database Samples 3 Spreadsheet Samples 3 Word Processing Samples For Help press F1 Illustration 6 15 Package Example When the customer runs the installer sub packages are displayed in this order beneath the Samples package and files are displayed in this order beneath the Word Processing Samples sub package Managing Package Installer VISE provides you with several functions that help you manage items you have items added to packages Deleting Items from Installer VISE provides you with three methods to delete items from
394. tall your software Each runtime variable that is available in Installer VISE is listed below with a link to its discussion later in this chapter 13 a Browser on page 19 2 m CDROMDrive on page 19 2 19 E CommonDesktop on page 19 2 13 E CommonFilesDir on page 19 2 19 E CommonPrograms on page 19 3 13 E CommonStartMenu on page 19 3 13 a CommonStartUp on page 19 3 13 E DetProgramFolder on page 19 3 13 a Desktop on page 19 3 13 El Fonts on page 19 4 a INetDataFilePath on page 19 4 13 a Organization on page 19 4 19 E ProductName on page 19 4 Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables 19 2 Browser CDROMDrive CommonDesktop CommonFilesDir Browser 13 al ProgramFilesDir on page 19 4 13 a Programs on page 19 5 13 a Restart on page 19 5 E SerialNumber on page 19 5 13 a SetupType on page 19 5 13 a SrcDir on page 19 5 13 al SrcDrive on page 19 5 13 a StartMenu on page 19 5 m StartUp on page 19 6 13 a SysDir on page 19 6 E SysDrive on page 19 6 13 a TargetDir on page 19 6 13 El TargetDirShort on page 19 6 13 E TargetDrive on page 19 6 am TempDir on page 19 6 a TempDrive on page 19 6 13 Bl UserName on page 19 6 13 a Win
395. tallation drag amp drop them from the Explorer or the File Manager Explorer Delete Details New Folder oe Illustration 5 2 Adding Files Folders To add files and folders 1 Drag and drop the existing files and or folders you want for the installation from the File Manager or the Explorer To access the Explorer click on the Explorer but ton The Explorer appears Select the items you want to add and drag and drop them onto the Files Folders window Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Adding Files and Folders 5 3 2 To create a new folder click on the New Folder button A folder appears with the name New Folder Click on the Details button The File Details dialog box appears File Details Fa Source pathname Illustration 5 3 Adding File Details Type the name of the folder in the Name field and the source path in the Source pathname field The Source pathname may be left blank Click on the OK button The Files Folders window appears 3 At the Files Folders window you can display the files within a folder by clicking on the checkbox next to the folder the folder and its files appear similar to the fol lowing Files Folders Please add the files folders that you want to create the installer for To add files folders to your installation drag amp drop them from the Explorer or the File Manager 3 Application 3 43 Samples 3 Database Samples 3 Spreadshe
396. tarts a new line only if the Want return property is enabled Multiline edit text fields can have scroll bars Edit text fields without scroll bars scroll as described in the previ ous paragraph Number Prevents the user from typing non numeric characters Horizontal Scroll Provides a horizontal scroll bar for a multiline edit text field Auto HScroll Automatically scrolls text to the right when the user types a character at the right end of the edit text field Vertical Scroll Provides a vertical scroll bar for a multiline edit text field Auto VScroll In a multiline edit text field Auto VScroll automatically scrolls text up one line when the user presses ENTER on the last line Password Displays all characters as an asterisk as they are typed into the edit text field This property is not available in multiline edit text items Want Return Specifies that a carriage return be inserted when the user presses the ENTER key while typing text into a multiline edit text field If this style is not specified pressing the ENTER key has the same effect as pressing the dialog box s default command button This style has no effect on a single line edit text item Installer VISE for Windows Creates a border around the edit text field Table 11 9 Edit Text Item Properties Chapter 11 Custom Screens 11 20 Group Box Properties Property Description Read only Prevents t
397. tem list with the individualized detail of the properties window by allowing you to customize the archive window column layout Properties associated with an archive item can now be included in the archive window columns Untitled MindYision Installer ISE 0 x File Edit View Screens Add Archive Tools Internet Layout Help osale Wed eae 2108 Default y EN 3 Support Files o i Modified Date Attrib 3 Typical Setup File Folder a Compact Setup M ExtCodes File Folder a Silent Setup ME Include File Folder L Pre Screens Items 4 3 ExtCodes h H File 6 24 1996 3 08 PM ME wini File Folder ME win32 File Folder M 7 Inst ISE cnt Help Contents File 7 7 1999 5 47 PM M 3 InstVise exe Application 6 29 2000 2 42 PM 3 Inst ISE GID GID File 10 11 2000 2 23 PM A INSTVISE HLP Help File 7 23 1999 12 56 PM ME Support File Folder v 3 Translator exe Application 7 30 1999 4 19 PM I PODIDO e gt gt IA AAA For Help press F1 Illustration 12 1 Standard Archive Window layout With Installer VISE you can construct a layout with an arrangement of columns which fits the type of installers you need to build If you do not use certain properties set up a lay out without those items In Installer VISE an Archive Window Layout contains the definition and ordering for the List Columns Layouts belong to the Insta
398. text supplied by Installer VISE leave the Use default text checkbox unchecked and continue with the following steps Chapter 10 Using installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Finished Message Screen Customizing the Finished Message Screen Installer VISE for Windows 10 23 4 Make entries in the following fields Important Notes Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Read Me Message Screen This field defaults to Last Minute Notes Important Notes text This field represents the text that appears on the Read Me Message window Do one of the following Find a text file with the Explorer or File Man ager then drag and drop it onto the frame The text in the file is appended to the text in this field Type the text you want to appear Table 10 12 Read Me Message Options 5 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Ready Me Message Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 6 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name
399. the Archive window Files and folders are automatically added to the Typical Setup package and you can add them to other packages if necessary See Creating Packages Sub Pack ages and List Packages on page 6 7 for more information You can add files and folders to an archive by using drag and drop Find the file or folder with the Explorer if you are using Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP and drag and drop it onto the Archive window You can add existing files and folders to an archive with the Add Files dialog box This dialog box displays the directory structure of your hard drive Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Installer VISE for Windows Using the Add Files Dialog Box Installer VISE for Windows To add files or folders using the Add Files dialog box 1 Select Files from the Add menu The Add Files dialog box appears Add Files File and folder names C Database Samples C Spreadsheet Samples C Word Processing gt work in progress Items to add Folders ENwork in progress samples gt FN Cancel ples E Database Samples readsheet Sample Word Processing Sa Drives f DATA Network Add Add All Remove Remove All Illustration 6 5 Add Files dialog The pathname of the current directory is displayed on the right side of the dialog box with the contents of the directory are displayed in the Folders list The File and
400. the Browse button to display a file selection dialog Step 4 Run Installers Ed Type the name of an installer to run D Work In Progress New Drivers N40118en exe Browse Run lt Back Next gt Cancel Illustration 14 6 Run installers Screen When you click the Run button the Snapshot Wizard will launch and execute the selected installer application Once the installer has finished running you can enter and run another installer s if you wish or click the Next button Chapter 14 Using the Snapshot Wizard Installer VISE for Windows Handling Restarts 14 7 Handling Restarts 11 Sometimes third party installers will force you to restart your machine during the installation process In these cases the Snapshot Wizard will automatically restart Installer VISE and return you to the Run Installers screen after these restarts In the rare case that this does not work you can also simply launch Installer VISE choose the Snapshot Wizard command and then open the existing snapshot file you have created The Snapshot Wizard will then skip the initial snapshot scan process and take you directly to the Run Installers screen Find Differences 12 The Find Differences screen is where the Snapshot Wizard will detect all the changes that the third party installers made to your machine During this scan you will see progress information being displayed including any differences as they are found You may stop the s
401. the Splash Screen 10 3 m Middle Right Bottom Left m Bottom Center Bottom Right m Stretch 7 Type the text that you want to appear in the upper left corner on the Background window in the Window title field For example type ProductName Setup The runtime variable ProductName 1s replaced with the name of your product The value of ProductName is set by selecting Installer Properties from the File menu and typing your product s name in the Product name field See Setting Installer Properties on page 6 30 for more information 8 Select one of the following options from the Progress dialog placement popmenu that represents where the Process dialog is to appear on the Background Window m Top Left Top Center m Top Right m Middle Left m Center m Middle Right Bottom Left m Bottom Center Bottom Right m Stretch 9 Click on the Hide progress dialog checkbox field if you do not want the Progress dialog to appear You should only use this option if you are using Installer VISE to set up your customer s system and not actually installing any files 10 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the Splash You can add a customized Splash Screen to your installer This screen can include a bit Screen map with the dimensions of 516x276 Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens 10 4 Customizing the Splash Screen To customize the Splash Screen 1 Chapte
402. the service state of existing services only Table 8 43 System Services General Properties Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Setting System Service Advanced Properties 8 73 Setting System Service Advanced Properties Installer VISE for Windows Function Check service state Instructs the installer to check the state of the service and return a true or false value 1f the condition indicated is true or false Display name Display name of the service This is the name that displays in the Services control panel May be a runtime variable Binary path name Specifies the path name of the service itself The service copies the service from the path indicated in the binary path name to the correct location for NT services Startup type Specifies the startup type of the service You can select Boot System Automatic Manual or Disabled Service type Specifies the service type of the service You can select Service that runs in its own process Service that shares a process with other services Kernel driver or File system driver Table 8 43 System Services General Properties System Service Properties 21 x R ecccccssceccceseneoesooees Log On s System account C User name Password Error control Normal y Dependencies separate names with commas Illustration 8 53 System Service Advanced Properties Chapter 8 Using Archive
403. this difference in your snapshot installer Differences Found ioj x This is a list of items that have changed on this system Checked items will be included in a new CT file which can then be used to create the repackaged installer Difference _ Name v O File New Get QuickTime Pro mow H WINNT Profile ul Mla Shortcut Modified MoviePlayer Ink H WINNT Profile v a Shortcut Modified PictureViewer Ink H WINNT Profile Y al Shortcut Modified ReadMe Ink H WINNT Profile v al Shortcut Modified Uninstall QuickTime 3 0 Ink H WINNT Profile v L File Modified outlook pst H WINNT Profile File Modified NTUSER DAT H WINNT Profile v O File Modified ntuser dat LOG H WINNT Profile _ File Modified software H WINNT spsterr O File Modified software LOG H WINNT systenr File Modified QTUninst dll H WINNT systenr v File Modified QuickTime gtp H WINNT systerr Y ab Registry value Modified Default HKEY_CLASSES_ v ab Registry value Modified Default HKEY_CLASSES_ v Ef Registry key New au HKEY_CLASSES_ v Ef Registry key New avi HKEY_CLASSES_ Vai Reaistry key New fle HKEY cass 4 b JE Shaw St ial ist tems st list temi Save Report Create WCT Cancel Oo Oo Oo Illustration 14 8 Differences Found List o o o Customizing Difference This list can be zoomed or resized to allow you to see all of the column information The List columns also can be sorted by clicking on the desired col
404. ties External Codes page appears Installer Properties x General Uninstaller External Codes System Requirements 7 Clear Before install t Clear After install Set Clear Initialization Se Se OK Cancel Help Illustration 17 2 Installer Properties External Codes page This dialog box provides you with the following options of when you want to call external code Function Initialization Calls the external code at the initialization of the install Before install Calls the external code before the installation After install Calls the external code after the installation Table 17 1 Calling External Code Options Chapter 17 Using External Code Installer VISE for Windows Calling External Code at Initialization 17 5 3 Click the Set button of the appropriate option The Call External Code Item Properties dialog box appears Call External Code Item Properties x External code dll file name Cancel Parameter 1 LONG fo Parameter 2 LPSTRI Store return value in this variable Illustration 17 3 Call External Code Item Properties dialog 4 Type the name of your dll file in the External code dll file name field For exam ple if your dll file is sample dll type sample dll You can also click on the button and the Select File from Archive dialog box appears similar to the following Select File from Archive x Select one of the files from the list below T
405. ties ha Ed grenpeeeeesssseseseeseg T Do not display Setup was unsuccessful dialog Illustration 8 51 Stop Action Properties General page 3 Make the following entries Do not display Setup was If checked the dialog will not be displayed when the unsuccessful dialog action is executed If unchecked it will be displayed Table 8 42 Stop Action General Fields See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the following Prop erty pages 19 a Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 a Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 E Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 19 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 72 System Services Action Item 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 System Services Action You can add a System Services action to the archive using the System Services action item item command This action allows you to install remove or change the state of a system ser vice This action works only when the installer is run on Windows NT or greater You must be logged on as a user with Administrator privileges To add a System Services action item 1 Select System Services from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select
406. ties window appears Package Properties 1 dx prrggereasacananinannn Package size p KB size will be calculated at build time if unchecked I Restart After Installing Illustration 6 7 Package Properties window 2 Select from the following options Package Size Do one of the following If you want the installer to check the package size during the install click this checkbox Type the size in the KB field If you want the installer to calculate the size at build time do not click on this check box Restart After Installing If you want the customer to have the option to restart the computer after the installation click on this checkbox This forces all running applications to quit when the customer chooses the restart option Table 6 3 Package Properties Options 3 Close the window The Archive window appears You can create custom packages to add to the archive Once a package is created it appears on the left side of the Archive window How you set up your packages in the Package Properties window affects what appears to the customer in the Select Compo nents screen of the installer System and language requirements can be set for custom packages If a package does not meet the requirements it is not available to the customer For more information see 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Creating a Package
407. tion file for your archive A dialog named Create Translation File will be displayed In this dialog you have the option to choose which language you would like to use as the source language and whether or not you want the source strings to be used as the default translations If you click OK a standard file dialog will be displayed asking where you would like to save the translation file Translation files can be opened with the file Translator exe which is included with the Installer VISE installation You would typically send the translation file and the translator app to the person who is going to do the translation work for you Translator exe requires Windows 9 x Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP to run and is located in the same folder as Installer VISE Import Translation File Click this button to import a translation file into your archive A standard file dialog will be displayed asking for the file to import After you select a file a dialog named Import Translation File will be displayed In this dialog you may specify which language strings you are importing and the installer resources to associate with this language After the strings are imported the language will be added to the Languages list Edit When clicked the selected language in the Languages list can be edited You can set the installer resources for the language Remove If clicked the selected language in the Language
408. tion on setting the following Prop erty pages 13 a Advanced Property Page on page 9 1 13 E Packages Property Page on page 9 4 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 19 E Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 E Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 E After Property Page on page 9 13 Delete Action Item You can add a Delete action to the archive using the Delete action item command Delete actions can be used to delete files and folders by name and location You can use created date modified date and version information as advanced search criteria Wildcard charac ters can also be used Chapter 8 Using Archive Items Installer VISE for Windows Delete Action Item 8 11 s Delete actions do not find hidden files or folders Use this action item with care especially when using Wildcard characters You might accidentally delete a file you did not intend to walling To add a Delete action item 1 Select Delete Action from the Action Item toolbar or open the Add Item dialog and select Delete Action A Delete action item is added to the archive and the Delete Action Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Delete Action Properties General page appears Delete ction Properties 20 x Delete
409. tion path name of the temporary directory that the installer creates at runtime and deletes when it is finished For example C Temp vis026e The TempDrive variable contains the drive letter of the destination path name of the temporary directory that the installer creates at runtime and deletes when it 1s finished For example C The UserName variable holds the name entered by the customer in the Registration 13 Information installer screen See Customizing the Registration Information Screen on page 10 11 for more information Saving this information in the registry is a good example of how this variable can be used 13 See Registry Entry Action Item on page 8 58 for more information The WinDir variable contains the path name of the current Windows directory For example C Windows Chapter 19 Using Runtime Variables Installer VISE for Windows WinDrive WinDrive User defined Variables Using Variables for Text Substitution Declaring a Variable and Setting Initial Value Installer VISE for Windows 19 7 The WinDrive variable contains the letter of the drive where the current Windows directory is located For example C Variables are placeholders that are filled with values when the installer is run on the cus tomer s computer Runtime variables can be used for text substitution as well as for pro gram logic Runtime variables can be set by Assi
410. tives can be assigned to m Action Items Files and Folders and Packages See Build Directives Property Page on page 9 11 Build Directive Setup To set up build directives for an archive 1 Add to the archive all files folders and action items for all installer builds Your archive should contain a superset of all installer builds 2 Select Build Directives from the Archive menu Archive Illustration 15 2 Build Directives menu item Chapter 15 Advanced Project Management Installer VISE for Windows No Build Directive Assigned 15 3 3 Enter build directive names for each build directive you will need Build Directives EW Debug Build Basic Install Deluxe Install New Duplicate Cancel ewe Em Illustration 15 3 Enter Build Directive Names Build Directives are not mutually exclusive They may be used together For exam ple in the illustration above we may want to build an installer which will include all items for Debug Build Basic Install Deluxe Install and Deluxe Fonts All build directives would be checked in that case On the other hand a Basic Debug installer would be built if only the first two build directives were checked 4 Close the Build Directives window by clicking the OK button 5 Assign build directives to any item which will be limited by checking build direc tives in the Build Directive tab of the item s properties File Properties fed Ed Ge
411. to remove your software from their computer T Include an uninstaller Click the Build Installer button to build your installer Click the Test Installer button to build and Build Installer Test Installer Click the Close button when you are finished then test your installer Illustration 5 13 Archive Wizard Ready to Build 1 At the Ready To Build window select one of the following radio buttons Function Single File Installer Creates a single exe file Use this option if you want to distribute the installer via the network e mail BBS or CD ROM Floppy based Installer Breaks the installer into segments Use this option if you want to distribute the installer on floppy diskettes Table 5 5 Ready to Build Options 2 Click on the Include an uninstaller checkbox if you want to provider your custom ers with the option of removing your software if necessary 3 Click on the Test Installer button The installer appears for you to review See Testing an Installer on page 6 44 for more information Once the test installer 15 finished the Ready to Build window appears Make any necessary changes 4 Click on the Build Installer button The installer is built and the Ready to Build window appears See Building the Final Installer on page 6 45 for more informa tion 5 Click on the Close button The Archive window appears If you need to edit anything you set up with the Archive Wizard you
412. to create a Delete action for it lt new gt This item did not exist when the archive was created You can add this item to your new updater archive The new file will be added in its entirety to the new updater archive The default is to select new files lt newer gt The version of the item in the source folder is newer than the item in the archive An update file will be created and added to your updater archive The default is to select newer files since these are the ones that you will most commonly want to create update files for An WM appears in The item has been selected for adding to the new updater the box to the left of archive an item An appears inthe Some items within the folder have been selected to add to box to the left of an the updater archive item Table 16 1 Modification Indicators 6 After making any modifications click the Create button 7 During the create process a progress dialog is displayed Comparing Files EZ ltems Remaining 5 File vBG3_BMP upd Comparing Files RETLATARANAENAMEAMADAANENI t 3 tj Updater VISE Copyright 1993 2003 MindWision Software Illustration 16 5 AutoCreate Progress Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer VISE for Windows The AutoCreate Updater Process 16 5 8 After processing a Save As dialog like the one below will be displayed Select the name and location for the newly created updater archive Sav
413. to use The selected icon appears in the Current icon field File Name E Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio Commons Graphics Current icon Illustration 6 33 Selecting Icon to use 5 Click on the OK button The Installer Properties General page appears displaying the selected icon Installer Properties EZ General Uninstaller External Codes System Requirements Web Product name Segment size M yProduct Unlimited za Generate log file Suggest reboot after successful setup CDROM install I Store files in archive Custom installer icon Debug version V Install empty folders Change con Assign time zone adjusted dates to installed files T Hide Starting Setup Please wait dialog lESEIVE fo K on first disk Authenticode support IV Validate file paths when saving project MV Rollback changes after cancelled installs Cancel Help Illustration 6 34 Installer Properties displaying new icon If checked the created modified times of installed files will be set relative to the time zone where the installer was created If unchecked the created modified times will set be the time zone where the installer was created no matter which time zone the installer is run For example 1f the installer is created in the Central Time Zone Assign time zone adjusted dates to installed files is checked and the installer is run in the Eastern Time Zone the in
414. tories Registry Keys and INI files You may not wish to capture the entire machine state in many cases For instance if your machine has multiple drives and you know an installer is only going to install files on one drive you may wish to exclude the scanning of the other drives Likewise most current installers do not write to ini files but if you know that one does you can specifically point to a particular 1mi file to capture its state The Directories list can contain any drives or directories that you want to skip dur ing the snapshot scan process Click on the Add button to bring up a dialog that allows you to select the directory you wish to exclude from the snapshot To delete a directory from the list after it has been added select it and then click the Remove button The Registry Key list can contain any registry keys that you want to skip during the snapshot scan process Click on the Add button to bring up a dialog that allows you to select the registry key you wish to exclude from the snapshot To delete a registry key from the list after it has been added select 1t and then click the Remove button The INI Files list can contain any ini files that you want to include during the snapshot scan process gt Please note that the INI Files list is the opposite of the Directory and Registry Key lists in that it is an inclusion list not an exclusion list Nor mally the snapshot just treats
415. u to do m Delete items on the customer s system m Move items on the customer s system to a new location m Rename items on the customer s system m Find items on the customer s system You may use the result of the action item to move existing files or install new files to the location where the item you looked for was found m Create shortcuts of items in the archive and place them in a specific location on the customer s system E Link the installation of files or the execution of other archive items to the suc cess or failure of any number of action items List of Archive Items Following are the different archive items available with the icon that represents each item on the Archive Items toolbars Archive item Description Billboard a You can add a Billboard to your installer using the Billboard action 1tem See Billboard Action Item on page 8 5 Call External Code ES You can call external code at any point during the install by adding a Call External Code action to an archive 14 See Call External Code Action Item on page 8 7 Comment vy Adds a new comment to the archive These com ments can be used as a reminder to later clarify the purpose of your archive See Comment Item on page 8 8 Copy a Copy actions can be used to copy files and folders on the customer s machine 19 See Copy Action Item on page 8 9 Delete iy Delete actions can be used to
416. uage 5 Select the installer resources to associate with this language in the Installer resources field Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 18 Creating installers in Different Languages 18 10 Importing the Translation File into the Installer 6 Click on the OK button The Language Properties window appears with the selected language file in the Languages field similar to the following Language Properties EG Create Translation File Import Translation File Edit Remove Default language is Engish o YS Default installer resources AS Default display text E nglish T Show select language dialog guage that you would like to use during the Illustration 18 9 Language Properties with selected language file 7 Repeat these steps for each language file you want to add to the archive 8 If you are creating a single language installer click on the Close button The Archive window appears If you are creating a multi language installer continue with step 9 9 Select the language with which you want the default strings in the archive to be associated in the Default language 15 popmenu For example if the Show select lan guage dialog checkbox is checked and the default language is Spanish the Select Language dialog lists the default strings as Spanish 10 Select the language in which you want the default resources to appear in the installer in the Default installer resource popmenu
417. umn title or re ordered by drag ging the column title to the desired position Type Column This column displays the type of difference There is also a checkbox to the left of this type that determines whether or not to include this item in your snapshot installer You can click on this checkbox to turn it on or off Difference Column This column displays what the difference actually 1s It tells you whether the entry is new has been modified or has been deleted Name Column This column displays the actual name of the file registry or ini file that has changed Location Column This column displays the path for the file registry or ini file Show Skip List Items The previous section described the SkipList txt file and how it filters common operating system files and registry entries that you would normally not want to include in your snapshot installer If you wish to show these items and even select one of them to include in your snapshot installer turn on this checkbox Save Report You can save the difference list to a comma separated text file by clicking on the Save Report button This may be very useful information to save for future diagnostic or troubleshooting purposes Create VCT Once you have selected the differences that you wish to include in your snapshot installer click on the Create VCT button This will automatically create a new installer archive that contains the appropriate directories files
418. unchecked and continue with the following steps 3 Make entries in the following fields Select Components Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Select Components Screen This field defaults to Select Components Select Components text Type the text you want to appear on the Select Compo nents Screen This field defaults to Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Table 10 9 Select Components Options 4 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Select Components Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the following m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Select Program Folder Screen 10 19 5 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determi
419. ur native language you must create a translation file for each language you wish to handle Translation files after required processing contain localized versions of the text that you entered in the installer In contrast language files contain localized versions of the text Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages 18 2 Supported Languages Localization Process Single Language Installers Multi Language Installers Supported Languages that is built into the installer To illustrate the difference a localized installer built with a translation file but without the corresponding language file would result in the following m Custom text such as screen messages displayed in the intended language m Built in text such as button text displayed in the default language of the installer Supported Languages Afrikaans Faeroese Lithuanian Albanian Farsi Norwegian Arabic Finnish Polish Basque French Portuguese Belarusian German Romanian Bulgarian Greek Russian Catalan Hebrew Slovak Chinese Hungarian Slovene Croatian Icelandic Spanish Czech Indonesian Swedish Table 18 1 Supported Languages How you create a localized installer depends on whether you want a single language installer or a multi language installer Following are the steps for creating a single language installer 1 Create a translation file for the new language 2 Translate the translatio
420. used to setup your installation The product name is displayed on the background window and the wizard dialogs during the install You do not need to enter the word Setup into this field Example My Product 2 0 Product name My Product 2 0 The default directory is where your software will be installed by default on the target computer Example 4ProgramFilesDir My Product Default director ProgramPilesDirZ E Close Illustration 5 1 Archive Wizard Chapter 5 Using the Archive Wizard Adding Files and Folders Most of the windows in the Archive Wizard contain a Back and Close button If you click on the Close button the Archive Wizard closes and the Archive window appears If you click on the lt Back button the pre vious window in the Archive Wizard appears Product Name Type the name of your product For example type My Product 2 0 Default Directory Click on the button to access the Choose Directory dialog box and select the default directory where you want your software to be installed by default on the customer s computer Table 5 1 Archive Wizard Screen 1 Fields 2 Click on the Next gt button The Files Folder window appears Adding Files and Folders The Files Folders window allows you to add existing files and folders and create new fold ers Files Folders Please add the files folders that you want to create the installer for To add files folders to your ins
421. ustration 13 10 Properties of Dil Dependency File 6 Click OK to add the checked files to your installer Dependency Walker The Dependency Walker can be used to scan an executable s header and determine implicit DLL dependencies To use the Dependency Walker 1 Select Dependency Walker from the Tools menu Tools Archive Wizard Visual Basic Project Wizard Snapshot Wizard Dependency Watcher Dependency Walker verity Archive Purchase Installer WISE Illustration 13 11 Dependency Walker menu item Chapter 13 Installer VISE Tools Installer VISE for Windows Verify Archive Verify Archive Installer VISE for Windows 2 Type the executable s path in the field named Application path or click the Browse button and select the file you want to scan Open olal Look in a Updater VISE c i Tutorial updvise exe File name Jupdvise exe Files of type Executable Files exe Cancel Le Illustration 13 12 Selecting Executable 3 Click the Walk button to start scanning Dependency Walker x Enter a file s path and click Walk to process a module and determine implicit module dependencies Application path E Program Files Installer VISE 2 7 1 Updater VISE updvise Browse i Modules marked with an asterisk are core operating system components and should be added at your own risk Add duplicate files Module 4
422. utorial files Details Turn on the checkbox next to Exercises to install all files associated with this package To specify which files to install click Details and make your selection s Space Required OK Space Available 532240 K lt Back Cancel Illustration 6 11 Select Components Displaying Sub Packages In the case of sub packages the Select Components screen gives the user the following install options m Select the main package to install all its related components m Click Details to select specific sub packages to install as illustrated below Exercises d x Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Components Beginning exercises JAdvanced exercises OK Description If you are a first time user of MyApp you should install this Details package Space Required 0K Space Available 531654 K Cancel Illustration 6 12 Select Components Displaying Details m Install none of the available components Sub packages are complete packages of files which are part of another package Informa tion entered about a sub package affects the Select Components window of the installer When you create sub packages they appear on the left side of the Archive window and are indented under the package with which they are associated You cannot add sub packages to the Support Files Typical Setup Compact Setup or Silen
423. variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 8 Click on the OK button The Archive window appears Customizing the Ready You can customize the installer s Ready To Install Message Screen You can add a side bit To Install Message map with the dimensions of 138x258 pixels Screen Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Ready To Install Message Screen 10 21 To customize the Ready to Install Message Screen 1 Select Ready to Install Message from the Screens menu The Ready To Install Message dialog box appears Ready To Install Message x M Show this dialog MV Use default text Ready To Install Setup now has enough information to start installing ProductN ame Click Back to make any changes before continuing Click Cancel to exit Setup T Current settings an Set Clear Wariable Click to assign i f Cancel Help Illustration 10 13 Ready To Install Message dialog 2 Click on the Show this dialog checkbox if you want the Ready to Install Message Screen to appear during the install 3 Click on the Use default text checkbox if you want to use the localized text sup plied by Installer
424. ve using the add Edit CON FIG SYS command This command can do the following m Add text to the beginning or the end of a file m Insert a line of text before the search line or after the search line Comments lines that match the search criteria The uninstaller can undo all of these actions If the file does not exist and text is being added the file is created To add an Edit CONFIG SYS item 1 At the Archive window select Edit CONFIG SYS Item from the Standard toolbar or the Add menu An Edit CONFIG SYS item is added to the archive and the Edit CONFIG SYS Item Properties window appears 2 Click on the General tab The Edit CONFIG SYS Item Properties General page appears Edit CONFIG SYS Item Properties 24 x prongornenencsensarezen Action Add text to beginning of file y Search text commented lines willbe skipped gt Match entire line only Text to add Tl Don t add to uninstaller Illustration 8 16 Edit CONFIG SYS Item Properties General Page Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 8 Using Archive Items 8 22 Edit CONFIG SYS Item 3 Select one of the following options from the Action popmenu indicating what is to be done with the file Function Add text to beginning of Adds the text in the Text to add field to the beginning of file the file If the file does not exist it is created Add text to end of file Adds the text in the Text to add field to the end of the file If the file does not
425. w to phrase text that informs the customers of their options It is strongly recommended that you develop a design document for the installer outlining how you intend to build 1t The following section contains more details about how the functionality of Installer VISE can shape the way you develop your installer The basic building blocks of an Installer VISE installer are packages files folders and other items which are stored and managed in an archive The archive for an installation set contains every file that might need to be installed For each item in the archive you can set a variety of options Packages for the installation are defined within the archive and contain different combina tions of files that the customer can choose from to fully customize the installation of your software The customer can choose between Typical Setup which by default installs every file in the archive Compact Setup which installs the minimum number of required files Chapter 4 Designing an Installer 4 2 Sample Options for Files and Custom Setup which lets the customer choose from the customized packages that you created Sample Options for Files Following is a sample of some of the kinds of information you can specify for each file or folder in an archive m Which packages it is part of m The location on the target system where the item will be installed Whether system requirements should be checked or custom code called before or aft
426. where the ini file entry can be stored File Type the name of the ini file you want to use If the file does not exist and you selected Write entry the file is created for you Section Type the section of the ini file For example type Pref erences Key Type the key to be read written or removed Value If you selected Write entry type the value to be set You can use variable names here Default If you selected Read entry type the default value if the entry is not found Table 8 27 Ini File Entry Fields 4 Check on the Don t add to uninstaller checkbox if you do not want the ini file entry to be added to the uninstall log and not to be removed when the uninstaller is run See Chapter 9 Setting Common Properties for information on setting the remaining Ini File Entry Property pages 13 a System Property Page on page 9 4 13 E Languages Property Page on page 9 7 13 El Actions Property Page on page 9 8 13 a Comments Property Page on page 9 12 13 a Before Property Page on page 9 12 13 a After Property Page on page 9 13 Input Box Action Item You can add a Input Box to your installer using the Input Box action item command This action item displays an input box when the customer runs your installer You can use a input box to allow the customer to enter information then based on that input take dif ferent paths of execution To add an Input Box a
427. while holding down the SHIFT key SHIFT clicking an item will also deselect that item Note that the custom dialog item itself cannot be selected with other items To select multiple items at once 1 Make sure the dialog item is NOT selected 2 Click the left mouse button while anywhere in your custom dialog item 3 While holding down the left mouse button drag around all the items you wish to select 4 Release the left mouse button Repositioning an Item s To reposition an item s first select it and then drag the item s to the desired position The item s current coordinates will by displayed in the status bar Resizing an Item To resize an item first select it click on the desired resize handle and then resize the item The cursor will automatically change as you move over each resize handle to show you Chapter 11 Custom Screens Installer VISE for Windows Setting Properties for an Item 11 23 which way you will be resizing the item The item s current size will by displayed in the sta tus bar Screen Editor OF x File Edit Layout Align Untitled Dialog Enter your name and email below Email e For Help press F1 ri 56 34 Illustration 11 24 Resizing a Screen Item Note that you can only resize one item at a time Buttons checkboxes radio buttons and pictures can also be resized to fit their content by using the Size to Content command See Size to Content on p
428. who created the translation file Otherwise the field is blank 5 Repeat these steps until all files have been translated 6 Select Save from the File menu The file is saved and can be imported into the archive Importing the Once you receive the translation file with the translation you need to import it into the Translation File into the installer Installer To import the translation file 1 At the Archive window select Language Properties from the File menu The Lan guage Properties dialog box appears Chapter 18 Creating Installers in Different Languages Installer VISE for Windows Importing the Translation File into the Installer 18 9 2 Click on the Import Translation File button The Select a Translator Data File to Import dialog box appears Select a Translator Data File to Import Look in work in progress Z Filename Spanish dat Files of type Data Files dat hal Cancel Comcel Illustration 18 7 Select a Translator Data File to import 3 Select the translation file and click OK The Import Translation File dialog box appears Import Translation File x Target language Spanish a Cancel Installer resources English hg Illustration 18 8 Import Translation File dialog 4 Ifyou are creating a single language installer select Default Language from Tar get language popmenu If you are creating a multi language installer select the appropriate lang
429. window select Screens from the menu bar The Screens menu appears Screens Background Window Splash Screen v Welcome Screen Read Me Message Requirements Screen License Agreement Verify Password Registration Information v Select Install Directory Select Install Type Select Components Select Program Folder v Ready to Install Message Read Me Message v Finished Message Finished Message 2 Illustration 6 18 Screens menu Once you add an installer screen to an archive a check mark appears to the left of the screen name on this menu Select the item you wish to add List of Installer Screens Following are the installer screens that can be added to an installer Installer VISE for Windows m Background Window m Splash Screen m Welcome Screen m Read Me Message m Requirements Screen m License Agreement m Verify Password m Registration Information m Select Install Directory m Select Install Type m Select Components m Select Program Folders Chapter 6 Creating an Installer Adding Installer Screens to an Archive Adding Automated Billboards Adding Installer Screens to an Archive m Ready To Install Message m Read Me Message m Finished Message m Finished Message 2 The screens with an asterisk are selected by default To add an Installer Screen to an archive 1 Select the screen you want to add from the Add menu The s
430. with the following steps 4 Type the text you want to appear in the title bar of the Read Me Message window in the Important Notes field 5 In the Important Notes text field do one of the following m Find a text file with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The text in the file 1s appended to the text in this field m Type the text you want to appear 6 You can use the default bitmap displayed or you can add your own customized bit map to the Read Me Message Screen To select your own bitmap do one of the fol lowing m Click on the Set button The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap you want to add and click on the Open button The bitmap appears in the dialog box m Find the bitmap with the Explorer or File Manager then drag and drop it onto the frame The bitmap appears in the dialog box Chapter 10 Using Installer Screens Installer VISE for Windows Customizing the Requirements Screen 10 7 Customizing the Requirements Screen Installer VISE for Windows Click on the Clear button if you need to delete the bitmap 7 The Variable field can be used to assign the screen a variable name If the variable is set to 1 or TRUE the screen will be displayed If the variable is set to 0 or FALSE the screen will not be shown If the variable is set to something else the installer will use the Show this dialog checkbox to determine if the screen should be dis played 8 Click
431. xpect from MindVision prod ucts We would like to thank you for choosing MindVision s Installer VISE for Windows Installer VISE for Windows continues the tradition set by Installer VISE for Macintosh by providing an easy to use yet powerful software delivery solution Installer VISE is packed with features to streamline the creation and editing of installation programs including an easy to use drag and drop interface background and billboard options standard setup support typical compact custom and silent icon and shortcut creation registry and ini support read me and license agreement support version check ing font installation VISE technology compression uninstall single exe support and NT Services support The same installer can run under Windows 95 Windows 95 OSR2 Windows 98 Windows 98SE Windows Me Windows NT 3 x Windows NT 4 Windows 2000 and Windows XP Years of expertise have established our products among such companies as Adobe Claris Corel Microsoft Netscape and more Now you too can join their ranks Installer VISE for Windows provides an easy to use graphical interface for building a mas ter installation set for floppy disks CD ROM network or Internet distribution Installer VISE maximizes the storage capacity of your media by efficiently compressing the pieces of a product The Installer VISE compression and decompression engine provides an extremely efficient means of storing and retrieving data
432. xt Document 4 20 00 9 19 AM Silent Setup O Purchase txt 1KB Text Document 4 20 00 9 13 AM CI Pre Screens Items C C Nopurchase txt 1KB Text Document 10 5 00 3 46 PM Y eSeller Package C Serial Numbers txt 2KB Text Document 9 21 00 10 20 AM tl Demo Package C C My pp exe 343KB Application 9 19 00 4 22 PM 71 MyAppDemo exe 343KB Application 9 19 00 4 22 PM For Help press F1 Illustration 15 13 Archive window with build target selection Beginning with version 3 5 Installer VISE integrates seamlessly with eSellerate the power ful new e commerce system from MindVision Sign up for our optional eSellerate service and sell software directly to your customer from inside your installer With eSellerate s Installer eSeller your customers can m Purchase and install the retail version of your product m Install the demo version of your product first and later purchase the retail ver sion from inside the application using eSellerate s Integrated eSeller technology eSellerate will guarantee that your installers always deliver the latest version of your soft ware at the latest price Your customers will never again install outdated software Everything you need to integrate your installer with the eSellerate system is available in the Edit Build Target eSeller tab and the Package Properties Advanced tab Edit
433. y C Program Files Installer VISE 3 6 1 Browse Space Required 39358 K Space Available 186016 K F Cancel Illustration 2 4 Choose Destination Location Window Chapter 2 Getting Started Installing Installer VISE You want to install Installer VISE in the default directory Click on the Next gt button The Select Program folder screen appears You want to change the install directory Click on the Browse button The Choose Location dialog box appears Please choose the directory for installation Path C Program Files Installer VISE 3 6 1 Directories ComPlus Applications directx Ea Installer WISE 3 6 1 Cancel Intemet Explorer lomega Logitech y Drives c Boot Network Select the directory where you want to install Installer VISE in the Path field and click on the OK but ton The Select Program Folder screen appears Table 2 1 Destination Options 8 The Select Setup Type screen allows you to select a typical setup or to select spe cific components to be installed J1 Setup Type Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Next Typical Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users C Custom You can choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users Space Required 39358 K Space Available 148142 K E Cancel Illustration 2 5 Select Setup
434. you change any update or new files 4 Click the Select button for the Compare To folder Chapter 16 AutoCreate Updater Archive Installer VISE for Windows The AutoCreate Updater Process Installer VISE for Windows 16 3 Navigate through your file hierarchy until the name of the source folder for the archive is displayed in the window Select the source folder for the archive by click ing its name and click Select at the right of the dialog box Select Folder x Path a work in progress Directories Bs Cancel 3 work in progress Drives g DATA v Network Illustration 16 3 Selecting the Compare To folder If the items in your archive are not stored in a folder you ll be prompted to locate the first item in the archive If any items in the archive are stored in a different location than the first item you ll also be asked to locate those items on your sys tem A Create Updater window will then be displayed allowing you to override any indt vidual item See the Modification Indicators table below for an explanation of the status messages Create Updater Installer ISE 3 5 CT j x Previous Difference Get Info Next Difference Cancel Add b gt D D D 5 file s different Y 3 InstallerVISE Mn Installer VISE Archive Disk Status
435. you are designing your custom screen However you may wish to use variables to dynamically set the titles or other information displayed in some of the item types at run time Below is a summary of each item type and the variable substitution you can use Item Type Variable Substitution Button Title of button Check Box Title of Check Box Radio Button Title of Radio Button Combo Box Item List Static Text Text displayed in static text Edit Text Default text displayed in edit text Group Box None Picture None Table 11 13 Screen Item Variable Substitution To use variable substitution type the name of the variable with a percentage sign on each side as follows Y MY_ VARIABLE A Remember that variable substitution is ONLY used to dynamically set the data displayed initially for an item To store the results of an item s state when the user exits your custom screen you still need to create separate variables as described in the previous sections m Installer VISE for Windows Chapter 12 12 1 Customizing the Archive Window Archive Window Overview User definable Archive Window Layouts Archive Window Layouts Defined Installer VISE for Windows Much of the work of building installers takes place in the Archive Window and in the Properties windows for individual items Installer VISE combines the overall scope of the Archive Window i

Installer VISE User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents